COPA1 ST Sem TP

COMPUTER OPERATOR AND
PROGRAMMING ASSISTANT
NSQF (LEVEL - 4)
1st Semester
TRADE PRACTICAL
SECTOR: IT & ITES
DIRECTORATE GENERAL OF TRAINING

MINISTRY OF SKILL DEVELOPMENT & ENTREPRENEURSHIP
GOVERNMENT OF INDIA
NATIONAL INSTRUCTIONAL
MEDIA INSTITUTE, CHENNAI
Post Box No. 3142, CTI Campus, Guindy, Chennai - 600 032
Copyright @ NIMI Not to be Republished
Sector : IT & ITES
Duration : 1 - Year
Trade : Computer Operator and Programming Assistant
1st Semester - Trade Practical- NSQF (Level - 4)
Copyright © 2018 National Instructional Media Institute, Chennai

First Edition : September 2018 Copies : 1,000
Second Edition : December 2018 Copies : 1,000
Rs.405/-
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication can be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical,
including photocopy, recording or any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the
National Instructional Media Institute, Chennai.
Published by:
NATIONAL INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA INSTITUTE
P. B. No.3142, CTI Campus, Guindy Industrial Estate,
Guindy, Chennai - 600 032.
Phone : 044 - 2250 0248, 2250 0657, 2250 2421
Fax : 91 - 44 - 2250 0791
email : chennai-nimi@nic.in, nimi_bsnl@dataone.in
Website: www.nimi.gov.in
(ii)
FOREWORD
The Government of India has set an ambitious target of imparting skills to 30 crores people, one out of every
four Indians, by 2020 to help them secure jobs as part of the National Skills Development Policy. Industrial
Training Institutes (ITIs) play a vital role in this process especially in terms of providing skilled manpower.
Keeping this in mind, and for providing the current industry relevant skill training to Trainees, ITI syllabus
has been recently updated with the help of Mentor Councils comprising various stakeholder's viz. Industries,
Entrepreneurs, Academicians and representatives from ITIs.
The National Instructional Media Institute (NIMI), Chennai, has now come up with instructional material to
suit the revised curriculum for Computer Operator and Programming Assistant Trade Practical 1st
Semester in IT & ITES Sector . The NSQF Level - 4 Trade Practical will help the trainees to get an international
equivalency standard where their skill proficiency and competency will be duly recognized across the globe
and this will also increase the scope of recognition of prior learning. NSQF Level - 4 trainees will also get
the opportunities to promote life long learning and skill development. I have no doubt that with NSQF Level
- 4 the trainers and trainees of ITIs, and all stakeholders will derive maximum benefits from these IMPs and
that NIMI's effort will go a long way in improving the quality of Vocational training in the country.
The Executive Director & Staff of NIMI and members of Media Development Committee deserve appreciation
for their contribution in bringing out this publication.
Jai Hind
RAJESH AGGARWAL
Director General/ Addl. Secretary
Ministry of Skill Development & Entrepreneurship,
Government of India.
New Delhi - 110 001
(iii)
PREFACE
The National Instructional Media Institute (NIMI) was established in 1986 at Chennai by then Directorate
General of Employment and Training (D.G.E & T), Ministry of Labour and Employment, (now under
Directorate General of Training, Ministry of Skill Development and Entrepreneurship) Government of India,
with technical assistance from the Govt. of the Federal Republic of Germany. The prime objective of this
institute is to develop and provide instructional materials for various trades as per the prescribed syllabi
under the Craftsman and Apprenticeship Training Schemes.
The instructional materials are created keeping in mind, the main objective of Vocational Training under
NCVT/NAC in India, which is to help an individual to master skills to do a job. The instructional materials
are generated in the form of Instructional Media Packages (IMPs). An IMP consists of Theory book,
Practical book, Test and Assignment book, Instructor Guide, Audio Visual Aid (Wall charts and
Transparencies) and other support materials.
The trade practical book consists of series of exercises to be completed by the trainees in the workshop.
These exercises are designed to ensure that all the skills in the prescribed syllabus are covered. The trade
theory book provides related theoretical knowledge required to enable the trainee to do a job. The test and
assignments will enable the instructor to give assignments for the evaluation of the performance of a
trainee. The wall charts and transparencies are unique, as they not only help the instructor to effectively
present a topic but also help him to assess the trainee's understanding. The instructor guide enables the
instructor to plan his schedule of instruction, plan the raw material requirements, day to day lessons and
demonstrations.
IMPs also deals with the complex skills required to be developed for effective team work. Necessary care
has also been taken to include important skill areas of allied trades as prescribed in the syllabus.
The availability of a complete Instructional Media Package in an institute helps both the trainer and
management to impart effective training.
The IMPs are the outcome of collective efforts of the staff members of NIMI and the members of the Media
Development Committees specially drawn from Public and Private sector industries, various training institutes
under the Directorate General of Training (DGT), Government and Private ITIs.
NIMI would like to take this opportunity to convey sincere thanks to the Directors of Employment &
Training of various State Governments, Training Departments of Industries both in the Public and Private
sectors, Officers of DGT and DGT field institutes, proof readers, individual media developers and coordinators,
but for whose active support NIMI would not have been able to bring out this materials.
R. P. DHINGRA
Chennai - 600 032 EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR
(iv)
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
National Instructional Media Institute (NIMI) sincerely acknowledges with thanks for the co-operation and
contribution extended by the following Media Developers and their sponsoring organisations to bring out this
Instructional Material (Trade Practical) for the trade of Computer Operator and Programming Assistant under
the IT & ITES Sector.
MEDIA DEVELOPMENT COMMITTEE MEMBERS
Shri. C.Jeyaprakash - Technical Head

Cadd Cae Industrial School,
Dindigul, Tamil Nadu
Shri. S.Venkadesh Babu - Chief Executive Officer

NSree Media Technologies,
Dindigul, Tamil Nadu
Shri. M.Manjunath - Junior Training Officer

Govt. I.T.I, Mysore
Karnataka
Shri. Imdadullah - JTO,

Govt. I.T.I., Mysore,
Karnataka
Smt. R. Jeyalakshmi - Training officer,

Govt. I.T.I., Coimbatore
Tamil Nadu
Shri. K. Kumaravel - ATO,

Govt. I.T.I., Central Prison Campus, Trichy
Tamil Nadu
Smt. S. Jemmakalgani - ATO,

Govt. I.T.I., Tirunelveli,
Tamil Nadu
Shri. S. Chithrakumar - ATO,

Govt. I.T.I., Dindigul
Tamil Nadu
Shri. J. Herman - Assitant Manager,

Co-ordinator, NIMI,
Chennai - 32
Shri. V. Gopalakrishnan - Assitant Manager,

Co-ordinator, NIMI,
Chennai - 32
NIMI records its appreciation for the Data Entry, CAD, DTP operators for their excellent and devoted services
in the process of development of this Instructional Material.
NIMI also acknowledges with thanks the invaluable efforts rendered by all other NIMI staff who have contributed
towards the development of this Instructional Material.
NIMI is also grateful to everyone who has directly or indirectly helped in developing this Instructional Material.
(v)
INTRODUCTION
TRADE THEORY
The manual of trade theory consists of theorectical information for the First Semester couse of the
COPATrade. The contents are sequenced accoring to the practical exercise contained in the manual on Trade
practical. Attempt has been made to relate the theortical aspects with the skill covered in each exercise to
the extent possible. This co-relation is maintained to help the trainees to develop the perceptional capabilities
for performing the skills.
The Trade Theory has to be taught and learnt along with the corresponding exercise contained in the manual
on trade practical. The indicating about the corresponding practical exercise are given in every sheet of this
manual.
It will be preferable to teach/learn the trade theory connected to each exercise atleast one class before
performing the related skills in the system lab. The trade theory is to be treated as an integrated part of each
exercise.
The material is not the purpose of self learning and should be considered as supplementary to class room
instruction.
TRADE PRACTICAL
The trade practical manual is intented to be used in workshop . It consists of a series of practical exercies
to be completed by the trainees during the First Semester course of the COPA trade supplemented and
supported by instructions/ informations to assist in performing the exercises. These exercises are designed
to ensure that all the skills in the prescribed syllabus are covered.
The manual is divided into twelve modules to maintain completancy of leaning process in a stipulated time
basis.
The skill training in the computer lab is planned through a series of practical exercises centred around some
practical project. However, there are few instance where the individual exercise does not form a part of project.
While developing the practical manual a sincere effort was made to prepare each exercise which will be easy
to understand and carry out even by below average traninee. However the development team accept that there
if a scope for further improvement. NIMI, looks forward to the suggestions from the experienced training faculty
for improving the manual.
(vi)
CONTENTS
Exercise No. Title of the Exercise Page No.
Module 1: Safe Working Practices
1.1.01 Identify the proper location and setup electrical connections to computer
system 1
1.1.02 Safety symbols and hazard detection 2
1.1.03 Practice safe methods of fire fighting in case of electrical fire 5
1.1.04 Use of fire extinguishers 6
Module 2: Computer Components
1.2.05 Identify Computer peripherals and internal components 9
1.2.06 Assemble a desktop computer 13
Module 3 : Windows Operating System
1.3.07 Windows 10 interface and navigation 15
1.3.08 Manage files and folders in Removable Drives 22
1.3.09 Customize desktop settings and user accounts 25
1.3.10 System Properties and control panel 30
1.3.11 Keyboard shortcuts and commands 34
1.3.12 Print and Scan Documents 36
Module 4 : Computer Basics & Software Installation
1.4.13A BIOS settings, uses and modifications 39
1.4.13B Configure the CMOS setup 42
1.4.14 Installing windows 10 operating system 44
1.4.15 Hard disk formatting and partitioning 48
1.4.16 Identiy and rectify common hardware and software issues 50
1.4.17 Installing system application software 51
1.4.18 Configure Bluetooth / Wi-Fi settings 61
1.4.19 Install printer, scanner, Web camera & DVD drives 68
1.4.20 Burning a data in CD or DVD’s using Nero 75
Module 5 : DOS Command Line Interface and

Linux Operating System
1.5.21 Basic DOS Commands 76
1.5.22 Managing files and folders using DOS commands 80
1.5.23 Installing ubuntu linux operarting system 84
1.5.24 Install necessary application software in linux 88
(vii)
1.5.25A Use basic Linux, commands for directory listing file, folder management,
password etc., 90
1.5.25B Practice on manipulation and searching commands 94
1.5.26 Graphical user Interface for files and folders on the ubuntu desktop 97
1.5.27 Desktop saetting in linux 100
1.5.28 View system properties and manage system settings in Linux 103
Module 6 : Word Processing Software
1.6.29 Open MS Word and familirize with basic word components 105
1.6.30 Create, open, save and rename word document 111
1.6.31A Format the document in MS word - 1 116
1.6.31B Format the document in MS word - 2 130
1.6.32A Insert and format the table 134
1.6.32B Insert and format the table and objects 141
1.6.33 Page layout setting and printing the document 155
1.6.34 Use templates 162
1.6.35 Mail merge using MS word 166
1.6.36 Word - Publishing options 174
1.6.37 Typing practice using open source typing tutor 185
1.6.38 Shortcut keys for open office and word processor 187
Module 7 : Spreadsheet Application
1.7.39 MS Excel Screen components and Tools 192
1.7.40 Create, save and formatting excel sheet 193
1.7.41 Absolute and relative referencing linking sheets 199
1.7.42 Practice Excel Functions in all major categories 201
1.7.43 Perform Sort, Filter and Validity data in MS Excel 211
1.7.44 Create and format various static and dynamic charts in excel 215
1.7.45 Practice importing and exporting excel data 222
1.7.46 Perform data analysis using pivot table, chart and macros 223
1.7.47 Page setup and printing in excel worksheet 233
1.7.48 Simple project work using in excel 235
Module 8 : Image Editing and Creating Presentations
1.8.49 Edit image using MS Paint 237
1.8.50 Editing images with open office draw 240
(viii)
1.8.51 Create power point presentations 243
1.8.52 Insert picture and theme in PowerPoint slideshow 246
1.8.53 Add new slide, Format text, Link with word excel documents 249
1.8.54 Practice animation and transition effects 256
1.8.55 Insert video and audio presentations 261
1.8.56 Modify slide page setup and print the slides 262
1.8.57 Create simple project using power point presentation 266
Module 9 : Database Management with MS-Access
1.9.58 Create database and design a table in access 267
1.9.59 Modifying Properties of Tables and Fields 273
1.9.60 Create relationship between Multiple tables 275
1.9.61 Create and format Forms 277
1.9.62 Create Simple queries with various criteria and calculations -1 280
1.9.63 Create Simple update, append, make table, delete and crosstab queries 284
1.9.64A Modifying form design with controls -1 291
1.9.64B Modifying form design with controls -2 295
1.9.65A Import and export data to and from access 298
1.9.65B Create and format various types of reports 301
1.9.66 Compress and Encrypt the database 305
Module 10 : Configuring and Using Network
1.10.67 View network connections 308
1.10.68 Installing NIC card and sharing a printer with network 313
1.10.69 Identification of different cables and connectors used in networking 317
1.10.70 Practice IP addressing and subnet mask 323
1.10.71 Configuring HUB & switch 325
1.10.72 Setup and configure wired and wireless LAN 326
1.10.73 Setup a proxy server /DHCP server with firewall 331
1.10.74 Setting up video conferencing 332
1.10.75 Setting up and configuring firewall 333
Module 11 : Using Internet
1.11.76 Browse internet for information 336
1.11.77 Creating email ID, sending and receiving mails 341
1.11.78 Communicate on social networking 348
(ix)
1.11.79 Use online utilities in Internet 350
1.11.80 Configuring outlook, mail service in mobile phone & using skype, google+ 355
1.11.81 Br ow ser ut i l it i es 360
Module 12 : Designing Static Webpages
1.12.82 Practice with Basic HTML elements, tags and attributes 361
1.12.83 Design simple web page with text, paragraph and line break and using
HTML Tags 363
1.12.84 Design simple web page with text, background colour, picture using
HTML Tags 366
1.12.85 Design simple webpage with tables and lists 369
1.12.86 Use Marquees, hyperlinks and mail to link in designing Webpages 374
1.12.87 Create frames, add style and design layout 380
1.12.88 Insert text box, check box and combo box in webpage 383
1.12.89 Design webpage using password field, submit button, reset button and
radio button 386
1.12.90 Design a webpages adding flash file, audio and video files 389
1.12.91 Design webpages with forms and form controls using HTML Tags 392
1.12.92 Create webpages using cascading style sheet 394
1.12.93 Use WYSIWYG (Kompozer) web design tools to design and eit Webpages
with various styles 401
LEARNING / ASSESSABLE OUTCOME
On completion of this book you shall be able to
• Install and setup operating system and related software in a

computer.
• Create, format and edit document using word processing applica-
tion software.
• Create, edit and develop a workbook by using spreadsheet appli-
cation software.
• Create and customize slides for presentation.
• Create and manage database file by using MS Access
• Install, setup/ configure, troubleshoot and secure computer net-
work including Internet.
• Develop static webpages using HTML.
(x)
SYLLABUS
First Semester Duration: Six Month
Week Ref. Learning Professional Skills Professional Knowledge

No. Outcome (Trade Practical) (Trade Theory)
with Indicative hours
• Apply safe working Safe working practices Safe working practices

1.
practices 1. Visit COPA Lab. of the institutes and • Scope of the COPA trade.
locate the electrical connections with • Safety rules and safety signs.
computer system setup (6 hrs) • Types and working of fire
2. Identifying safety symbols and extinguishers.
hazard identification.(4 Hrs)
Introduction to Computer
3. Practice safe methods of fire fighting in
components
case of electrical fire. (4 hrs)
4. Use of fire extinguishers. (4 Hrs) • Introduction to computer
Computer components system. Concepts of hardward
5. Identify computer peripherals and and Software.
• Install and setup
internal components of a disassembled • Function of motherboard
operating system
desktop computer. (6 Hrs) components and various
and related software
6. Assemble components of desktop processors.
in a computer.
computer. (6 Hrs) • Various Input / Output devices
in use and their features.
2. • Install and setup Using Windows Operating System Introduction Windows

operating system 7. Practice on Windows interface Operating System
and related software and navigating windows. (9 Hrs) • Introduction to operating
in a computer. 8. Practice on managing files and System
folders using removable drives. (6 Hrs)
9. Customize the desktop settings
• Main features of Windows
and manage user accounts. (6 Hrs) OS
10. View system properties and control • Concept of various shortcut
panel details. (6 Hrs) commands.
11. Work with keyboard shortcut commands.
(6 Hrs)
12. Print and scan document using different
commands.(3 Hrs)
Computer basics and Software
3. • Install and setup Computer basics and Software
Installation
operating system and Installation
13. View the BIOS settings and their
and related software
modifications. (3 Hrs)
• Introduction to the booting
in a computer. process.
14. Install Windows OS (5 Hrs)
15. Format Hard Disk and create • Introduction to various
partition (3 Hrs) types of memories and their
16. Identify and rectify common features.
hardware and software issues • Basic Hardware and
during OS installation. (4 Hrs) software issues and their
17. Install necessary application solutions.
software for Windows i.e. Office • Usage of Application
Package, PDF Reader, Media software and Antivirus.
Player etc. (5 Hrs)
18. Configure Bluetooth and wi-fi
settings. (3 Hrs)
19. Install Drivers for printer, scanner,
webcam and DVD etc. (4 Hrs)
20. Burn data, video and audio files on
CD/DVD using application
software. (3 Hrs)
COPA 1st semester

4-5 • Install and DOS Command Line Interface & Linux Introduction to DOS
setup OS Operating Systems Command
and related 21. Use basic DOS commands for directory listing (10 hrs) Line Interface & Linux
software in a 22. Manage files and folders using DOS commands (6 hrs) Operating
computer. 23. Install Linux operating system.(6 Hrs) Systems
24. Install necessary application software for Linux i.e. • Introduction to basic DOS
Office Package, PDF Reader, MediaPlayer etc. (6 Hrs) Internal and External
25. Use Basic Linux commands for directory listing, file Commands.
and folder management, password etc. (10Hrs) • Introduction to Open
26. Use the Linux GUI for file and folder management, Source Software.
exploring the system etc. (10 Hrs)
• Introduction to Linux
27. Customize desktop settings and manage user
Operating System features,
accounts in Linux. (6 Hrs)
structure, files and
28. View system properties and manage system setting
processes.
in Linux (6 Hrs)
• Basic Linux commands.
Create, format Using Word Processing Software Word Processing

6-8
and edit 29. Open MS Word and familiarise with basic word Software
document using components. (3 Hrs) • Introduction to the various
word 30. Practice creating, saving and renaming of word applications in MS office.
processing documents.(3 Hrs) • Introduction to Word
application 31. Edit document using basic formatting tools. (8 Hrs) features,
software. 32. Practice Inserting and formatting tables and other Office button, toolbars.
objects. (12 Hrs)
• Creating, saving and
33. Work with Page layout settings and printing
formatting
documents. (6 Hrs)
and printing documents
34. Use templates, autocorrect tools, and record and
using Word.
execute a macro. (6 Hrs)
35. Use Mail merge tool. Use conditional Mail Merge, • Working with objects,
External Data Source. Practice Letters, Label & macro, mail merge,
Envelop printing using Mail Merge (10 Hrs). templates and other tools
36. Use Table of Context, Indexing, Hyperlink, Bookmark, in Word.
Comment, equation,symbols,citation, crossreference,
footnote, translate, synonyms, thesaurus, spell
check & grammer, compare etc. ( 6 Hrs )
37. Practice Typing using open source tutor. (24 Hrs)
38. Practice of using shortcut keys and use Open Office
as word processor. (12 Hrs)
9 - 11 • Create, Using Spread Sheet Application Spread Sheet Application

format, 39. Open MS Excel and familiarise with basic application • Introduction to Excel
edit and components. (4 Hrs)
features and Data Types.
develop 40. Practice create, save and format excel sheets. (9 Hrs)
• Cell referencing and
a workbook by 41. Use absolute and relative referencing, linking sheets, linking
using conditional formatting etc. (9 Hrs)
Sheets.
spreadsheet 42. Practice Excel functions of all major categories i.e. • Introduction to various
application Financial, Logical, Text, date & time, Lookup, Math,
Statistical etc. (12 Hrs) functions in all categories
software.
43. Use various data types in Excel, sorting, filtering and of Excel.
validating data. (8 Hrs) • Concepts of sorting,
44. Create and format various static and dynamic charts. filtering
(10 Hrs) and validating data.
45. Practice Importing & exporting excel data. (4 Hrs) • Analyzing data using
46. Perform data analysis using “what if” tools and Pivot charts, data tables, pivot
Table and record and execute a macro. (10 Hrs) tables, goal seek and
47. Modify Excel page setup and printing and use open scenarios.
office as Spreadsheet application. (4 Hrs)
48. Execute simple projects using Excel & Word. (20 Hrs)
COPA 1st semester

Image editing and creating
12 - 13 Create and Presentations Image editing, Presentations
customize 49. Use Windows Paint or image editing • Introduction to Open Office.
slides for software like Open Office Draw, GIMP, • Introduction to the
presentation. IrfanView or a similar tool. (6 Hrs) properties and editing of
50. Perform Image editing using open images.
source applications. (12 Hrs) • Introduction to different
51. Open power point presentation formats of images and their
and familiarise with basic uses.
application components. (6 Hrs) • Introduction to Power Point
52. Create Slide shows, Insert picture
and its advantages.
and theme. (6 Hrs)
53. Add new slide, format text, link with word
• Creating Slide Shows.
and excel documents. (5 Hrs) • Fine tuning the
54. Practice animating slide transitions and presentation and good
objects. (4 Hrs) presentation technique.
55. Create slide shows by inserting audio &
video and sync with presentation. (6 Hrs)
56. Modify slide page setup and print
the slides. (3 Hrs)
57. Create a simple presentation
project using open office. (12 Hrs)
14 - 15 Create and Database Management with MS Access Database Management Systems

manage 58. Create database and design a simple tables • Concepts of Data and Databases.
database in Access. (6 Hrs) • Overview of popular databases,
file by 59. Practice enforcing integrity constraints and RDBMS, OODB and NOSQL.
using MS modify properties of tables and fields. (6
Hrs)
• Rules for designing good tables.
Access.
Integrity rules and constraints in
60. Create relationships and join tables. (6 Hrs)
a table.
61. Create and format Forms. (6 Hrs)
62. Create simple queries with various criteria • Relationships in tables.
and calculations. (12 Hrs) • Introduction to various types of
63. Create Simple update, append, make table, Queries and their uses.
delete and crosstab queries. (9 Hrs) • Designing Access Reports and
64. Modify form design with controls, macros Forms.
and events. (6 Hrs) • Introduction to macros, designer
65. Import and export data to/from Access and objects controls, their properties
create and format types of reports. (6 Hrs) and behaviour.
66. Compress and Encrypt databases. (3 Hrs)
16 - 17 Configuring and using Network Networking Concepts

Install,
67. View Network connections. (3 Hrs) • Introduction to Computer Networks,
setup/
68. Connect a computer to a n/w and share Necessity and Advantages.
configure,
Devices i.e. Printers, files, folders and
troubleshoot
drives. (6 Hrs)
• Client Server and peer to Peer
and secure networking concepts.
69. Work with various Network devices,
computer • Concept of Proxy Server and proxy
connectors/cables. Create straight/cross
network firewall server.
cable and punch a UTP cable in the patch
including
socket and test the connectivity. (6 Hrs) • Concept of DHCP Server.
Internet.
70. Practice IP Addressing and Subnet masking • Introduction to LAN, WAN and MAN.
for IPV4/ IPV6 and pinging to test networks. • Network topologies. Network
(6 Hrs) components, viz. Modem, Hub,
71. Configure Hub and Switch. (6 Hrs) Switch, Router,Bridge, Gateway etc.
72. Set up and configure wired and wireless
LAN in a Computer Lab within at least three
• Network Cables, Wirelessnetworks
computers. Use patch panel & I/O Box for and Blue Tooth technology.
wired LAN and installing & configuring • Concept of ISO - OSI 7 Layer Model.
Internet connection in a single PC and in a • Overview of Network protocols
LAN. (12 Hrs) Viz.TCP/IP, FTP, Telnet etc.
COPA1st semester
73. Setup a proxy server/DHCP Server with firewall.(9 Hrs) • Concept of Logical and
74. Setup video conferencing using open source s/w(6 Hrs) Physical Addresses,
75. Use various tools (by open source /free) for network Subnetting and Classes of
troubleshooting, maintenance and security for both Networks.
Wired and Wireless(6 Hrs)
18 Install, Using Internet Internet Concepts

setup/ 76. Browse the Internet for information (use at least 3 • Introduction to www,
configure, popular browsers). (3 Hrs) Concept of Internet, Web
troubleshoot 77. Create and use e-mail for communication with Browsers, internet servers
and secure attachment, priority setting, address book. (3 Hrs) and search engines.
computer 78. Communicate with text, video chatting and social
networking sites. (6 Hrs)
• Concepts of Domain naming
network
79. Use online dictionary, translation software, storage Systems and E mail
including
space, share files with e-mail links, download manager, communication.
Internet.
download & upload YouTube files, google map & earth • Introduction to video chatting
etc. Update windows & other software. (6 Hrs) tools and Social Networking
80. Configure Outlook, mail service in mobile phones. Use concepts.
tools like Skype, Google+ etc. (6 Hrs)
81. Browser setting for Bookmark, cookies, favourites and
pop ups, default website, trusted site,restricted site,
content, history and advanced setup. (6 Hrs )
Designing Static Web Pages Web Design Concepts

19-21 Develop
static 82. Practice with basic HTML elements (e.g. head, title, • Concepts of Static and
web pages body), tag and attributes. (3 Hrs) Dynamic Web pages.
using 83. Design simple web page with text, paragraph and line • Introduction to HTML and
HTML. break usingHTML tags. (5 Hrs) various tags in HTML.
84. Format text, change background colour and insert
• Concepts of different
pictures in web page. (6 Hrs)
controls used in Web Pages.
85. Design simple web page with tables and lists. (6 Hrs)
86. Use marquees, hyperlinks and mailto link in designing • Concepts of CSS and
web pages.(6 Hrs) applying CSS to HTML.
87. Create frames, add style and design layout. (10 Hrs) • Introduction to open source
88. Insert text, check and combo box in web page. (6 Hrs) CMS viz, Joomla, Word
89. Design web page using password field, submit button, press etc. and Web
reset button and radio button etc. (6 Hrs) authoring tools viz.
90. Design a web page adding flash file, audio and video Kompozer, Front Page etc.
files. (10 Hrs) • Concept of good web page
91. Design web page with forms and form controls using designing techniques.
HTML tags.(8 Hrs)
92. Create web page using Cascading Style Sheet (CSS).
(12 Hrs)
93. Use WYSIWYG (Kompozer) web design tools to
design and edit web pages with various styles. (12Hrs)
22-23 Industrial Visit/Project work

1. Create a simple web site of at least 5 web pages which will include Images, tables, charts, lists and
hyperlink on any topic like Student Information System, Book Store, and Organisations etc.
OR
2. Setup and configure a LAN using at least 3 computers connected with wire and 3 computers connected
with wireless and secure it.)
24-25
Revision
26
Examination
COPA 1st semester

IT & ITES Exercise 1.1.01
COPA - Safe Working Practices
Identify the proper location and setup electrical connections to computer

system
Objectives: At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• identify the proper location
• connect electrical components of a computer.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identify the proper location

1 Identify the proper location and draw layout diagram
of computer system and peripherals.
Note: write component type and connector

like. CPU-power chord.
TASK 2: Identify electrical components of a computer

1 Observe the devices connected to computer system
and prepare the connection items chart.
Note: Write devices type and connectors like, 3 Get interacted with instructor.
printer power chord, USB cable.
1
Safety symbols and Hazard detection

• identify the four basic catagories of safety signs
• record the meanings of the safety signs
• read and interpret the different types of personal protective devices from the chart.
2
TASK 1: Identify the four basic catagories of safety sign
Instructor may provide various safety signs 1 Identify the safety sign from the chart.
chart small categories and explain their 2 Record the name of the category in table1.
categories and their meaning, description. Ask
the trainee to identify the sign and record in 3 Mention the meaning description of the safety sign in
table table1.
4 Get it checked by your instructor.
Table 1
Fig No. Basic categories/safety sign Meaning - descriptions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
TASK 2: Record the meanings of the safety sign
Note: The instructor may provide or arrange

the different types of personal protection
equipment or chart and explain how to
identify and select the PPE devices suitable
for the work and ask the trainees to write
names in the given table.
Job Sequence
1 Read and interpret the personal protection equipment 3 Write the name of the PPE to the corresponding type
by visually on real devices or from the charts. of protection in table2.
2 Identify and select the personal protection equipment 4 Get it checked by your instructor.
used for suitable type of protection.
IT & ITES : COPA (NSQF Level - 4) - Exercise 1.1.02 3

Table 2
S.No. Name of the PPE Hazards Type of protection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TASK 3:Read and interpret the different types of personal protective devices from the chart.
Instructor may brief the various types of 1 Identify the occupational hazard to the corresponding
occupational hazards and their causes. situation with a potential harm given in table3.
Table 3
S.No. Source of potential harm Type of occupational hazards
4 IT & ITES : COPA (NSQF Level - 4) - Exercise 1.1.02

Practice safe methods of fire fighting in case of electrical fire

• demonstrate the ability of fire-fighting during electrical fire
• as a member of the fire-fighting team
• as a leader of the group.
Requirements
Equipment/Machines
• Fire extinguishers- CO2 - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
General procedure to be adopted during electrical fire
1 Raise an alarm. Follow the methods giving below to – follow the instructions, and obey. Be safe and do not
raise an alarm signals when the fire breakes out. get trapped.
– Raise your voice and shout Fire! Fire! to draw – do not use your own ideas.
attention.
As a leader of the group
– run towards fire alarm/bell to activate
If you are giving instructions:
– switch off the mains (if possible)
–locate and use co2 fire extinguisher
2 when you hear the alarm signal:
– seek for sufficient assistance and inform the fire
– stop working brigade
– turn off all machinery and power – locate locally available suitable means to put out the
fire
– switch off fans/air circulators/exhaust fans. (it's
good to switch off the sub-main) – judge the magnitude of the fire, Ensure that emer-
gency exit paths are clear with no obstructions and
3 If you are not involved in the fire fighting:
then attempt to evacuate the place. (Remove
– leave the place using the emergency exit. explosive materials, substances that would easly
– evacuate the premises catch fire.
– assemble at a safe place along with others – Put off the fire with assistance identifying people
with assigned responsibility for each activity.
– check, if anyone has called the fire services
5 Report the measures taken to put out the fire, to the
– close the doors and windows, but do not lock or bolt authorities concerned.
As a member of the fire-fighting team Detailed reports on the fire accidents, even if
they are small accidents, shall help in
4 If you are involved in fire fighting:
identification of the causes of the fire. The
– take instructions to extinguish fire in an organised identified causes shall help in taking preventive
way. measures to avoid similar occurences in the
If taking instructions: future
5
Use of fire extinguishers

• select fire extinguishers according to the type of the fire
• operate the fire extinguisher
• extinguish the fire.
Requirements
Equipment/Machines
• Fire extinguishers-CO2 - 1 No. • Cell phone - 1 No.
• Scissors 100mm - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
1 Alert people in the surrounding area by shouting fire, 4 Switch "OFF" all electrical power supply.
fire, fire when you see fire (Fig 1a & b).
Do not allow people to go near the fire.
2 Inform fire service or arrange to inform them immediately
(Fig 1c). 5 Analyze to identify the type of fire. Refer Table1.
3 Open the emergency exit and ask the people inside 6 Assume that is it type D fire (Electrical fire).
the area to go away (Fig 1d).
6
TABLE1
Class 'A': Wood, paper, cloth, solid material
Class 'B': Oil-based fire (grease, gasoline,oil) and

liquefiable solids
Class 'C': Gas and liquefied gases
Class 'D': Metals and electrical equipment

6 Select CO2 (carbon dioxide) fire extinguisher. 11 Slowly squeeze the handle lever to discharge the agent.
(Fig 8)
7 Locate and take the CO2 fire extinguisher. Check for
its expiry date. 12 Sweep from side to side approximately 15 cm over the
fuel fire until the fire is put off. (Fig 9)
8 Break the seal. (Fig 6)
Fire extinguishers are manufactured for use

from a distance.
9 Pull the safety pin from the handle. (Fig 7) (the Pin is
located at the top of the fire extinguisher.) (Fig 7) Caution
• While putting off fire, the fire may flare up.
• Do not panic so long as it is being put off promptly
• If the fire does not respond well even after you have
used the fire extinguisher, move away from the fire
point.
• Do not attempt to put out a fire when it emits toxic
smoke. Leave it to the professionals.
• Remember that your life is more important than the
property. So do not take risks.
10 Aim the extinguisher nozzle or hose at the base of the
fire. (This will remove the source of the fuel fire.) (Fig 8) In order to remember the simple operation of
fire extinguisher, remember P.A.S.S.
Keep your self low.
This will help to use the fire extinguisher.
P for pull
A for aim
S for squeeze
S for sweep

COPA - Computer Components
Identify computer peripherals and internal components

Objectives : At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• identify various input/output device connected to the computer
• identify different controls and ports on the system unit cabinet
• identify the internal parts of a system unit.
Among the three identical PC's, one PC will be used for demonstration by the instructor where as the
other two will be used by two groups of trainees.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : To identify various input/output devices of cnnected to the computer
Instructor will show the different input/output devices
(available in your lab) connected to the computer and the
trainees will make a record of it in Table 1. (Fig 1)
Table 1
SI. No. Name of the I/P and O/P devices
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
9
TASK 2 : Identify different controls, ports and connectors on the system unit cabinet
The instructor will demonstrate the uses of the Fig 3

following indicators ,switches controls in Fig 2
and ports external to the processor found on
the system unit shown in and the trainees will
make a record of it in Table 2 and
Table 3. (Fig 3)
Fig 2
Table 3
SI. No. Name the Parts on the CPU Rear Panel
1
2
Table 2 3
4
SI. No. Name the parts on the CPU Front Panel
5
1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
5 10
6 11
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

TASK 3 : Identify the internal parts of a system unit
The instructor will open the system unit (avail-

able in your lab )and show the parts of system
unit and motherboard components as shown
in Fig 4 & Fig 5 and the trainees will make a
record of the parts in Table 4 & 5.
Fig 4
Table 4
Sl.No. Name the parts of System Unit

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Fig 5
Table 5
SI. No. Name the parts of Mother board
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

COPA - Computer Components
Assemble a desktop computer

Objective: At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• connect data cable and power cable to the various devices in the desktop.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Connecting data cable and power cable to the various devices in the desktop.
2 Connect the Keyboard connector to the appropriate
The trainees will connect the system with I/O
Keyboard socket on the rear side of the PC as shown
devices as shown in (Fig 6)
in (Fig 8).
3 Connect the Mouse connector to Com1, Com2 , PS/2

or USB port ( according to type of connector the Mouse
1 Connect the system power cable to the appropriate comes with) as shown in (Fig 9).
socket on the rear side of the PC as Shown in (Fig 7)
13
4 Connect the monitor Data cable connector to the VGA 7 Connect mics cable connector. RCA Jack to the MIC
connector on the rear side of PC as shown in (Fig 10). in RCA socket provided at the rear side of the PC and
record it as shown in (Fig 12).
8 Connect printer data cable DB 25 pin male connector

to the parallel port DB 25 pin female connector
provided on the rear side of PC as shown in (Fig 13).
5 Connect the power cable of the monitor either to the

lower socket on the PC itself or a separate wall socket
depending on the type of power connector the cable is
provided with.
6 Connect the speaker boxes/Headphone cable con-
nector (RCA jack) to line out speaker jack (RCA fe-
male) on the rear end of the PC as shown in (Fig 11)
9 Get the work checked by the instructor.

COPA - Windows Operating System
Windows 10 interface and navigation

• identify the files folders and drives in windows 10 desktop
• identify the utilities of Windows10 setting
• advanced search using Cortana
• application setting and pin up to desktop.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments
• PC with MS-Office - 1 No. /trainee
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identify the files folders and drives in windows 10 desktop
1 Open File Explorer from taskbar or Start Menu.

Another way is by using the shortcut key Windows
Logo +E to open File Explorer (Fig 1)
Fig 1
2 Select This PC (Fig 2) Fig 2
15
3 Record the displayed drives and other icons in your 4 Select any Drive required and then click the desired
notebook and get it checked by your instructor. file or folder in the drive (Fig. 3)
Fig 3
5 Record the address of the file chosen (Fig. 4) The address will be displayed in the address bar
.Here the location of the selected file is :This PC >
Local Disk(D:) > Books
Fig 4
6 Close the Window
TASK 2: Identify the utilities of Windows10 setting
1 Click Windows logo + X to display a menu of Windows 2 Click on Apps and Features to identify the utilities in
tools and utilities (Fig 5) Window 10 (Fig 6)

Fig 5
Fig 4 Fig 6
5 Select Settings
6 Click Personalization or Time & Language to change
the settings of the system.
7 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Window.
3 Click on Default apps and note down the apps that are (Fig 7)
present in your system by default.
4 To change the date and time or background, go back
to the menu of Windows tools and utilities(Windows
logo + X)
Fig 7
TASK 3: Advanced search using Cortana Fig 8
1 Click inside the taskbar's Search box.

2 Click Next to search with Cortana. (Fig 8)
ana,select the Notebook icon and then select Settings

5 After the initial set up with setting you can go for
advanced search. (Fig 9) If "Hey Cortana" is not enabled on your device,
then use the Windows key + Shift + C keyboard
6 Search about Window 10 by speaking to Cortana.
shortcut and say your search term.
Press the Microphone icon.
Fig. 9
8 To search for anything in the web , type in the search
box and click the title of the category to see more
results
You can also use the command web: search

wordsin thesearchbox , to directly search in
the web. (Fig 11)
Fig. 11
7 Say"HeyCortana : Window 10 " to search via voice

commands. (Fig 10)
Fig. 10
9 To search for any files or folders in the computer, type

the file/folder name in the search box and click the
category as documents (Fig 12)

Fig. 12
10 To search for topics limited to within the app itself,

type the search words and press enter. (Fig 13)
Fig. 13
11 Record the weather of your place by using Cortana

and perform the mathematical calculation of 42+8/23
and 678 x 45.
12 Close the window.

TASK 4:Application setting and pin up to Taskbar and Start menu
You can pin a program to the taskbar either from Fig. 16

the Start menu or from the desktop
1 To pin up using Start menu, Click Start and then locate
the app you want to pin.
2 Right-click the app.
3 Click Pin to taskbar. (Fig 14)
Fig. 14
Windows 10 adds an icon for the program to the start

menu. (Fig 17)
Fig. 17
4 Windows 10 adds an icon for the program to the

taskbar. (Fig 15)
Fig. 15
To unpin an app ,Click Unpin from start/

desktop/taskbar
To see the application setting of ant app in the start menu,

first locate the app
Right click on the app and click on App Settings. (Fig 18)
5 To pin up using desktop, locate the app on the desktop.

6 Right-click the app.
7 Click Pin to taskbar.
8 Windows 10 adds an icon for the program to the
taskbar.
9 To pin an app in Start menu, locate the app in desktop
you want to pin.
• Right-click the app.
• Click Pin to Start (Fig 16)
Fig. 18
If you want to change any setting (default, uninstall,

terminate, reset etc.),make the desired changes. (Fig 19)
Fig. 19

Manage files and folders in Removable Drives

• insert and remove the pen drive in proper way
• check the bad sectors and viruses in pen drive using antivirus software
• copy the files and folders from and to the pen drive.
Requirements
Tools/ Equipments/Instruments
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Insert and remove the Pen drive in proper way
1 Insert the pen drive in the USB port. 3 Choose the file or folder to view from the pen drive
2 Click on the notification that appears on the lower right 4 Close the file or folder
corner of the screen. (Fig 1)
5 Click on Show hidden icons (Fig. 3)
Fig 1
Fig 3
3 Click on Open folder to view files (Fig. 2)
Fig 2
6 Click on Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media

icon
7 Click on the Eject Button
8 Remove the pen drive when Safe To Remove Hardware
message is displayed on the screen (Fig. 4)
Fig 4
22
TASK 2: Check the bad sectors and viruses in pen drive using antivirus software
1 Insert the pen drive in the USB port 4 Click on Report if virus or bad sectors is shown in the
summary else press Close(Fig. 7)
2 Go to This PC and right click on the drive for the
pendrive (Fig 5)
Fig 7
Fig 5
3 Select Scan selected files with Avira or any antivirus 5 Click onReport if warnings are given else click End.
software installed in the computer(Fig 6) (Fig. 8)
Fig 6 Fig 8
TASK 3: Copy the files and folders from and to the pen drive
1 Insert the pen drive in the USB port 4 Right click on the file or folder to copy from the pen
drive
2 Click on the notification that appears on the lower right
corner of the screen. (Fig 1) 5 Select Copy from the drop down menu. (Fig 9)
3 Click on Open folder to view files. (Fig 2)

Send to option can also be used to copy the
Fig 9 file or folder, but it can be copied to only
specified drive and not to specified file or
folder
8 To copy files or folders from computer to pen drive,

select the file or folder to be copied.
9 Right click and select Send to from the drop down
menu and the select the drive of the pen drive.
Copy option from the drop down menu can

also be used to copy the file to the pendrive
by right clicking the file. Then open the pen
drive and right click . Select Paste option from
the menu
6 Open the drive or folder to copy the file or folder from
the pen drive
7 Right click and click on Paste option in the drop
down menu. (Fig 10)
Fig 10

Customize desktop settings and user accounts

• open desktop settings
• modify desktop settings
• create new user
• grant and modify the user rights
Requirements
Tools / Equipments/Instruments
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Open desktop settings from control panel.
1 Click on Start menu. 3 This will open Settings Window (Fig 2)

2 Select Settings tab. (Fig 1)
Fig 2
Fig 1
TASK 2: Modify the desktop settings

Fig 3
1 Open the Settings Window (Fig 2)
2 Click on System in the Settings Window
3 Click Display to change the display settings (Fig 3)
4 Change the brightness of the display by dragging the
bar of Change brightness from left or right.
5 Record the brightness percentage at the left most and
right most end of the Change brightness bar.
6 Change the orientation and note the how the display
changes.
Note: To go back to the initial orientation, press

Revert
25
7 To change the background, click on the Personalization 10 Select Fill in Choose a fit. (Fig 6)
icon of settings window. ( Fig 2)
Fig. 6
8 Click on the Background tab in the Personalization
window. (Fig 4)
Fig. 4
11 To change the date,time and language click on the

Time & Languageicon of settings window. (Fig 2)
12 Click on Date & time tab. If you want to change the
time zone , Select from Time zone menu (Fig 7)
Fig. 7
9 Select the Type of Background you want to keep. If it is
Picture, choose from picture given or You can browse
your desired picture. (Fig 5)
Fig. 5
13 To change the date and time, Set time automatically

toOff. Click change. (Fig 8)
Fig. 8

Close the Window. 15 The format of date and time can be changed by clicking
on the Change date and time formats as shown in
14 Type in the date and time. Click Change. (Fig 9)
Fig 10.
Fig 9 Fig 10
Close Window
TASK 3: Create new user
1 Open the Settings Window. (Fig 2) 5 Select your account in Choose an account drop down
2 Click on Accounts in the Settings Window. menu. Click Close. (Fig 12)
3 Select E-mail & app accounts in Fig 11.

Fig 12
4 Click on Add an account to create a new user.
(Fig 11)
Fig 11

6 Type the e-mail or phone in the Sign-in Window and 9 Click on the + Add someone else to this PC to add a
click NEXT. (Fig 13) new user.9 Sign-in with a valid e-mail account.
Fig 13 Fig 14
7 Enter the password in the Password field. 10 Sign-in with a valid e-mail account.
8 To create a new user account for family or other people 11 Click NEXT and confirm the password.
in the system, click on Family & other people tab in 12 Close Window.
Fig. 14
TASK 4: Granting and modify the user rights
1 Open the Settings Window (Fig 2) 5 If you want to delete the account of the user, Click the
user account and select Remove. (Fig. 16)
2 Click on Accounts in the Settings Window.
3 Select Family & other people in Fig 14
Fig. 16
4 Click on the user account whose user rights have to
be granted or modified. (Fig 15)
Fig. 15

6 Click on the Delete account and data tab to remove 7 Change the user rights, click on the user account and
the selected user account from the system. (Fig 17) click on Change account type. (Fig 18)
Fig. 17 Fig. 18
8 Select Administrator to give the user account rights to

do major changes in the system .
9 Select Standard User to give the user account to do
perform common daily tasks.
10 Click OK Close the Window.

System properties and control panel

• identify the desktop components in device manager
• change clock, date, regional language in control panel
• repair, modify and uninstall the applications in control panel
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identify the desktop components in device manager
1 Click on File manager in the taskbar. 6 Double click on the Universal Serial Bus controllers in
the menu in Fig. 3
2. Select and Right click this PC.
3 Right Click on Properties. (Fig 1) Fig 3
Fig 1
4 Click on Device Manager in Fig. 2
Fig 2
7 Right click on USB Root Hub and select Disable device
(Fig. 4)
Fig 4
30
8 Click Yes in the USB Root Hub. (Fig 5) 13 Insert a Pen drive/ USB in the USB slot
Fig 5
14 Check This PC folder to see if any removable device/
USB is shown. (Fig 7)
Fig 7
9 Insert a Pendrive/ USB in the USB slot

10 Check This PC folder to see if any removable device/
USB is shown.
11 Go to Device Manager and double click on the
Universal Serial Bus controllers.
12 Right click on USB Root Hub and select Enable device
(Fig 6)
Fig 6
TASK 2: Change clock, date, regional language in control panel

1 Type Control Panel in the Search box Fig 8
2 Select Control Panel app from the menu. (Fig 8)
3 Select Date and Time from the Control panel. (Fig 9)

Fig 9 Fig 12
4 Click on Change date and time… (Fig 10)
Fig 10
9 Click on + Add a Language(Fig 13)
Fig 13
5 Change the date and time. Press OK. (Fig 11)

Fig 11
10 Type the name of the language you need the system

to work/change .(Fig 14)
Fig 14
6 Close window
7 To change language, select Region from the Control
panel (Fig 9)
8 Click on Language preferences as shown in Fig 12

12 Click Install. 13 Close the Window.
TASK 3: Repair, modify and uninstall the applications in control panel

1 Select Programs and Features from the Control panel
(Fig 9)
2 Select the program from the drop down menu. (Fig 15)
Fig 5
3 Click on Uninstall / Change / Repair (Fig 16)
Fig 16
4 Click Yes to Uninstall / Change / Repair the application 5 Close the window.

Keyboard shortcuts and commands

• read and Observe the Windows Shortcut Keys in the table
• practice all the shortcut keys of windows 10 and write the description in below the table.
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Read and Observe the following Windows Shortcut Keys in the table
Press This To Do This
Windows Logo Toggle the Start menu
Windows Logo+A Open the Notifications pane
Windows Logo+B Activate the notification area's Show Hidden Icons arrow (press Enter
to display the hidden icons)
Windows Logo+C Open Cortana for voice commands
Windows Logo+D Minimize all open windows to display the desktop
Windows Logo+E Run File Explorer
Windows Logo+F Display the Start menu and activate the Search box
Windows Logo+H Display the Share pane
Windows Logo+I Run the Settings app
Windows Logo+K Display the Devices pane
Windows Logo+L Lock your computer
Windows Logo+M Minimize all windows
Windows Logo+O Turn the tablet orientation lock on and off
Windows Logo+P Display the Project pane to configure a second display
Windows Logo+Q Open Cortana for voice commands
Windows Logo+R Open the Run dialog box
Windows Logo+S Open Cortana for keyboard commands
Windows Logo+T Activate the taskbar icons (use the arrow keys to navigate the icons)
Windows Logo+U Open the Ease of Access Center
Windows Logo+W Activate the Search box
Windows Logo+X Display a menu of Windows tools and utilities
Windows Logo+Z Display an app's commands (although this works in only some Modern
apps)
Windows Logo+= Open Magnifier and zoom in
34
Windows Logo+- Zoom out (if already zoomed in using Magnifier)
Windows Logo+, Temporarily display the desktop
Windows Logo+Enter Open Narrator
Windows Logo+Left Snap the current app to the left side of the screen
Windows Logo+Right Snap the current app to the right side of the screen
Windows Logo+Up Restore a minimized app; maximize a restored app
Windows Logo+Down Restore a maximized app; minimize a restored app
Windows Logo+PgUp Move the current app to the left monitor
Windows Logo+PgDn Move the current app to the right monitor
Windows Logo+PrtSc Capture the current screen and save it to the Pictures folder
Windows Logo+Ctrl+D Create a virtual desktop
Windows Logo+Ctrl+Right Switch to the next virtual desktop
Windows Logo+Ctrl+Left Switch to the previous virtual desktop
Windows Logo+Ctrl+F4 Close the current virtual desktop
Windows Logo+Tab Open Task View, which displays thumbnails for each running app as
well as the available virtual desktops
TASK 2: Practice all the shortcut keys of windows 10 and write the description in below the table
S.No Shortcut Key Description
1 Get it check by your instructor

Print and scan documents

• scan and save the image
• print image or document.
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Scan and save the image.
Save scanned files as PDF using Windows Fax & Scan 3 View or select a different scanner by clicking Change
button in the Scanner section. (Fig 2)
1 Open Windows “Printers and Scanners”.
2 Click New Scan button in the toolbar. (Fig 1)
Fig 2
Fig 1
4 In the Profile section, select the type of the file that

you are going to scan as either Photo or Documents.
5 Change other default settings, if you want.
6 Click the Scan button to begin scanning the hard copy
in the scanner.
36
TASK 2: Print image or document.
1 Once the scanning is completed, click the File menu

and then click Print option. Yes, we are going to save
the file as PDF. (Fig 3)
Fig 3
2 select Microsoft Print to PDF from the printer drop-

down box, and then click Print button. (Fig 4)
Fig 4

3 At the Save Print Output As dialog, enter a name for
your scanned file.
4 select a location to save the file. (Fig 5)
Fig 5
5 Click Save button to save it as PDF file. 6 Get it check with your instructor

IT & ITES Exercise 1.4.13A
COPA - Computer Basics & Software Installation
BIOS settings, uses and modifications

• enter into CMOS setup
• enter into standard CMOS setup and change the parameters
• enter into BIOS features setup and change the parameters
• enter into integrated peripherals setup and change the parameters
• activate AUTO DETECTION features of CMOS setup and observe the standard CMOS menu
• set System password
• set SETUP password.
Requirements
• A working PC - 1 No./batch.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Enter into CMOS setup
1 Power on PC. Enter the password, if required.
2 Press <DEL> key immediately a few times to enter into
CMOS setup utility menu. 4 Get the work checked by your instructor.
5 Move the highlight up and down (main menu) using
Prompt message is displayed as follows. arrow keys to select the desired utility.
“Press <DEL> to enter setup or <ESC> to By-
pass the “CMOS SETUP UTILITY” menu dis- Highlight is used to indicate the selection
played on the memory. option in the menu. Do not press “ENTER”
key.
In some computer, F10 or F2 can be pressed.
6 Get the work checked by your instructor.
3 RECORD all the configuration menu options displayed
on the screen in the record sheet.
TASK 2: Enter into standard CMOS setup and change the parameters
1 Move the highlight to standard CMOS setup and press 6 Move the highlight to ‘Primary master’ and see the
<enter> key and record the parameters, referring to the options and record it in Table.
screen in Table 1.
7 Move the highlight to drive ‘A’ parameter and record the
options.
Parameters displayed on screen can be
changed using “Pageup and pagedown”. 8 Move the highlight to video parameter and record the
options.
2 Select “Date” parameter and set the current date,
month and year by using pageup/pagedown. 9 Move the highlight to halt on parameter and record the
options.
3 Select “Time” parameter and set the current date,
month and year by using pageup/pagedown. 10 Press the ‘Esc’ key to get back to “CMOS setup utility”
menu.
4 Set “Time” parameter and set the time.
39
TASK 3: Enter the BIOS features setup and change the parameters
options and record it.
1 Move the highlight to BIOS features and press <enter>
key. 6 Move the highlight to security option parameter and
record it.
2 Move the highlight to virus warning parameter, see the
options and record it. 7 Move the highlight to boot sequence and see the
options and record it.
3 Move the highlight to CPU internal cache, see the
options and record it. 8 Move the highlight to Bootup floppy seek parameter
and see the options and record it.
4 Move the highlight to external cache and see the
options and record it. 9 Press the “Esc key” to get back to CMOS setup utility
menu.
5 Move the highlight to swap floppy drive, see the
TASK 4: Enter into the integrated peripherals setup and change the parameters
1 Move the highlight to integrated peripherals and press 5 Move the highlight to on board parallel port parameters
<enter> key. and record it.
2 Move the highlight to on chip primary PCI IDE 6 Move the highlight to remaining parameters given in
parameter and record the options. Table 3 and record the options.
3 Move the highlight to UART Port 1 parameter and
record it.
4 Move the highlight to UART Port 2 parameter and
record it.
TASK 5: Activate “Auto detection” features of CMOS setup
1 Press <ESC> key to get back to CMOS setup utility 6 Observe subsequent menus for secondary master and
menu. second slave.
2 Move the highlight to “IDE HDD Auto detection” and 7 Press ‘Esc’ to get back to CMOS setup utility.
press <enter> key.
3 Observe the menu displayed for primary master and
enter ‘Y’ to the option and press “enter”. 9 Move the highlight to “Exit without saving” and press
<enter> key.
4 Record the detected primary master parameters in
the record sheet. 10 Enter ‘Y’ for the option displayed.
5 Observe the menu displayed for primary slave and enter Notice that the system is restarted.
‘Y’ followed by enter.
TASK 6: Set System passwords
1 Enter into CMOS setup utility following the steps in 6 Observe the menu displayed and enter the password
Task 1. (password should be 8 character length).
2 Move the highlight to BIOS feature setup and press 7 Observe the menu displayed and reenter the same
<enter> key. password to confirm.
3 Move the highlight to security option and modify it to 8 Press <Esc> to CMOS setup utility.
“System” using <pageup>/<pagedown> key.
9 Press function key F10 or select save and exit, press
4 Press “Esc” to CMOS setup utility. enter followed by option ‘Y’.
5 Move the highlight user password and press <enter> This process leads to Restart the system and
key. enter password for further booting process.
40 IT & ITES : COPA (NSQF Level - 4) - Exercise 1.4.13A

TASK 7: ”Set “Setup” password
1 Move the highlight to BIOS Features setup and press 6 Get the work checked by your instructor.
<enter> key.
Password should be 8 character length.
2 Move the highlight to security option and modify it to
“Setup” using <pageup>/pagedown> key.
7 Observe the menu displayed and reenter the same
3 Press <Esc> key to get back to CMOS setup utility. password to confirm.
4 Move the highlight to user password and press <enter> 8 Press <Esc> key to CMOS setup utility.
key.
After setup password be sure to save the
5 Observe the menu displayed and enter the password. CMOS setup and restart and check.
Record sheet
TASK 1
Space for writing Configuration menu options displayed on “CMOS SETUP UTILITY” screen.
TASK 2
Table 1
Standard CMOS setup
Date (mm:dd:yy) :
Time (hh:mm:ss) :
HARD DISKS TYPE SIZE CYLS HEAD PRECOMP LANDZ SECTOR MODE
Primary Master :
Primary Slave :
Secondary Master :
Secondary Slave :
Drive A :
Drive B :
Video : Base Memory :

Halt on : Extended Memory :
Other Memory :
Total Memory :
IT & ITES : COPA (NSQF Level - 4) - Exercise 1.4.13A 41

IT & ITES Exercise 1.4.13B
Configure the CMOS setup

• clear the CMOS set up
• observe the booting menu after clearing CMOS
• set the parameters date and time
• configure HDD manually
• set the user system password.
Requirements
• A working PC - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Clear the CMOS set up
3 Place the jumper to clear position referring to mother

1 Switch off the computer.
board manual.
2 Identify the CMOS clear jumper on the mother board.
4 Wait for a minute and restore the jumper to normal
position.
Usually the jumpers will be closer to CMOS
battery (or) verify the mother board manual or 5 Switch ON the computer.
consult the instructor.
TASK 2: Observe the booting menu after clearing CMOS
1 Observe the postcheck screen and record the error 2 Press <del> to enter the CMOS set up utility.
message.
TASK 3: Set the parameters date and time
1 Move the highlight to “Standard CMOS Setup” and 3 Get the work checked by your instructor.
press enter key.
2 Set the current date and time.
42
TASK 4: Configure HDD manually
1 Move the highlight to primary master parameter. 6 Use arrow key to select sector parameter.
“Parametes are already noted in the previous 7 Change sector parameter according to the details
exercise”. given on HDD.
8 Use arrow key to select mode.
2 Select type as user.
9 Change the mode to LBA.
3 Change cylinders (CYLS) parameter according to the
details given on the HDD. 10 Press <esc> to CMOS set up utility.
4 Use arrow key to select head parameter. 11 Get the work checked by your instructor.
5 Change head parameter as given on the HDD.
TASK 5:- Set the system password
1 Set the user system password .

3 Save and exit from CMOS set up utility.
Record sheet
1 Error message on screen after clearing CMOS _________________.
2 System password set by you _________________.
IT & ITES : COPA (NSQF Level - 4) - Exercise 1.4.13B 43

Installing windows 10 operating system
• install windows 10 operating system.
Requirements
• MS-windows 10 Software - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Install windows 10 operating system.
1 Boot from USB or CD with win 10 installer Fig 3
2 Select language to install as in Fig 1.
Fig 1
Fig 4
3 Select drive to install as in Fig 2.

Fig 2
Fig 5
4 Select windows 10. Home from list as in Fig 3.

5 Tick for agree license as in Fig 4 and next window
choose upgrade to install in window 7 or install to make
windows 10 freshas in Fig 5.
44
6 Click install now to start installation as in Fig 6. Fig 9
Fig 6
Fig 10
7 Enter product key given by Microsoft as in Fig 7.
Fig 7
Fig 11
8 Click accept for legal terms as in Fig 8.
Fig 8
Fig 12
9 Click on use express setup as in Fig 9.

10 Click on next to Figures 10, 11,12 and 13.
45
Fig 13 Fig 16
11 Click on “I do” button to make owner ship as in Fig 14. 14 Set a Pin if it is to avoid password as in Fig 17.
Fig 14
Fig 17
12 Enter the registered Microsoft account or click skip 15 Select next with no changes in Fig 18 to files setup.
this step in the lower part as in Fig 15.
Fig 18
Fig 15
13 Put the code sent by Microsoft if using Microsoft

account as in Fig 16.

16 Select next in cortana as it is in default as in Fig 19. Fig 20
Fig 19
Fig 21
17 Select options in Fig 20 and click next.
18 Enter the PIN entered previously to enter into windows
10 as in Fig 21.

Hard disk formatting and partitioning

• format Hard Drive in Windows 10 with Disk Management
• format Hard Drive in Windows 10 with AOMEI Partition Assistant Standard
Requirements
• A woking PC - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK :1 Format HD Drive in Windows 10 with Disk Management
Fig 1
Disk Management in Windows 10 is a built-in
tool which enables to format, create, delete,
extend, shrink partition without rebooting
system. If you want to use this tool to format
Windows 10 hard drive, you should open
DiskManagement by one of the following ways
at first.
1 Click start menu and then type Disk Management to

search
(or)
2 Click start menu and type cmd to open command line
and then input compmgmt.msc and then click Enter
(or)
5 In the pop-up window, and set file system and cluster
3 Press "Windows + R" to open the command line and size and then click OK as shown in Fig 2.
then enter "diskmgmt.msc" to launch Disk
Management Fig 2
4 After open Disk Management, right click the Windows

10 hard drive partition you need to format (partition
D) and then choose Format as shown in Fig 1.
6 Get it check with your instructor.
48
Task 2: Format HD Drive in Windows 10 with AOMEI Partition Assistant Standard
AOMEI Partition Assistant Standard is a free software which is designed for partition management. It
can help to format hard drive in Windows 10 even format partition larger than 32GB from NTFS to
FAT32.
Before format, user can use free backup software - AOMEI Backupper Standard to backup data.
In order to make sure OS works properly, AOMEI Partition Assistant will not allow you to format system
partition and boot partition. However, if need to format system partition or boot partition, user need to
create a bootable media with AOMEI Partition Assistant first, after that, user can format these partitions
by entering Bootable Media. In this situation, user should reset the boot order of the computer from the
original location to the bootable media created. To do this, sometimes, need to change the BIOS
(Basic Input/Output System) settings of your PC.
1 Download AOMEI Partition Assistant Free, install, and 6 To execute the operations, please click Apply. Then
launch it. successfully format hard drive in Windows 10.
2 choose the Windows 10 hard disk partition. (Fig 5)
3 selectFormat Partitionas shown in Fig 3 Fig 5
Fig 3
7 Get it check with your instructor

4 In the pop-up window, set the type of file system, the
size of cluster. (Fig 4)
5 ClickOK.
Fig 4

Identify and rectify common hardware and software issues

• write chart of issues found while installation of OS
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Write chart of issues found while installation of OS
or
Sl.No. Problem Found Instruction from Instructor
SW | HW
SW | HW
SW | HW
SW | HW
SW | HW
SW | HW
SW | HW
50
Installing system application software
• Install MS-Office 2010
• Instal Nero software in windows operating system
• Instal VLC Media player
• Instal Adobe PDF Reader
• Download and Install Avira Free Antivirus software in windows operating system
Requirements
• PC with MS-Office - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Installing Ms-Office 2010
Hardware and Software Requirements Fig 1
Microsoft Office 2010 is available in both 32

and 64-bit versions and will install on the
following minimum hardware requirements.
• 500 MHz or faster processor
• 256 MB or more RAM memory
• 3 GB or larger available hard disk space
• 1024x578 display resolution
• Windows XP SP3 32-bit, Windows Vista
SP1 32/64-bit, Windows Server 2003 R2 32/64-
bit with MSXML 6.0, Windows Server 2008 32/
64-bit or later, Windows 7 32/64-bit, Windows
8 32/64-bit, Windows Terminal Server and
Windows on Windows applications are Fig 2
supported as well.
When inserting the CD a prompt should show

windows explorer
1 Confirm whether PC meets the Office 2010 system

requirements.
2 Check to see if your PC is preloaded with Office 2010.
3 Click Run SETUP.EXE as shown in Fig 1.
4 Read the Microsoft Software License terms, place a
check mark in the box to indicate that agree with them
and press the Continue button as shown in Fig 3.
51
5 Enter the 25 character product key on the MSU CD Fig 5
case and then click Continue as shown in Fig 2.
Fig 3
7 Click Close when the installation completes as shown

in Fig 6.
Fig 6
6 Press the Install Now button to begin the installation
as shown in Fig 4.
Fig 4
The Fig-5 shows the progress bar will indicate

how far along the installation has progressed.
Depending upon the speed of the computer,
this step could take several minutes on older
systems.
TASK: 2 Installing nero software in windows operating system
1 Double click the application file of Nero as shown in

Fig 7. Initial file extracting window will appear as
on Fig 8.

Fig 7 3 Click "Next" in the installation wizard as on Fig 11
Fig 11
Fig 8
4 Type the user name , organization and serial number

as on Fig 12
Fig 12
2 Click "Run Program" button as on Fig-9
Fig 9
Serial number look it printed on CD ROM
5 Select the setup type as "Custom" as on Fig 13
Fig 13
Window files configuring process will appear

few seconds as on Fig 10
Fig 10

6 Select "English" and click "Next" in the language The installation process wizard will appear as
selection window as on Fig 14 on Fig 17
Fig 14 Fig 17
9 Click "Finish" button in the installation wizard as on

Fig 18.
7 Click "Next" in the custom setup window as show in Fig 18
Fig 15.
Fig 15

8 Click "Install" in the installation wizard as shown in
Fig 16
Fig 16

TASK 3: Installing VLC media player
1 Double click on the Vlc-3.0.2-win32 exe file as on 5 Click the Next Button On the License Agreement
Fig 19. window as on Fig 22.
Fig 19 Fig 22
2 Click Run button in the window 6 Select components of Media player and click Next
3 Select the language and click ok button as shown in Button as shown in Fig 23.
Fig 20. Fig 23
Fig 20
4 Click Next Button as shown in Fig 21.

Fig 21
7 Click Install Button as on Fig 24.

Fig 24

The installation process window will display Click Finish Button as on Fig 26.
as on Fig 25.
Fig 26
Fig 25
TASK 4: download and install the adobe Acrobat Reader DC from the Internet
1 Open the browser
Fig 28
2 Select the corresponding website https://
get.adobe.com/reader/otherversions/ as shown in
Fig 27
Fig 27
The down loading process will start and the

EXE file will show bottom of the Browser
5 Click the up arrow and again click show in folder menu

as shown in Fig 29
3 Slect "windows version, Language and Reader version"
Fig 29
4 Click download button as shown in Fig 28.

6 Double click the file as shown in Fig 30. 8 After complete the installation click Finish Button as
shown in Fig 33.
Fig 30
Fig 33
7 Click Run button as shown in Fig 31.

Fig 31
The welcome window is shown in Fig 34
Fig 34
The down loading process window is shown in

Fig 32.
Fig 32

TASK 5: Installing Avira Free Antivirus software in windows operating system
1 Click "Google Chrome" icon in windows task Bar as 4 Click "START NOW" button in the web site as shown
shown in Fig 35. in Fig 37.
Fig 37
Fig 35
2 Type the text "download avira antivirus for windows

10" in text box and click "Search" Button as shown in
Fig 36.
5 After download the file "click the ^ button" and click
Fig 36 "open" menu as shown in Fig 38.
Fig 38
Display the list of related links in the chrome

web page. 6 Click "Run" button in the below window as Shown in
Fig 39.
3 Right click on the related link and click "Open link in
Fig 39
new tab" as shown in Fig-36.
The corresponding software exe file will

download bottom of the web page

The bellowed screen shows "This will down Fig 42
load and install the software on your
computer"
7 Click "Next" to continue the downloading process as

on Fig 40.
Fig 40
Fig 43
The downloading progress bar will display the

downloading status as shown in Fig 41.
Fig 41
10 Click "install now" button in the bottom of the window.
The "preparing installation" process begins as

on Fig 44.
Fig 44
8 Click "Finish" button after complete the 100%

downloading progress as on Fig 42.
9 After complete the downloading process the window
will appear as on Fig 43.
After complete the "preparing installation"
process the " Choose Installation Type"
window will appear
11 Select the "Express(Recommended)" setup type

option and select the license agreement and privacy
policy option in the bottom of the window as shown in
Fig 45.

Fig 45 Fig 47
12 Click "Next" button
The Avira Antivirus application installation 13 Get it checked with your instructor.
completed as shown in Fig 46 and 47
Fig 46

Configure bluetooth / Wi-Fi settings
• connecting Bluetooth devices to Windows 10
• create a wifi connection for a PC
Requirements
• A working PC - 1 No. /trainee
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Connecting Bluetooth devices to Windows 10
Connecting Bluetooth devices to Windows 10 2 From the Quick actions area, click the Connect button.
1 For your computer to see the Bluetooth peripheral, 3 Then all the enabled devices will appear in the list,
you need to turn it on and set it into pairing mode. It click on the device, and it should pair automatically.
typically involves pressing and holding the Bluetooth (Fig 2)
button until you see a flashing light that indicates the
pairing is ready. Fig 2
2 Then using the Windows key + I keyboard shortcut,

open the Settings app.
3 Navigate to Devices and go to Bluetooth.
4 Make sure the Bluetooth switch is in the On position.
(You'll know it is working because you'll notice the
message reads “Your PC is searching for and can be
discovered by Bluetooth devices.”)
5 Select the device you want to connect and click Pair.
Once you click Pair, you're all done. Windows 10 will
take care of the rest. You'll notice the "Connected"
label under the device name. (Fig 1)
Fig 1
Quick troubleshooting tips

If you don't see the Bluetooth section on Devices, chances
are that there are issues with Bluetooth driver. Make sure
to right-click the Start button, and go to Device Manager
to verify the driver is present and installed correctly. If
everything looks alright, but you don't see the option, you
may want to download and reinstall the latest Bluetooth
Alternatively, if you're simply trying to connect a Bluetooth driver from your computer's manufacturer support website.
audio or wireless display, you can simply do the following: (Fig 3)
1 In the notification area in the Taskbar, click to open

the Action Center button (or use the Windows key +
A keyboard shortcut).
61
Fig 3 3 Click on the peripheral you want to disconnect, and
click the Remove button and then click Yes to confirm.
(Fig 4)
Fig 4
If the problem is with the speakers, headphones, mouse,

or keyboard, make sure to turn the peripheral off, wait a
few seconds, and turn it back on to try again.
Removing a Bluetooth peripheral from Windows 10
Disconnecting a wireless peripheral is as easy as
connecting. Just follow the steps below: That’s all there is to it
1 Use the Windows + I keyboard shortcut to open the If you have come across issues using Bluetooth in
Settings app. Windows 10 and found a different work around, make
sure to share your solution in the commets below.
2 Navigate through Devices and go to Bluetooth.
TASK 2: Create a wifi connection for a PC
How to connect to a Wi-Fi network 5 Enter the network security key.

Connecting to a wireless network is an easy process, 6 Click the Next button. (Fig 6)
you only need to know the network you want to connect
and the security key to authenticate (sometimes also Fig 6
referred as a Wi-Fi password).
1 Click the wireless icon in the notification area.
2 Select the network you want to connect.
3 Check the Connect automatically option.
4 Click the Connect button. (Fig 5)
Fig 5
If the network flyout is not reporting any wireless network,

you can try the steps shown below to turn off and on
again Wi-Fi to see if that fixes the problem.
How to disconnect from a Wi-Fi network
Removing your device from a wireless network is also a
straightforward process that can be done in a few different
ways.

Disconnecting using the flyout menu Fig 8
The easiest way to disconnect is using the network flyout

menu.
1 Click the wireless icon in the notification area.
2 Select the network you're currently connected.
3 Click the Disconnect button on the network
connection. (Fig 7)
Fig 7
How to view a Wi-Fi connection properties

Sometimes, in order to troubleshoot a problem or set up
an application, you'll need to know your network hardware
information, such as network band, IP address, the name
of the adapter and others. While there are a number of
ways to find out this information, you can quickly identify
these and other information about your wireless connection
using the Settings app.
1 Open Settings.
Alternatively, you can click the quick action Wi-Fi button 2 Click on Network & Security.
at the bottom to turn off the adapter and disconnect from
the network using fly out menu. 3 Click on Wi-Fi.
Quick Tip: The same Wi-Fi button can also be found in 4 Under the wireless network, click the Hardware
the Action Centre's Quick Actions section (Windows key properties link. (Fig 9 & 10)
+ A).
Fig 9
If you don't select a schedule, then you'll need to enable
the adapter manually by clicking the Wi-Fi button again
from the fly out menu. Also, note that using the fly out
menu, it's possible to turn on or off Airplane mode and
Mobile hotspot.
Disconnecting using the Settings app
Alternatively, you can enable or disable Wi-Fi using the
Settings app.
1 Open Settings.
2 Click on Network & Security.
3 Click on Wi-Fi.
4 Turn off the toggle switch for the adapter you want to
disconnect.
5 Use the drop-down menu to select an option to turn
on the wireless adapter on schedule. (Fig 8)

Fig 10 5 Turn on or off the Connect automatically when in range
option. (Fig 12)
Fig 12
In the properties page, you'll find information, such as

SSID, protocol, security type, network band and channel,
IP and MAC address. How to change the Wi-Fi connection network profile
How to connect to a Wi-Fi network on range In order to increase network security, starting with the
automatically Windows 10 Fall Creators Update, you can now more
easily set your wireless connection as Private on a
If you didn't select the option to connect to a wireless network you trust, or Public on the network you don't
network automatically while setting up a new connection, trust, such as at a coffee shop or airport.
or you enabled the option, but you don't need the
configuration anymore, it's possible to control this feature 1 Open Settings.
using the Settings app. 2 Click on Network & Security.
1 Open Settings. 3 Click on Wi-Fi.
2 Click on Network & Security. 4 Click your current Wi-Fi connection. (Fig 13)
3 Click on Wi-Fi.
Fig 13
4 Click your current Wi-Fi connection. (Fig 11)
Fig 11
5 Under "Network profile," select one of the two options:

• Public - makes your PC hidden from other devices
on a public network and disables file and printer
sharing.
• Private - makes your PC discoverable by other
devices in a local network and allows them to use
printer and file sharing (if it was configured). (Fig 14)
If you're not running the Windows 10 Fall Creators Update,
you'll see a Make this PC discoverable option, which
works in the same way as the options shown in the above

Fig 14 Fig 16
steps (toggle switch off means Public, and toggle switch

on means Private). How to add or remove Wi-Fi connections
How to set a Wi-Fi connection as metered Using the Settings app is also possible to add or remove
a Wi-Fi network manually in those cases when you may
Out of the box, Windows 10 has unlimited access to the need to connect to a network that doesn't broadcast its
internet to download system and app updates, sync SSID (Service Set Identifier), or when you need to set up
settings across your devices, connect to cloud services, a wireless connection beforehand to save time.
and to connect you to the mighty internet.
Adding a Wi-Fi network
The problem is that if you're on a limited internet
connection, it's possible to go over the data cap very 1 Open Settings.
quickly. A metered connection helps to reduce Windows 2 Click on Network & Security.
10's data usage to prevent exceeding your data plan.
3 Click on Wi-Fi.
If you're connected to a limited data plan, you can use
the Settings app to set your wireless connection as 4 Click the Manage known networks link. (Fig 17)
metered.
Fig 17
1 Open Settings.
2 Click on Network & Security.
3 Click on Wi-Fi.
4 Click your current Wi-Fi connection. (Fig 15)
Fig 15
5 Click the Add a new network button. (Fig 18)

6 Enter the network name.
5 Under "Metered connection," turn on the Set as 7 Using the drop-down menu, select the network security
metered connection toggle switch. (Fig 16) type.
After completing the steps, Windows 10 will only have 8 Check the Connect automatically option.
restricted access to an internet connection, which also 9 Check the Connect even if the network is not
prevents it from downloading updates. However, some broadcasting option.
critical updates may download over this type of connection.
10 Click Save. (Fig 19)
In addition, using a metered connection will prevent the
Start menu from downloading Live Tiles updates, and Once you've completed the steps, whenever your device
some apps will no longer receive updates automatically. is within range of the network, it'll connect automatically
without any further steps.

Fig 18 Fig 21
After completing the steps, your device will no longer try

to connect with the network you've removed.
Fig 19
How to manage wireless services
The Wi-Fi settings page also offers a few nifty features for
users that are always on the move. (Fig 22)
Wi-Fi services
Windows 10 offers two additional features to help you get
connected no matter where you are located. If you turn
on the Find paid plans for suggested open hotspots near
me toggle switch, then you'll be able to purchase data
plans from the Windows Store form affiliated networks.
In addition, you can also turn on the Connect to suggested
open hotspots toggle switch, which allows Windows 10
Removing a Wi-Fi network to connect automatically to open wireless networks, even
connecting through landing pages thanks to a database
If you must remove (forget) a Wi-Fi network, the Settings of known networks.
app makes it a very straightforward process.
While using suggested open hotspots is a good option,
1 Open Settings. remember that some networks can be reliable but not
2 Click on Network & Security. secure.
3 Click on Wi-Fi. Hotspot 2.0 networks
4 Click the Manage known networks link. (Fig 20) Hotspot 2.0 is a relatively new networking standard that
makes connecting to public Wi-Fi networks a simple and
Fig 20 secure process.
If you're in a public place like at a coffee shop, airport, or
hotel, Hotspot 2.0 will identify and connect to the right
network automatically without having to go through a list
of networks which can be fake or malicious.
Hotspot 2.0 networks is enabled by default on Windows
10, but if you're planning to make use of this feature, you
can go to Settings>Update & Security>Wi-Fi to make
sure is enabled. You can also check this guide for more
details
Wrapping things up
While it's now possible to configure many wireless options
using the Settings app, Windows 10 has yet to include
5 Select the Wi-Fi connection you want to remove.
every networking feature in this experience. This means
6 Click the Forget button (there is no confirmation dialog that to change some options, such as advanced network
using this button, so make sure that you really want adapter settings, power management, and set up specific
Windows 10 to forget this connection before clicking protocols, you still need to use Control Panel.
the button). (Fig 21)

Fig 22
Bluetooth module Bluetooth is now a ubiquitous wireless technology that

transmit data back and forth between devices over a short
We're rapidly moving from a wired to a wireless area very
distance. It allows you to get rid of cables around your
quickly as more people are switching to mobile devices,
desk.
such as laptops, tablets, and phones, and moving away
from traditional computers. Of course, Windows 10 includes support for Bluetooth.
However, Microsoft is making it just a little bit easier to
In these computing devices, we can connect all sort of
connect different peripherals with this wireless technology.
accessories from headphones to speakers, mice,
keyboards, and other peripherals that can connect In this guide for beginners, we're going to look at how to
wirelessly to virtually any device thanks to Bluetooth. connect any Bluetooth peripheral to your Windows 10
devices (of course, if your computer supports this type of
wireless connectivity).

Install printer, scanner, Web camera & DVD drives

• add local printer in windows 10 operating system
• install a wireless printer
• Setup the Home group
• Connect to a shared printer on the HomeGroup
• Add a Scanner to Windows 10 PC.
Requirements
• PC with windows 10 OS - 1 No. /trainee
• Printer, scanner, web camera & - 1 No. /trainee
DVD drive software
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Add local printer in windows 10 operating system
The most common way to connect a printer to the PC is by USB cable, which makes it a local printer.
And also install a wireless printer or add a printer connected to another computer on your network.
We'll cover these scenarios below.
1 Connect the printer to your computer using the USB Fig 2

cable and turn it on.
2 Open the Settings app from the Start menu as shown
in Fig1.
Fig1
Fig 3
3 Click Devices as shown in Fig 2.

4 Click Add a printer or scanner as on Fig 3.
68
5 If Windows cannot detect the connected printer, click Fig 6
the The printer that I want isn't listedlink as shown in
Fig 4.
Fig 4
10 On the Install the printer driver window, from the

displayed list of printer manufacturers in the left
section, click to select the one to which the connected
printer belongs.
6 On the Find a printer with other options window, click 11 From the right section, locate and click to select the
to select the Add a local printer or network printer with specific model of the printer that is connected to the
manual settings radio button. PC.
7 Click Next to continue as on Fig 5.
Note: At this point, you can also click the Have
Disk button and browse and locate the driver
Fig 5 for the connected printer if you have
downloaded it manually from its official
website.
12 Click Next to proceed to the next step as on Fig 7.
Fig 7
8 On the Choose a printer port window, leave the default

options selected and click Next.
If you are an advanced user, you can also

choose a different option from the Use an 13 Type a printer name window, in the Printer name field,
existing port drop-down list, or you can define type an informative name for the printer as shown in
your own port by selecting the Create a new Fig 8.
port radio button and specifying your custom 14 click Next.
port in the enabled field as on Fig 6.
9 click Next.

Fig 8 17 opulate the Location and Comment fields with your
preferred information. Optionally p
18 Click Next to continue as on Fig 9.
Fig 9
15 If you share the printer , select "Share this printer so

that others on the network can find and use it" radio
button
Note: If you do not want to share the printer 19 On the final page of the wizard, click the Print a test
with the network users, you can select the Do page button to check the connectivity and proper
not share this printer radio button. functioning of the printer.
20 (Optional)Click Finish to complete the process.
16 In the Share name field, type a short share name for
the printer.17. Optionally populate the Location and
Comment fields with your preferred information.
Note: The name you specify here will be

displayed to the remote users when they
search for this printer over the network.
TASK 2: Installing a wireless printer

1 Open Settings as shown in Fig 10. 2 Click on Devicesas shown in Fig 11.
Fig 10 Fig 11
3 Click on Printers & scanners.

4 Click on the Add a printer or scanner button as on 5 Select the printer from the list and click Add device to
Fig 12. install the wireless printer to Windows 10 as shown in
Fig 13.
Fig 12
Fig 13
TASK 3: Setting Up a HomeGroup
1 Right-click on the wireless icon in the taskbar and 3 Click the "Create a homegroup" button as on Fig 15.
select "Open Network and Sharing Center".
Fig 15
2 Click "Ready to create" next to HomeGroup. If a

HomeGroup already exists on the network, it will say
"Joined." As on Fig 14.
Fig 14
4 Click Next.

5 Select what you want to be shared. Printers & Devices 6 Write down the HomeGroup password Windows
are shared by default as shown in Fig 16. creates for you. user need it for each computer you
Fig 16
want to join the HomeGroup.
7 Click Finish.
TASK 4: Connecting to a Shared Printer on the HomeGroup
1 Click "Homegroup" and then the Join now button in 3 Verify what you want to share and click Next as on
Windows Explorer. (Fig 17) Fig 19.
Fig 17 Fig 19
2 Click Next (Fig 18).

Fig 18 4 Enter the password and click Next as shown in
Fig 20.
Fig 20

5 Click Finish as shown in Fig 21. 6 Click Network in Windows Explorer and see the shared
printer installed as on Fig 22.
Fig 21
Fig 22
TASK 5: Adding a Scanner to Windows 10 PC
1 Go to the search box on the taskbar and type control 2 locate and select Devices and Printers as on Fig 24.
panel. Cortana will also display the Control Panel and
its icon as the Best Match, click on it as shown in Fig 24
Fig 23.
Fig 23

3 InsideDevices and Printers, find a blank space and Installing Web camera
perform a right-click there. Few options will appear,
1 Connect your Web camera to your computer.
click Add devices and printers as on Fig 25.
2 Wait for your computer to detect the Web camera.
Fig 25
Because you have windows Vista installed on your
computer, your computer will automatically detect that
a new peice of hardware was connected to your USB
port. A message will appear in the bottom right corner
of your screen that reads, “your devices are ready to
use” or
3 Install the Software to operate the camera, your camera
came with software to install on your computer. Simply
insert the disk that came with your web camera and
follow the instruction.
Installing DVD writer
1 Connect your DVD writer to your computer.
2 Wait for your computer to detect the DVD writer.
Because you have windows Vista installed on your
4 A small box with a title Add a device will be visible on computer, your computer will automatically detect that
the screen and it will start finding the device. a new peice of hardware was connected to your USB
port. A message will appear in the bottom right corner
5 After the scan gets over, the scanner name will be of your screen that reads, “your devices are ready to
displayed on the box. So, select the scanner name use” or
and click Next as shown in Fig 26.
3 Install the Software to operate the DVD writer, your
Fig 26 DVD writer came with software to install on your
computer. Simply insert the disk that came with your
DVD writer and follow the instruction.
6 Finally, successfully added the scanner to Windows

10 PC.

Burning a data in CD or DVD's using Nero
• Burn a data CD or DVD
Requirements
• Nero software - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Burn a Data in CD or DVD
Fig 2
1 Put the CD in the CD/DVD writer
2 Go to Start > All programs > Nero, then Nero
StartSmart
3 Scroll over the icons on the top right of the program
window, to find the Data icon. See Fig 1.
Fig 1
Fig 3
4 Choose Make Data CD. This will launch Nero Express

as shown in Fig 2.
5 Click Add and browse the hard drive and select the
files like included on the CD. When finished adding
files click Finished.
6 Click Next and name the disk.
7 Check Verify data after burning if you want to make
sure your burn happened correctly (this will take a
little more time).
8 Click Burn and insert a blank CD as on Fig 3
75
COPA - DOS Command line Interface and Linux Operating System
Basic DOS Commands
• enter to dos command prompt
• use basic dos commands
• list directory contents using DIR command
• view directory structure.
Requirements
• PC with windows 10 OS - 1 No. /trainee
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Enter in to DOS command prompt
1 In Windows 10, one of the fastest ways to launch field from your taskbar, enter command or cmd
Command Prompt is to use search. Inside the search (Fig 1) Then, click or tap on the Command Prompt
result.
Fig 1
Search Box

2 Command prompt window is displayed on the screen. (Fig2)
Fig 2
Dos Prompt
NOTE: Command Prompt is not case sensitive,

meaning that commands can be typed with
capital letters, lowercase or any combination
of them. The commands date or DATE will all
work in the same way.
76
TASK 2: Use basic DOS commands
Note: Each and every DOS command should 6 If the current time is not displayed, type the Current
be typed at Dos Prompt only and Enter key time as shown in the box given below. (Fig 6)
should be pressed at the end of each DOS
command to execute it. Fig 6
a Change the working drive from C to D

1 Type D: at DOS prompt as shown below.
C:\Users\nimi> D:
7 Enter the TIME command to check the new date is

Note: is the symbol for pressing Enter key on set. Record the displayed time.
the keyboard. When we enter wrong DOS
command, it displays Bad command or d Clears screen
filename or some other error messages CLS command is used to clear the screen.
(discussed in Related Theory 1.5.01). We have
to correct the Wrong DOS command to get the
result. D:\>CLS
Now the prompt is changed from C:\Users\nimi> to D:\> The displayed contents are cleared and the DOS prompt
and the currently working drive is changed from C to D. appears at the top left corner of the screen.
b View/change System date e Change the prompt
DATE command is used to view/change system date. PROMPT command is used to change the DOS prompt.
D:\>DATE 8 Type the following PROMPT command to change the
DOS prompt from D:\>to copa>. Record the output.
2 It displays the current date as shown below (Fig 3) D:\>PROPMPT copa$G
Fig 3 Note :$Grepresents>(greater than) sign.
9 Type the following PROMPT command to set the

current date as DOS prompt. Record the output.
D:\>PROPMPT $D$G
3 If the current date is not displayed, type the Current
date as shown in the box given below. (Fig 4) 10 Type the following PROMPT command to change the
DOS prompt back to D:\>and Record the output.
Fig 4
D:\>PROPMPT $D$G
f Create, change, or delete a volume label on a
logical drive
LABEL command is used to Create, change, or delete a
volume label on a logical drive
4 Enter the DATE command to check the new date is 11 Type the following command
set. Record the displayed the date. D:\>LABEL
Record the displayed date. 12 It displays the existing label and also allows you to
c View/change System time type new label as shown below. Record the output.
(Fig 7)
TIME command is used to view/change system time.
D:\>TIME Fig 7
5 It displays the current time as shown below (Fig 5)
Fig 5
13 Retype the LABEL command and record the output.

g Display the volume label and volume serial number on i Display complete system information for Microsoft
a logical drive Windows computers.
14 Type the following command 19 Type the following command
D:\> VOL D:\> SYSTEMINFO
15 It displays the volume label and volume serial number 20 It displays the complete system information as shown
of D drive as shown below. Record the output.(Fig 8) below. (Fig 10)
Fig 10
Fig 8
h Print the name and version of the operating system

16 Type the following command
D:\> VER
17 It displays the name and version of the Operating

system as shown below. (Fig 9)
Fig 9
Record the output.
j Exit DOS session
EXIT command is used to exit the DOS session.
21 Type the following command
D:\> EXIT
18 Record the output. It exits the DOS session and return to Windows OS.
TASK 3: List directory contents using DIR command.

DIR command displays a list of files and directories in a 4 Type the following command
directory.
E:\> DIR htmlnimi
1 Change over to E drive by typing E: at DOS prompt.
2 Type the following command. 5 Displays a list of files and directories of HTMLNIMI
directory of E drive as shown below. Record the output.
E:\> DIR (Fig 12)
Fig 12
3 It displays a list of files and directories of E drive as
shown below. (Fig 11)
Fig 11

6 Type the following command 9 It lists all files and folders begin with letter H and have
any extension as shown below. (Fig 14)
Note : /AD is a switch or option used with DIR
command to display only the directories of Fig 14
specified drive or directory.
E:\> DIR/AD
7 It displays only the directories of E drive as shown

below. Record the output. (Fig 13)
Fig 13
10 Type the following command.
E:\> DIR ?????

11 It lists all files and folders which are 5 characters long
without any extension as shown below.
Note:Wildcards are typically either an asterisk

(*), which represents one or more characters
or question mark(?), which represents a single
character.For more switches of DIR command
8 Type the following command. refer Related Theory 1.5.01 and practise them
with the help of instructor and record the ouput.
E:\> DIR H*.*
TASK 4: View directory structure using TREE command
TREE command graphically displays the folder structure Note : If the TREE command displays the
of a drive or path. directory structure more than a page, then use
1 Type the following command |more (pipe symbol | is available with \ key in
keyboard) command with TREE command
(TREE | MORE) to view the directory structure
E:\> TREE
page by page.
2 It displays the directory structure (only directories) of 3 Type the following command
aE drive as shown below. Record the output. (Fig 15)
E:\> TREE/F htmlnimi
Fig 15
/F switch is used with TREE command to
display both the files and subdirectories of
HTMLNIMI directory as shown below. Record
the output.
Fig 16
Get all the recorded output checked by the instructor.

Managing files and folders using dos commands
• manage files using DOS commands
• manage directories using DOS commands
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Manage files using DOS commands
Practice the following DOS commands in Command 3 COPY lesson1.txt ex1.txt

Prompt, record the output and get it checked by the
instructor: • It copies lesson1.txt to ex1.txt as shown in Fig 3.
Note :File name should not be greater than 11 Fig 3

characters out of which 8 characters are for the
name and 3 characters are for the extension.
1 COPYCON lesson1.txt
• It creates the text file lesson1.txt as shown in Fig 1
Fig 1
• Use DIR command to check that the file ex1.txt is in

the list.
4 REN ex1.txt notes.txt
• It renames the file ex1.txt as notes.txt as shown in
Fig.4
• Use DIR command to check that the file ex1.txt is
renamed as notes.txt (Fig 4)
Fig 4
• ^Z (Ctrl Z) or F6 is used to save the text file.

2 TYPE lesson1.txt
• It displays the content of the text file lesson1.txt as
shown in Fig 2.
Fig 2
5 DEL notes.txt
• It deletes the file notes.txt as shown in Fig.5
80
Fig 5 Fig 6
• Use DIR command to check that the file notes.txt is

available in the list.
6 SORT lesson1.txt Fig 7
• It sorts the content of the file lesson1.txt as shown in

Fig 6.
7 (i) FIND "SYS" lesson1.txt
• It searches for a text string "SYS" in the text file
lesson1.txt anddisplays a line having the text string
"SYS"as shown in Fig.7
(ii) FIND/n "SYS" lesson1.txt
• It searches for a text string "SYS" in the text file
lesson1.txt anddisplays a line having the text string
"SYS"with line number as shown in Fig 7.
TASK 2: Manage directories (folders) using DOS commands
Practise the following DOS commands in Command 2 CD training

Prompt, record the output and get it checked by the
• It changes the current directory to training and it can
instructor:
be seen in the DOS prompt as shown in Fig 9 .
1 MD training
Fig 9
• It creates the new directory "training"as shown in Fig.8
• Use DIR command to check the directory "training" is
in the list. (Fig 8)
Fig 8
• MD Theory
It creates a new subdirectory Theory in the main
directory training
• MD Practical
It creates a new subdirectory Practical in the main
directory training
• Use DIR command to check that the new
subdirectories Theory and Practical are listed in the
main directory trainingas shown in Fig.10

It exits all directories Theory and training and goes to
the root directory E:\ as shown in Fig.13
Fig 13
• CD Practical
It changes the current working directory to Practical as
shown in Fig.11
4 RD training
• RD command removes the empty directory only. So
first thing is to remove all files and directories inside
the directory training.
• CD training
It changes the current working directory into training
(Fig.14)
3 CD.. • RD Theory
• It exits current working subdirectory Practical and goes It removes the empty subdirectory Theory (Fig.14)
to the main directory trainingas shown in Fig 12. • RD Practical
Fig 12
It removes the empty subdirectory Practical(Fig.14)
• CD..
It exits the current working directory training and goes
to E:\>(Fig.14)
• Use DIR command to check the availability of the
directory training (Fig.14)
Fig 14
• CD Theory
It changes the current working directory to Theory as
shown in Fig.13
• CD\

TASK 3: Create the given Directory Stucture (Fig.15)
E:\>MAINDIR1 Command sequence to create the given directory

structure and it is shown in Fig 17:
<Subdir1>
<Subdir2> Fig 17
File1
<Subdir3>
• Use TREE command to view the directory structure of
the directory MAINDIR1(Fig 16)
Fig 16
• MD MAINDIR1 - Creates MAINDIR1

• CD MAINDIR1 - Enters into directory
MAINDIR1
• MD Subdir1 - Creates Subdir1
" CD Subdir2 - Enters into Subdir2
• COPY CON File1 - Creates the file File1
• ^Z - Saves the file File1
• CD\ - Exits all subdirectory
and goes to root
directory E:

Installing ubuntu linux operating system

• install ubuntu Linux operating system.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Installing ubuntu Linux operating system
1 Download Ubuntu 14.10 from put the CD on the CD This is starting screen as on Fig-3, it will be
ROM drive, change the boot sequence accordingly, so disappeared in a minute.
that CD ROM can boot first.
OR Fig 3
Install Ubuntu from the USB flash, change the boot se-
quence according to the USB mass storage to boot first.
2 Select the Language and press Enter as on Fig-1.
Fig 1
After few seconds the following screen will

appear as on Fig-4.
Fig 4
3 Select install ubuntu as on Fig-2.
Fig 2
4 Select language and click continue as on Fig-4.

5 Click forward on preparing to install Ubuntu screen.
84
6 Erase disk and install Ubuntu (i.e. it will format the
Fig 7
entire drive and install the OS). If you don't have any
idea about the partitioning scheme simply click con-
tinue as on Fig-5.
Fig 5
8 Select free space and click on + sign at the bottom to

create partitions. Following shows for /boot partition
as on Fig-8.
Fig 8
7 Once clicked on continue, you would be asked to con-
firm the auto partioning. Click on continue to proceed
as on Fig-6.
Fig 6
9 Following for swap partition, make sure you selected

use as swap area and click ok as on Fig-9.
Fig 9
Once clicked, you would get the following page

where installer lists available hard disk. In this
case i have one harddisk size of 20GB, to cre-
ate a partition; click on New Partition Table to
create empty partition since this is a new
harddisk. Pop up will ask you to confirm, click
on continue as on fig-7
Partition scheme will be like below:

/boot - 100MB
swap - 2048MB
/ - Remaning (19GB)

10 Follow for / (root) partition as on Fig-10. 13 Select the location.
14 Select the keyboard layout as on Fig-13.
Fig 10
Fig 13
11 Review the partitions and click on install now as on

Fig-11.
In case you are not sure, use the 'Detect Key-
Fig 11 board Layout' option and you can also test your
selection by typing in the test text box.
In the final screen you will be prompted to en-
ter information about the first user that is go-
ing to be created on the system. Enter your
information in this screen as on Fig -14.
Here is one thing you should remember - if
select 'Log in automatically', it will never ask
you your password for authentication while try
to log in to the Ubuntu System. Its best if you
give a very secure password for the installa-
tion. Ubuntu will inform whether the password
is secure or not.
If you select 'Encrypt my home folder' it will
make all the files and folders in your home
folder more secure from unauthorized view-
12. Confirm the partition scheme as on Fig-12. ing if you have multiple users using your com-
puter. When you log in to your computer your
files are seamlessly decrypted for just your ses-
Fig 12
sion. If you are not sure, leave this box un-
checked.

16 Once the Machine restarted, login window login
Fig 14
window will as on Fig-16. Type the password on the
below of the user name and Press Enter.
Fig 16
15 Once the installation is over, click on the restart now

as on Fig-15.
Fig 15
The Desktop of the Ubuntu 14.10 will be like
below as on Fig-17.
Fig 17
17 Get it checked with your instructor.

COPA - DOS Command Line Interface and Linux Operating System
Install necessary application software in Linux

• install adope reader in linux OS
• install VLC media player in linux OS
• install libreoffice in linux OS.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Install adope reader in linux OS
1 Open up terminal by pressing Ctrl+Alt+T on keyboard. 7 Execute the command sudo apt-get update
2 Execute the command sudo add-apt-repository “deb 8 Execute the command sudo gedit /etc/gnome/
http://archive.canonical.com/ precise partner” defaults.list to Set Adobe Reader as default PDF reader
3 Type the user password when it asks. 9 Find out and change the line application/
pdf=evince.desktop into application/
Note: That there’s no visual feed back when pdf=acroread.desktop
you typing a password.
And add below line into the end
4 Update package lists by running the command sudo application/fdf=acroread.desktop
apt-get update
application/xdp=acroread.desktop
5 Install acroread package by running the command sudo
apt-get install acroread application/xfdf=acroread.desktop
6 Remove the Canonical Partners repository by running
the command sudo add-apt-repository -r “deb http:// application/pdx=acroread.desktop
archive.canonical.com/ precise partner”
10 Save the file and restart nautilus by the command
nautilus -q in terminal to apply changes.
TASK 2: Install VLC media player in linux OS
1 Open up terminal by pressing Ctrl+Alt+T on keyboard. 5 Install acroread package by running the command sudo
apt-get install acroread
2 Run the command sudo apt-get update to refresh the
software repository catalogue 6 Remove the Canonical Partners repository by running
the command
3 Run the command sudo apt-get install vlc to install
VLC Media Player sudo add-apt-repository -r “deb http://
archive.canonical.com/ precise partner”
4 When prompted with the ‘Do you want to continue’
press ‘Y’ on keyboard. 7 Execute the command sudo apt-get update.
TASK 3 : install libreoffice in linux OS
1 Open up Run Application dialog by pressing Alt+F2 3 Enter the password when asked and hit the OK button
on keyboard.
4 Hit the ALT+F2 key combination again and run the
2 Execute gksu add-apt-repository ppa:libreoffice/ppa command gksu apt-get update in the “Run Application”
in Run Application dialog (Fig 1) dialog. (Fig 2)
88
Fig 1 7 Enter the password when terminal window will
appear and asked.
8 Type Y and hit Enter, When will be asked if you want
to install the LibreOffice packages. (Fig 4)
Fig 4
Fig 2
9 Libre Office is now completely installed and ready to

use. (Fig 5)
Fig 5
5 Enter the password when asked and hit the OK button

6 Hit the ALT+F2 key combination again and run the
command sudo apt-get install libreoffice libreoffice-
gnome language-support-en in the “Run Application”
dialog. (Fig 3)
Fig 3

COPA - DOS Command Line Interface and Linux Operating Systems
Use basic Linux commands for directory listing File, Folder management,
Passrord etc.,
• list directories with the ls command
• list and combine files with the cat command
• move to directories with cd command
• find files with the find, where and locate command
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Listing directories with the ls command
1 Open the console window.

Fig 3
2 Type ls and press enter.
3 Observe the output on the screen. The output will be
as shown in Fig - 1.
Fig 1
Fig 4
4 To list the files as well as directories those are kept in

the particular working directory type ls -l. The output
will display as on Fig - 2.
Fig 2
Fig 5
5 Type the following command in console window.

$ ls -la
The output window will display as on Fig - 3.
6 Type the command ls -li in console window and 8 Type the command ls -x in the console window. The
observe the output. The output window will display as output window will appear as on Fig - 6.
on Fig - 4.
Try the following commands in console window, write the
7 In console window type ls -m. The output window will description and observe the output screen in record sheet
display as on Fig - 5. with the help of Instructor.
90
Commands Description
Fig 6
ls /usr
ls -R /
ls -Rd /*/*/*
dir
Vdir
TASK 2 : Listing and combining files with the cat command and rediretion
1 Type the following command in console window and 3 In console window type the cat -n command followed
type the text under the command for creating new text by file name for display line numbers in the file
file as shown in Fig-7. content. The output window will appear as on Fig-9.
$ cat > samplefile1.txt
Fig 9
welcome to ubuntu linux
this is sample file using cat command
enjoy the ICTSM subject
The output window will appear as on Fig-7.
Fig 7
$ cat -n samplefile1.txt
Try the following commands in console window, write the
description and observe the output screen in record sheet
with the help of Instructor.
2 Type the cat command followed by filename for
displaying content of the file. cat -n samplefile1 samplefile2
$ cat samplefile1.txt (or)
welcome to ubuntu linux cat -n samplef*
this is sample file using cat command $cat sample* > samplefile3.txt
enjoy the ICTSM subject $cat samplefile1.txt>>samplefile2.txt
The output window will appear as on Fig-8. $ wc samplefile1.txt
Fig 8

TASK 3 : Moving to directories with cd command
1 Type the command cd /usr/bin in command window for 3 Type the command cd ../.. in console window to move
moving the cursor /usr/bin directory. The output win- root directory. The output window will display as on
dow will appear as on Fig-10. Fig-12.
Fig 12
Fig 10
4 Type the command cd ~ (or) cd in console. For go

back the blinking cursor to home directory. The output
2 In console window type cd .. command for move up window will appear as on Fig-13.
one stage to the previous directory. Observe the
output screen. The output window will appear as on
Fig-11. Fig 13
Fig 11
5 Type the command pwd in console window for print

working directory. And observe the output window. And
verify it with your instructor.
TASK 4 : Find files with the find, where and locate command
`Grep command $ grep UNIX example.txt
2 Create a file using cat command as show below
The output will display as below.
Fig 14
UNIX operating system
UNIX and Linux operating system
4 Type another grep command with option -v to
exclude matching word as shown in below grep
command for example.
$ grep UNIX example.txt | grep -v Linux
5 Try the grep command with some attributes and check
the output with the help of instructor.
$ cat example.txt 6 Type the following example in the console and record
the output with the help of your instructor.
$ cat testfile.txt
UNIX and Linux operating system
a
Linux operation system
b
3 Type the grep command for searching particular word
as shown in below. c
d

$ grep -v -e "a" -e "b" -e "c" testfile.txt Fig 16
7 Write the output with description in the below box.
grep -c UNIX example.txt
grep -v -c testfile.txt
grep -l "hai" testfile*
8 Type whereis command followed by and another
command. It will shows that the command where it is
located. The output window will appear as on Fig-15.
9 Type the command locate in console window. The
output window will appear as on Fig-16.
Fig 15
as on Fig-17.
Fig 17
10 To get the summery of particular command, type whatis

in the console window the output window will display

Practice on manipulation and searching commands

• manage files and directories using various commands
• handle user level commands and changing the permissions
• handle additional commands.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Manage files and directories using various commands
1 Open the console window.

8 In console window type rmdir followed by directory
2 Type the touch command in console. name for used to remove a empty directory for
example.
3 Observe the output. The output window as on Fig - 1.
$ rmdir dirname
Fig 1 Command Description
rmdir -p dir1/dir2/dir3
rmdir dir1/dir2/dir3 dir1/dir2 dir1
rm -rf dirname
9 Type the command mv in console window for moving

one file or directory from one place to another place, it
is also used for renaming a directory or file for
Example.
$ mv oldfilename newfilename (to change the file name)
10 Try the mv command with some attributes
4 Type the rm command in console window for using Command Description

remove a file for example.
mv foo /tmp
$ rm testfile1.txt mv foo /tmp/joe
5 Try the rm command in console window with additional mv /tmp/foo .
attributes and record the outputs with screenshots. mv /tmp/foo ~
6 Type the command mkdir followed by directory name in mv /tmp/foo ~/dir1
console window for make a new directory for
mv foo1 foo2 foo3 dir1
example:-
mv foo[123] dir1
$ mkdir computer
mv foo* dir1
7 Try the mkdir command followed by different attributes mv dir1 dir2
with directory name.
6 In console window type the command cp for copy the
Command Description file to the destination directory for example.
mkdir memos letters email $ cp /home/fruits/mango.txt /root/abcd
mkdir -p /home/joe/customer/babu 7 Try the cp command with some attributes and check
with instructor.
94
Command Description
cp chapter1 /tmp
cp chapter1…
cp file1 file2 file3 /tmp
cp -r foo /tmp
cp /tmp/foo ~/dir1
cp foo1 foo2 foo3 dir1
cp foo[123] dir1
cp foo* dir1
cp -r dir1 dir2
TASK 2 : Handle user level commands and changing the permissions
User add -to create a new user 1 Add single permission to a file/directory
1 Type the command useradd in console window and Example
record the output for example.
$ chmod u+x filename
$ useradd username
Output:-
2 In console window type the userdel followed by user
2 Add multiple permission to a file/directory
name to remove a user from linux for example
Example
$userdel tarun
$ chmod u+x, g+x filename
3 Type the command groupadd in console window to
add a new group for Example Output:-
$ groupadd fruits 3 Remove permission from a file/directory
4 In console window type the gruopdel command to de- Example
lete a group for Example
$ chmod u-rx filename
$ groupdel fruits
Output:-
5 Type the command chown in the console window to
4 Change permission for all roles on a file/directory
change the ownership of a file or directory for example
Example
$ ls -l
$ chmod a+x filename
drwxrw-rw- 2 root root 4096 Mar 11 12:03 abcd
Output:-
(permission) (owner) (group own) (size) (name)
5 Make permission for a file same as another file (using
6 And typethe following in console window
reference)
$ chown tarun /abcd
Example
$ ls -l
$ chmod --reference= file1 file2
drwxrw-rw- 2 tarun root 4096 Mar 11 12:03 abcd
Output:-
7 In console window type chgrp to change the group
6. Apply the permission to all the files under a directory
ownership of a file or directory for example
recursively
$ ls -l
Example
drwxrw-rw- 2 tarun root 4096 Mar 11 12:03 abcd
$ chmod -R 755 directory-name/
$ chgrp tarun /abcd
Output:-
$ ls -l
7. Change execute permission only on the directories (files
drwxrw-rw- 2 tarun root 4096 Mar 11 12:03 abcd are not affected)
Try the following commands in the console window, Example
write the output and verify it with the help of instruc-
$ chmod u+X *
tor
Output:-

TASK 3 : Handling additional commands
1 Clear -it will clear the screen (shortcut ctl+l) for August 2007
example.
Mo 6 13 20 27
$ clear
Tu 7 14 21 28
2 Exit -to end a current session as well current terminal
We 1 8 15 22 29
logging for example.
Th 2 9 16 23 30
$ exit
Fr 3 10 17 24 31
3 Man -to view the mannual page of commands for
example. Sa 4 11 18 25
$ man mkdir Su 5 12 19 26
4 --help -to view the help documents of a command 12 Try the cal command with various attributes and ob-
example. serve the output screen with the help of instructor
$ ls --help Command Description
5 Who -This command is used to display user name
and their ip addresses who have loged in on your cal 1 2007
server example. cal -3
$who cal -J
6 whoami -this command shows the current logged in cal -e
terminal user name for example
cal -m
$whoami
cal -j
8 su -username to switch from one user to another
users home directory for example. cal -p
$su mango cal -w
9 type the date in console window for displaying current cal -y
system date for example.
13 Type the paswd command in console window to change
$ date the password for the current user for example
Wed Aug 18 16:24:44 EDT 2015 $ passwd dhinesh
10 Type the Cal command in console window to display Enter new UNIX password:
the calendar of the current month for example.
Retype new UNIX password:
$ cal
passwd: password updated successfully
August 2007
Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa
$ chage --list dhinesh
1 2 3 4
Last password change : Apr 23, 2009
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Password expires : never
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Password inactive : never
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Account expires : never
26 27 28 29 30 31
Minimum number of days
11 In console window type the ncal command for chang- between password change : 0
ing the output format for example
Maximum number of days
$ ncal between password change : 99999
Number of days of warning
before password expires :7
96 IT & ITES : COPA (NSQF Level - 4) - Exercise 1.5.25B

Graphical user Interface for files and folders on the ubuntu desktop
• accessing computer explorer in ubuntu
• adding emblems to files and folders
• changing file and folder permissions
• renaming and deleting files and folders.
TASK 1: Access computer explorer in ubuntu

1 Selecting places -> computer will invoke Nautilus with 2 In the above fig the primary devices on the system are
a list of devices and locations available for browsing. listed. Double clicking on any of these icons will open
(Fig 1) a new window containing the files and folders located
on that device.
Fig 1
3. The properties of any icon (such as file system type

Fig 2
and disk usage) can be displayed by clicking with the
right mouse button over an icon and selecting
Properties from the resulting dialog as in Fig 2. The
following figure shows the properties dialog for a hard
disk drive based file system:
97
TASK 2 : Adding emblems to files and folders
Recent versions of nautilus provide a useful feature that allows descriptive emblems to be placed next
to file or folder icons. For example, you might want to a photos emblem next to a folder in which you
store digital pictures, or a presentation emblem next to a file containing a presentation. The addition
of emblems is achieved using the nautilus properties panel. As an example, we will add emblems
next to the following summerVacation and staff meeting folders:
1 Select the "summer vacation" folder and right click 3 Scroll down the list of emblems until you find the photos
with the mouse. (Fig 3). emblem and select the checkbox to add the emblem.
2 From the popup menu,select properties and in the 4 Note that you can add more than one emblem to each
properties dialog click on the emblems tab. (Fig 4) file or folder. Repeat these steps to add a documents
emblem to the StaffMeeting folder and close the
Fig 3
properties dialog. The end result should appear as
follows. (Fig 5)
Fig 4
Fig 5
TASK 3 : Changing file and folder permissions

1. Click with the right mouse button over the file or folder 2. In the resulting properties dialog select the
to be changed and select Properties from the popup Permissions tab to display the current settings for the
menu. file or folder. (Fig 6)

Fig 6
TASK 4 : Renaming and deleting files and folders

1 Files and folders can be renamed by right clicking on 3 Yet another option is to right click on the icon and
the icon and selecting Rename from the popup menu. select move to trash.
Files can be moved to the Trash in a number of ways.
Now that we have looked at some of the
2 One option is to simply select the icon and press the features of Nautilus we will now look at
Delete key on the keyboard. Another is to click on the configuring the Ubuntu File Manager.
icon and drag and drop into the trash can in bottom
right corner of the desktop.

Desktop settings in linux
• set desktop options in Linux
• manage user accounts to Linux
TASK 1 : Set desktop options in Linux
1 Select Unity launcher (2) option in Ubuntu desktop as Fig 3

in Fig 1.
Fig 1
Fig 4
2 Click on Usser menu at the top right comer, to access
Appearance a Settings in Ubuntu, on the top Menu bar
and select System Settings in Fig 2.
Fig 2
Fig 5
3 Select the Appearance icon as in Fig 3.

4 Click on any wallpaper thumnail icon to set the wallpa-
per of desktop in Fig 4.
5 Select a theme from themes, to set a working theme
as in Fig 5.
6 Set the icon level of display to get resized of the icons.

(Fig 6)
7 Select be havior tab to set launcher settings to show/
hide icons. (Fig 7)
100
Fig 6
Fig 8
9 To tet back options use tools as in (Fig 9)
Fig 9
Fig 7
8 Reveal again using On button if required. (Fig 8) 10 Click on tick marks as in above figureto show the menus
for a window.
Note : Never set the reveal sensitivity at the
11 Click Restore Behavior Settings at the bottom, to get
lowest level because it will make it hard to get
the deaault settings of the Linux interface.
thelauncher back.
TASK 2 : Manage user accounts to Linux
Add a new user account

Administrators can do things like add and
You can add multiple user accounts to your computer. delete users, install software and drivers, and
Give one account to each person in your household or change the date and time.
company. Every user has their own home folder,
documents, and settings. 6 Enter the new user’s full name. The username will be
filled in automatically based on the full name. If you do
You need administrator privileges to add user accounts. not like the proposed username, you can change it.
1 Open the Activities overview and start typing Users. 7 You can choose to set a password for the new user, or
let them set it themselves on their first login.
2 Click on Users to open the panel.
If you choose to set the password now, you can press the
3 Press Unlock in the top right corner and type in your
icon to automatically generate a random password.
password when prompted.
8 Click Add.
4 Press the + button, below the list of accounts on the
left, to add a new user account.
Delete a user account
5 If you want the new user to have administrative access You can add multiple user accounts to your computer. If
to the computer, select Administrator for the account somebody is no longer using your computer, you can
type. delete that user’s account.
You need administrator privileges to delete user 1 Open the Activities overview and start typing Users.
accounts.
2 Click Users to open the panel.
1 Open the Activities overview and start typing Users. 3 Select the user account that you want to log in to
2 Click Users to open the panel. automatically at startup.
3 Press Unlock in the top right corner and type in your 4 Press Unlock and enter your password.
password when prompted. 5 Toggle the Automatic Login switch to ON.
4 Select the user that you want to delete and press the
- button, below the list of accounts on the left, to delete Change your password
that user account.
It is a good idea to change your password from time to
5 Each user has their own home folder for their files and
time, especially if you think someone else knows your
settings. You can choose to keep or delete the user’s
password.
home folder. Click Delete Filesif you are sure they will
not be used anymore and you need to free up disk You need administrator privileges to edit user accounts
space. These files are permanently deleted. They other than your own.
cannot be recovered. You may want to back up the
files to an external storage device before deleting them. 1 Open the Activities overview and start typing Users.
Change your login screen photo
3 Click the label ····· next to Password. If you are
When you log in or switch users, you will see a list of changing the password for a different user, you will first
users with their login photos. You can change your need to Unlock the panel.
photo to a stock image or an image of your own. You
4 Enter your current password, then a new password.
can even take a new login photo with your webcam.
Enter your new password again in the Verify New
You need administrator privileges to edit user accounts Password field.
other than your own.
You can press the icon to automatically generate
1 Open the Activities overview and start typing Users.
a random password.
3 If you want to edit a user other than yourself, press 5 Click Change.
Unlock in the top right corner and type in your password
when prompted. Change who has administrative privileges
4 Click the picture next to your name. A drop-down Administrative privileges are a way of deciding who can
make changes to important parts of the system. You
gallery will be shown with some stock login photos.
can change which users have administrative privileges
If you like one of them, click it to use it for yourself. and which ones do not. They are a good way of keeping
• If you would rather use a picture you already have your system secure and preventing potentially damaging
on your computer, click Browse for more pictures…. unauthorized changes.
• If you have a webcam, you can take a new login You need administrator privileges to change account
photo right now by clicking Take a photo…. Take types.
your picture, then move and resize the square outline
to crop out the parts you do not want. If you do not 1 Open the Activities overview and start typing Users.
like the picture you took, click Take Another Picture 2 Click Users to open the panel.
to try again, or Cancel to give up.
3 Press Unlock in the top right corner and type in your
Log in automatically password when prompted.
4 Select the user whose privileges you want to change.
You can change your settings so that you are
automatically logged in to your account when you start 5 Click the label Standard next to Account Type and
up your computer: select Administrator.
6 The user’s privileges will be changed when they next
log in.

COPA - DOS Command Line Interface and Linux Operating Systems
View system properties and manage system settings in Linux

• open system properties.
TASK 1 : Open System Properties
1 Go to Settings, and under System, click on Details 2 Search for “system” in Software Center, and install
for basic information: (Fig 1) System Profiler and Benchmark. (Fig 2)
Fig 1
Fig 2
3 Run it from the Launcher (type “system” if it isn’t there

Note: Following are examples for CPU and
already) and will display a detailed list of hardware
Memory informtion in Ubuntu Linux.
that can be expanded further by category. (Fig 3, 4 5)
Fig 3
103
Fig 4
Fig 5

COPA - Word Processing Software
Open MS Word and familirize with basic word components

• open MS Word and creat a new document
• identify MS Word screen components and ribbon
• add and format the text
• save a document
• close document and exit from MS word.
Requirements
• A working PC with MS
Office 2007 - 1 No./batch.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Open MS Word and creat a new document

1 Click the 'start' button A popup menu will appear on the screen as shown in
Fig 1.
Fig 1
105
2 Place the cursor on Programs 4 Select Microsoft Office word 2007 as shown in Fig 1.
3 click 'on' the Microsoft office.
A blank document appears on the screen as
shown in Fig 2.
Fig 2
5 Right-click anywhere in the main menu as in Fig 3. 6 Select Minimize the Ribbon in the menu that appears
as in Fig 4.
Fig 3 Fig. 4
This will toggle the Ribbon on and off.
TASK 2: Identify MS Word screen components and Ribbon
Introducing the new interface
There is a new look for Office Word 2007, the new Office Fig 1
Fluent user interface, which replaces menus, toolbars,
and most of the task panes from earlier versions of Word
with a single mechanism that is simple and discoverable.
Office Fluent user interface
The primary replacement for menus and toolbars in Office
Word 2007 is the Ribbon, a component of the Office Flu-
ent user interface. Fig 1.

1 Tabs are designed to be task-oriented. Menus, toolbars and other familiar elements
2 Groups within each tab break a task into subtasks. In addition to tabs, groups, and commands, Office Word
2007 uses other elements that also provide paths for ac-
3 Command buttons in each group carry out a com-
complishing your tasks..
mand or display a menu of commands.
Tabs that appear only when you need them Microsoft Office Button This button is located in
In addition to the standard set of tabs that you see on the the upper-left corner of the Word window and opens the
Ribbon whenever you start Office Word 2007, there are menu shown Fig 4.
two other kinds of tabs, which appear in the interface only
when they are useful for the type of task that you are Fig 4
currently performing
Contextual tools
Contextual tools enable you to work with an object that
you select on the page, such as a table, picture, or draw-
ing. When you click the object, the pertinent set of con-
textual tabs appear in an accent color next to the stan-
dard tabs. (Fig 2)
Fig 2
Quick Access Toolbar

The Quick Access Toolbar is located by default at the top
of the Word window and provides quick access to tools
that you use frequently. (Fig 5)
Fig 5
1 Select an item in your document.

2 The name of the contextual tools appears in an accent
color, and the contextual tabs appear next to the stan-
dard set of tabs.
3 The contextual tabs provide controls for working with
the selected item.
Dialog Box Launchers
Program tabs
Dialog Box Launchers are small icons that appear in some
Program tabs replace the standard set of tabs when you groups. Clicking a Dialog Box Launcher opens a related
switch to certain authoring modes or views, including Print dialog box or task pane, providing more options related to
Preview. (Fig 3) that group. (Fig 6)
Fig 3 Fig 6

Adding commands to the Quick Access Toolbar Fig 8
Some Word 2003 commands are available in Office Word

2007 only from the list of all commands in the Word Op-
tions dialog box.:
1 Click the Microsoft Office Button , and then click

Word Options. (Fig 7)
Fig 7
Fig 9
2 In the list at the left, click Customize.

3 In the Choose commands from drop-down list box,
click All commands.
4 In the Customize Quick Access Toolbar box, select ei-
ther For all documents (default) or a specific document.

Publish your work
5 Click the command that you want to add, and then click Your paper is done, but everyone in your department posts
Add.
their papers as PDF files, not Word documents. Office
Word 2007 makes it easy to save your document in PDF
Repeat for each command that you want to add. format. (Fig 10)
5 Click the Move Up and Move Down arrow buttons to
Fig 10
arrange the commands in the order in which you want
them to appear on the Quick Access Toolbar.
6 Click OK.
Do the math
To write papers for your math, science, or engineering
class? The new equation writing feature in Office Word
2007 makes it easy to insert professionally formatted for-
mulas and equations into your document. (Fig 8)
You can also easily create your own equations and formu-
las based on common math structures, such as fractions,
radicals, integrals, large operators, and more. Each struc-
ture provides a variety of placeholders for inserting math-
ematical symbols, which are organized in galleries. For
example, you can choose from basic math, Greek letters,
operators,arrows and more. (Fig 9)
The first time that you use a 2007 Microsoft Office system
program to save a file in PDF format, you need to install a
free add-in. A link to the add-in is available when you click
Save As. After you install the add-in, choose PDF when
you use the Save As command.

TASK 3: Enter text using keyboard.
1 Place cursor in the blank document. 3 Slect the text with mouse or keyboard.
2 Enter the following text in the blank document. 4 Change the font and styles from Home tab. (like Font,
Size, Bold, Italic, Underline etc.,
Sachin Tendulkar Virender Sehwag

Murali Vijay Virat Kohli
Harbhajan Singh Gautam Gambhir
MS Dhoni Rohit Sharma
Suresh Raina Zageer Khan
TASK 4: Save a document
1 Click the Microsoft Office Button or save

button
A dropped down list appears on the screen as A window will appear as shown in Fig 6.
in Fig 5.
3 Type sample1 as the new file name, in the filename
2 Click 'save' as shown in Fig 5 box. Save as type word Document as in Fig. 6
Fig. 5
Fig 6

TASK 4: Close document and exit from MS word
1 Click Close from the Office Button menu Alt+Space+C. 2 Click exit from the MS Word( as shown in Fig 7).
Fig 7

Create, open, save and rename word document

• create and open a document
• edit text by using the keyboard and mouse
• save and rename the file.
Requirements
• A working PC with
MS Office 2007 - 1 No./batch.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Create and open and existing document
Create a document 3 Click Open.
1 Open MS word A dialog box appears as in Fig 2

2 Click the Microsoft office button and then click New.
4 Type "sample1. docx" as in Fig. 2
3 Double click, blank document.
5 Click on the Open button
Create a document from template
Sample1.docx is opened for editing
1 Click the Microsoft office button and the click New.
2 Select a templatethat is available on your computer.
3 Double click the selected template file.
Open an existing document
1 Open Word.
2 Click the Microsoft Office button. A menu appears as in
Fig 1.
Fig 1
111
Fig 2
Recently created or modified word document Fig 3

shall be easily opened from recent documents
as in Fig. 3
TASK 2: Edit text by using the keyboard and mouse
Select Text 2 Cut the selected text

1 Place the insertion point I before text 'Ms Dhoni' to 4 Select "MS Dhoni "
select.
5 Choose the Home menu.
2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag mouse over
the text to select it. 6 Click the Cut button in the Clipboard group.
3 Release the mouse button. Word cuts the selected text Ms Dhoni and places it on the
The text is selected as shown in Fig 4. Clipboard as shown in Fig 5.

Copy and paste the selected text
Fig 4
10 Select "MS Dhoni "
11 Choose the Home menu.
12 Click the → Copy button in the

Clipboard group.
Word copies the selected text 'Ms Dhoni' and places
it on the Clipboard.
13 Place the cursor below the text 'Rohit Sharma' and click
the → Paste button in the Clipboard
group. Word pastes the copied text Ms Dhoni as shown

in Fig. 7
Fig 5 Fig.
Fig 78
3 Paste the text which has been cut

• Place the cursor before "Sachin Tendulkar"
• Choose the Home menu.
• Click the Paste button in the Clipboard group. Word Zoom the document
pastes the text MS Dhoni as shown in Fig. 6
14 Choose view menu as shown in Fig. 8
Fig 8
15 Click
16 window appears as shown in Fig 9

17 Choose zoom to 75% as in Fig. 9
18 Press 'OK'.
Zooms the document to 75% of the normal size as shown
in Fig. 10

Fig 9
Fig 8
Fig 10
TASK 3: Save and rename the file
Save a file Note: To save to a CD, or another location, click

By default, the Microsoft Office programs save a file in a
default working folder. If you want, you can specify a
the Microsoft Office Button , select Save
different location.
1 Click the Microsoft Office Button , and then click As, and then Other Formats. From the Folders
list, select a location or the media on which
Save. Or press CTRL+S.
you want to save.
2 If you are saving the file for the first time, you are asked
Top of Page
to give it a name.

2 In the File name box, enter a new name for the file.
Save a copy of a file (Save As command)
3 In the Save as type list, click the file format that you
You can also use the Save As command to rename a file want to save the file in. For example, click Rich Text
or change the location of where you save the file. Format (.rtf), Web Page (.htm or .html), or Comma
Delimited (.csv).
4 Click Save.
Save As. Or press ALT, F, A.
Save AutoRecover information automatically
2 In the File name box, enter a new name for the file.
3 Click Save. 1 Click the Microsoft Office Button , and then click
TIP To save the copy in a different folder, click a different Word Options.
drive in the Save in list or a different folder in the folder 2 Click Save.
list. To save the copy in a new folder, click Create New
3 Select the Save AutoRecover information every
Folder .
check box.
Top of Page 4 In the minutes box, type or select a number to deter-
mine how often you want to save files.
Save a file to another format (Save As command)

Save As. Or press ALT, F, A.

Format the document in MS word - 1

• format the text (Font or Character)
• change the space between character
• formatiing paragraph
• set ctabs and format the tab setting
• bullets and numbering
• add borders and shading.
Requirements
• A working PC with MS office 2007 - 1 No./batch.
PROCEDURE
TASK1: Format the text (Font or Character)
1 Create a new file and type the following text Himalayas into three sections: the main Himalayas, the
northwest Himalayas and the southeast Himalayas. The
India physical features main Himalayas running from the Pamir Plateau in the
Geographical Set Up: India takes its standard time from northwest to Arunachal Pradesh in the southeast are the
the meridian of 82 30 E, which is 5 ½ hours ahead of youngest mountains in the world. The highest peak of the
Greenwich Mean time ( 0 longitude).Pakistan time is 5 word, the Mount Everst (8,884m, named after Sir George
hours ahead of GMT and Bangladesh time is 6 hours ahead Everst). There are about 140 peaks in the Himalayas
of GMT. whose elevation is more than the Mount Blanc (4,810m),
the highest peak of the Alps. The three mountain ranges:
Significance of Location: Barring the plateau of the Himadri in the north(the greater Himalayas)the Himachal
Baluchistan (which form part of Pakistan), the two great in the middle(the lesser Himalayas) and the Siwalik (the
ranges of Sulaiman and Kirthar cut it off from the west. Outer Himalayas), facing thr palins of India. The Himadri
Along the north, the great mountain wall formed by the is of grat elevations (6,000m) which remains covered with
Hindukush, Karakoram and the Himalayas, which is diffi- everlasting snows. The Siwalik have some flat-floored
cult to cross, cuts it off from the rest of the continent. structural valleys knowns as duns. Dehradun is well-
Similarly, the southward of-shoots of the Eastern Himala- known. Between the Himadri and the Himachal are some
yas separate it from Russia. The tropical monsoon climate broad synclincal valleys. We also classify them as Punjab
of India, which ensures a fair supply of moisture and forms Himalayas, Kumayun, Assam Nepal and Northern.
the basis of farming in India, is also a result of its location
in the southern part of Asia. Since the opening of Suez Significance of Himalayas: (i) Physical Barriers (ii)
Canal (1867) India's distance from Europe has been Birthplace of Rivers (iii) Influence on climate (iv) Flora and
reduced by 7,000km. It thus bridges the space between the Fauna (v) Mineral Resources (vi) Economic Resources (vii)
highly industrialized nation of the west and the semi-arid, Tourist
and south-western Asia and the most fertile and populated The Great Northern Plains: Lies between the great
regions in the south-east and far-east countries. Himalayas in the North and the plateau of Peninsular India
The Trans Himalayas or Tibetan Himalayas: The in the south. Nearly 2400 km long around 250-320 km
largest glaciers are Hispar and Batura (over 57 km long) of broad, the most extensive plan indeed. It is said that this
Hunza Valley and Biafo and Baltaro (60 km long) of Shigar region was once a vast depression, filled with silt - brought
Valley. The Siachen of Nubra Valley is the longest with a down by the three Himalayas River, namely the Indus, the
length of over 72 km.The Purvachal or the Eastern Hills: In Ganga and the Brahmaputra and their numerous tributar-
the east after crossing the Cihang gorge the Himalayas ies. It contains some of the richest soils. The bhangar
bend towards south forming a series of hills running through refers to the upland formed by deposition of older alluvium
Arunachal Pradesh, Nagaland, Manipur, Mizoram, Tripura in the river beds and the Khadar are lowlands formed by
and eastern Assam and form the boundary between India deposition of detritus of new alluvium in the river beds.
and Burma. Brahmaputra rivers divide
116
Bhabar and Terai: Includes those regions where the The Deccan Plateau: The Deccan Plateau extends from
Himalayas and other hilly regions join the plains. Coarse the vindhyas to the southern tip of the Peninsula. This
sand and pebbles are deposited. Bhabar lands are nar- triangle plateau is at its widest in the north. The Vindhya
rower in the east and extensive in the western and north- Range and its eastern extension namely Mahadev hills
western hilly. Water converts large areas along the river Kaimuir Hills and Maikal Range from its northern edge.
into swamps known as Terai. Western Ghats are known by different regional names
such as the Sahyadris in Maharastra and Karnataka, the
The Western or Rajasthan Plains: are known as
niligris in Tamil Nadu and Annamalai and the Cardamon hill
Marusthali of Thar and the adjoining Bagar areas to the
along the Kerala and Tamil nadu border. The elevation of the
west of Aravalli. Luni whose water is sweet in the upper
ghats increases towards the south. The highest peak,
reaches and saltish by the time is reaches the sea. The
Anaimudi (2,695 m) is in Kerala. The most important gap
several salt lakes in the region such as the Sambhar,
in the Western Ghats is the Palghat gap which links Tamil
Degana, Kuchaman and Didwana; from which table salt is
Nadu with Kerala. The Bhorghat and the Thalghat are other
obtained. In most of the region shifting sand dunes occur.
gaps lying in Maharastra state.
The Punjab-Haryana Plain: These plains owe their
Eastern Ghats: These hills rise steeply from the
formation to the Sutlej, the Beas and the Ravi rivers. Many
Coromandel coastal plain. The Eastern Ghats are well
low lying flood plains (called bets) are found here. The Bari
developed in the region between the Godavari and Mahanadi
Doab between Ravi and Beas rivers, the Bist Doab between
rivers. The Eastern Ghats and Western Ghats converge in
the Beas and Sutlej and the Malwa plain are relatively more
the Nilgiri hills. Dodda Betta (2,637 m) is the highest peak
fertile plain.
in the Nilgiri hills.
The Ganga Plain: The Ganga-Yamuna Doab comprising
Significance of Peninsular Plateau: (i) Geological rich-
the Rohilkhand and the Avadh Plain is the tile area that is
ness (ii) Sources of Irrigation and hydroelectricity (iii)
drained by the tributaries of Ganga.
Agricultural Resources (iv) Forest Resources (v) Rich
The North Bengal Plains: the Plains extending from the Fauna (vi) Cultural Influences.
foot of Eastern Himalayas to the northern limb of Bengal
The coastal plains and islands
basin cover an area of 23,000km2.
The Coastal plains: The Peninsular plateau is bounded by
Brahmaputra Plains: This is a low level plain, rarely more
coastal plains on the east and west. There is wide
than 80km broad, surround by High Mountain on all sides
difference between the eastern and western coastal plain.
except on the west.
The west coast is narrower but wet. East coast much wider
Significance of the Great Plains: Riverine region, Fertile but relatively dry. A number of river deltas occur on the east
soil, favorable climate, flat surface, constructions of roads, coast. The deltas of east coast from the 'granary' of the five
extensive system of irrigation. southern states- Andhra Pradesh, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka,
The Peninsular Plateau: oldest structure of the Indian Kerala and Pondicherry. The western coastal strips which
subcontinent whose slow and steady movement towards have a large number of lagoons and back waters on other
north and north-east has been responsible for creation of hand are noted for spices, areca nuts, coconuts palms etc.
the Himalayas and the Northern Plains in place of the 2 Press Ctrl+S to save the file as "India.docx"
Tethys sea of geological time. It is marked of from the Indo-
Gangetic plain by the mountain and hill ranges such as the 3 Select the text India physical features using Format
Vindhyas, the satpura, and Mahadeo, Maikal, and Sarguja Tool Bar as shown in Fig.1
ranges with the average height is usually divided into two 4 Click the 'Home' menu as in Fig. 2
major subdivisions with the Narmada valley as the line of
demarcation. The region north of the Narmada valley is 5 Click on the Font list as in Fig. 2
known as the Central Highlands and in south of the
Narmada valley lies the Deccan Plateau.
6 Choose the font as Arial as in Fig. 2
The Central Highlands: Old Aravalli Mountain on the
7 Choose the font size as 12 in Fig. 3
west and the Vindhyas on the south. This region slopes
northward to the Ganga plains. The western part of the
Central highlands is known as the Malwa Plateau. The
8 Click on button or Ctrl+B to bold the selected text
Central part has a number of small plateaus like those of
Rewa, Baghelkhand and Bundlekhand. The eastern part of as in Fig. 4.
the Central Highlands comprises the Chotanagpur plateau.
9 Select first paragraph as shown in Fig 5.
10 Click button or Ctrl+I to italicize the selected text

as in Fig. 5.

Fig 1
Fig 2 Fig 3
Fig 5
Fig 4

Underline the text and set font effects 5 The selected text is set as superscript as in Fig 9.
1 Click on button or Ctrl+U to Underline the text as

in Fig 6.
Fig 6 6 Select 2 as in Fig 10.
Fig. 10
7 Click on button as in Fig 11.
Fig 11
2 Place the cursor at the end of the document and type

the following text
Thar Desert, registered a temperature of 50.6oC

and 15% of water (H20)
8 The selected text is set as subscript as in Fig. 12.
3 Select 'o' as in Fig 7.
Fig. 12
Fig 7
9 Select the text as in Fig 13.
Fig 13
4 Click on button as in Fig 8
Fig. 8
10.Click on button to draw the line through the middle
of the selected text as in Fig 14.
Fig 14
The line is drawn through the middle of the

selected text

Change font color and set highlight color
4 Click on button and choose green colour from
1 Select the text "India physical features"
the color palette as in Fig 17.
2 Click on button and choose red colour from the
Fig. 17
color palette as in Fig 15.
Fig. 15
The selected text is highlighted to grey color as

in Fig 18.
The selected colour text is changed to red as in Fig. 18

Fig 16.
Fig. 16

TASK 2 : Change the spacing between characters
Expanded or Condensed Fig 3
Selecting Expanded or Condensed alters the spacing
between all selected letters by the same amount. Kerning
alters the spacing between particular pairs of letters - in
some cases reducing and in other cases expanding the
space depending upon the letters.
1 Select the text to change.
2 On the Home tab, click the Font Dialog Box Launcher,
and then click the Advanced tab. (Fig 1) Note: If you’re using Word 2007 the tab is called
Character Spacing.
Fig 1
3 Select the Kerning for fonts check box, and then enter
the point size in the Points and above box. (Fig 4)
Fig 4
Note: If you’re using Word 2007 the tab is called

Character Spacing.
3 In the Spacing box, click Expanded or Condensed,

and then specify how much space you want in the By
box. (Fig 2)
Fig 2
Stretch or scale the text horizontally

When you scale the text, you change the shapes of the
characters by percentages. You can scale text by stretch-
ing it or by compressing it.
1 Select the text to stretch or compress.
and then click the Advanced tab. (Fig 5)
Fig 5
Kern the characters that are above a particular size
Kerning refers to the way spacing between two specific

characters is adjusted. The idea is to give a better looking
result by reducing the spacing between characters that fit
together nicely (such as “A” and “V”) and increasing the Note: If you’re using Word 2007 the tab is called
spacing between characters that don’t. Character Spacing.
1 Select the text change.
3 In the Scale box, enter the percentage that you want.
and then click the Advanced tab. (Fig 3) Percentages above 100 percent stretch the text. Percent-
ages below 100 percent compress the text.

Task 3 : Paragraph formatting
Horizontal alignment determines the appearance and ori-

entation of the edges of the paragraph: left-aligned text, Fig 1
right-aligned text, centered text, or justified text, which is
aligned evenly along the left and right margins.
Align the text left or right
1 Select the text to align.
2 On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align
Left or Align Right . Increase or decrease the left indent of an entire para-
graph
Center the text
1 Select the paragraph to change.
1 Select the text to center.
2 On the Page Layout tab, in the Paragraph group,
2 On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Cen- click the arrows next to Indent Left to increase or
ter . decrease the left indentation of the paragraph.
Justify the text Increase or decrease the right indent of an entire

paragraph
You can justify the text, which might make the last line of
text in a paragraph considerably shorter than the other 1 Select the paragraph to change.
lines. 2 On the Page Layout tab, in the Paragraph group,
1 Select the text to justify. click the arrows next to Indent Right to increase or
decrease the right indentation of the paragraph.
2 On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Jus-
Set an indent by using the TAB key
tify .
Indent paragraphs 1 Click the Microsoft Office Button , and then click
Indentation determines the distance of the paragraph from Word Options.
either the left or the right margin. Within the margins, you 2 Click Proofing.
can increase or decrease the indentation of a paragraph
or group of paragraphs 3 Under AutoCorrection settings, click AutoCorrect
Options, and then click the AutoFormat As You Type
tab.
4 Select the Set left- and first-indent with tabs and
backspaces check box.
5 To indent the first line of a paragraph, click in front of
the line.
1 Page margins To indent an entire paragraph, click in front of any line but
the first line.
2 Indentation
6 Press the TAB key.
Indent only the first line of a paragraph
NOTE: To remove the indent, press BACKSPACE
before you move the insertion point. You can
also click Undo on the Quick Access Toolbar.
Indent all but the first line of a paragraph

1 Click in front of the line to indent.
2 On the Page Layout tab, click the Paragraph Dialog
Box Launcher, and then click the Indents and Spac-
ing tab. (Fig 1)
1 Select the paragraph in which to indent all but the first

line of the paragraph, also referred to as a hanging
indent.

2 On the horizontal ruler, drag the Hanging Indent 2 Choose Home>Line and Paragraph Spacing.
marker to the position at which you want the indent to
(Fig 3)
start.
Fig 3
If you don’t see the horizontal ruler that runs along the top
of the document, click the View Ruler button at the top
of the vertical scroll bar.
Use precise measurements to set a hanging indent
For more precision in setting a hanging indent, you can
select options on the Indents and Spacing tab.
Box Launcher, and then click the Indents and Spac-
ing tab. (Fig 2)
Fig 2
2 In the Special list under Indentation, click Hanging, 3 Choose the number of line spaces or choose Line
and then in the By box, set the amount of space that Spacing Options at the bottom of the menu
you want for the hanging indent.
4 Select the options in the Paragraph dialog box under
Create a negative indent Spacing. (Fig 4)
Fig 4
1 Select the text or paragraph to extend into the left

margin.
2 On the Page Layout tab, in the Paragraph group,
click the down arrow in the Indent Left box.
Continue to click the down arrow until the selected text is
positioned where you want it in the left margin.
Change the line spacing, before and after spacing in
a portion of the document
1 Select the paragraphs.
Note: If you decide you want to change line

spacing for the entire document, and not just 5 change the spacing before or after the selected
specific paragraphs, press Ctrl+A. That paragraphs
combination of keys selects all text in your 6 Before or After box and enter the amount of space.
document.
7 Click Ok. The line spacing, Before and after paragraph
spacing changes will appear on the screen.

TASK 4 :Set Tabs and format the Tab setting
Set tabs in the Tabs dialog box 5 Click Set>OK.

The Tabs dialog box, get more precise tab positions and Clear tabs in the Tabs dialog box
also can insert a specific character (leader) before the
You can clear all tab stops you set, or just clear one
tab.
or more.
1 Click Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the
1 Click Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the
Paragraph dialog box launcher, and then click Tabs
Paragraph dialog box launcher, and then click Tabs.
(Fig 1)
2 Choose one of the following:
Fig 1
• To clear a single tab stop, in the Tab stop position
list, choose a tab stop position, click Clear, and
then click OK. (Fig 4)
• To clear all tab stops, click Clear All>OK. (Fig 4)
Fig 4
2 Tab stop position box, enter the position (measurement)

on the ruler to set the tab stop. (Fig 2)
Fig 2
Add tab stops

A quick way to set tab stops in your document is to click
the ruler where you want the tabs to appear. (Fig 5)
Fig 5
3 Under Alignment, choose Left, Center, Right, Decimal,

or Bar.
4 Under Leader, choose 1 None, 2 dots, 3 dashes, or 4
underline to set—in the case of options 2, 3, and 4—a
series of characters that links, for example, a section
title with a page number. (Fig 3)
Fig 3 1 Click View>Ruler to display it. (Fig 6)
Fig 6

2 Click the ruler where you want a tab stop. For example, Fig 11
click 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. (Fig 7)
Fig 7
Press the TAB key, your text will line up with the tabs
you’ve set. Fig 12
Note: To adjust the position of a tab, drag it

right or left along the ruler.
Add a hanging indent

With a hanging indent, the second and all the following
lines of a paragraph are indented more than the first.
(Fig 8) 2 Click the lower edge of the ruler where you want to set
the tab.
Fig 8
3 On the Format menu, select Tabs to open a window
with tab options.
4 Select the tab. (Fig 13)
Fig 13
1 Click View>Ruler to display it. (Fig 9)
Fig 9
2 Select the text to add a hanging indent.

3 On the ruler, drag the upper triangular part of the
lower marker to the place you want the indentation to
start, for example to the 1" mark. (Fig 10)
Fig 10
5 Under Alignment select Right.
6 Under Leader, select the dotted lines option, and then
click OK.
Note :Now you can add entries and when you

press TAB, a dotted line will appear across the
page, to the 6" mark. The formatting will be
added to each new line until you change the
leader. To change the formatting so no leader
Add dot leaders appears, follow steps 3-5 and under Leader,
choose none.
The space between tabs can show dots, dashes, or other
“leader” characters to line up information. (Fig 11)
1 Click View>Ruler to display it. (Fig 12)

TASK 5 : Define new bullets, numbers, and multilevel lists
Change the bullet to a symbol Define New Bullet.

1 Select the text or bulleted list to change. 3 Click Picture and then browse for your picture from a
file or Bing Image Search.
2 On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the
4 Click Insert.
arrow next to Bulleted List , and then click 5 Review what the picture bullets will look like and click
OK to add it or change the picture by repeating steps
Define New Bullet. 3-5.
3 Click Symbol and then click the symbol you want to Change the bullet font
use.
1 Select the text or bulleted list to change.
4 Click OK.
Change a bullet to a picture arrow next to Bulleted List, and then click Define
New Bullet.
1 Select the text or bulleted list to change.
3 Click Font and then change the font properties to be
used for the bullet. You can choose settings on the
Font tab or Advanced tab:
arrow next to Bulleted List , and then click
Tab Description
Font tab Change the bullet font, style, size, color, underline style, underline
color and effects.
Advanced tab Change the bullet font character spacing and OpenType features.
Change the bullet alignment Define a new number format

1 Select the text or bulleted list to change 1 Select the text or numbered list to change.
2 On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the 2 On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the
arrow next to Bulleted List , and then click arrow next to Numbered List , and then click
Define New Bullet. Define New Number Format.
3 Under alignment, choose Left, Centered, or Right. 3 To change the style, click the down arrow next to Num-
ber style and choose numbers, letters, or another chro-
4 Click OK. nological format.
4 To change the font size, style, and color, click Font
and choose a setting on the Font tab or Advanced
tab:.
Tab Description
color, and effects.
5 To append the numbering with a dash, parentheses, or 6 To change the number alignment, choose Left, Cen-
another value, enter it in the Number format field. tered, or Right under Alignment.
7 Click OK.

Define a new multilevel list 6 To use an existing style in Word for each level in the
list, choose a style under Link level to style.
1 Select the text or numbered list to change.
7 Choose the number to show in the gallery. Level 1 is
shown by default.
8 Give the multilevel list a name in the ListNum field list
arrow next to Multilevel List , and then click name. This name will appear wherever you see the
Listnum field.
Define New Multilevel List.
9 To append the numbered list with a dash, parenthe-
3 Expand the Multilevel list dialog box by clicking More ses, or another value, enter it in the Number format
in the lower left corner. field.
4 Choose the list level to modify by selecting it in the 10 To change the font size, style, and color, click Font
list. 1 is selected by default. and choose a setting on the Font tab or Advanced
5 Choose where you would like to apply your changes tab:.
by clicking Whole list, This point forward, or Cur-
rent paragraph.
Tab Description
color, and effects.
11 To change the style, click the down arrow next to Num- 14 To change the number alignment, choose Left, Cen-
ber style and choose numbers, letters, or another chro- tered, or Right under Alignment
nological format. Specify a level number to include this
15 Specify a value for where to start the alignment and a
from.
value for the text indent.
12 Choose the number to start the list at. The default value
16 To apply these values to the entire list, choose Set for
is 1. To restart numbering after a specific level, select
All Levels.
the Restart List After check box and choose a level in
the list. 17 Enter a value for what should follow each number, Tab
character, Space, or Nothing. Check Add tab stop
13 Select Legal Style Numbering to enforce a legal style
at and enter a value.
on the multilevel list.
18 Click OK.
TASK 6 : Add boarders and shading
1 Click Page Layout page border as in Fig 1. 3 By moving the scroll bar of Style select double line as
in Fig 2.
2 Select Box in setting

Fig 1
Fig 2 Fig 3
Fig 4
4 Click 'OK'
The document appear with the page border as

shown in Fig 3.
5 Select Page Layout → as Fig. 4
6 Click button a color palette appear as in Fig5.
7 Select color as 'blue' as in Fig 5.

Fig 5 The document appear with the page color as shown in
Fig 6.
Fig 6

Format the document in MS word - 2

• create and modify an existing style
• use find and replace the text.
Requirements
• A working PC with MS Office 2007 - 1 No./batch.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Create and modify an existing style

Create Style
1 Select Home tab and click right bottom corner of the

Styles group. See the fig 1 and follow (Fig 1)
Fig 1
2 Click New Style Button in the left bottom corner of 3 Follow the Fig-3 and type new name in the name tab of
the Styles dialog box. Follow the fig 2 “New Heading”, Change font to “Arial Black”, Size to
’14 pt’ and Select ‘Underline’ style in the formatting
Fig 2 option of the Create new style from formatting dialog
box (Fig 3)
Fig 3
130
4 Click left side bottom corner of the Format button Fig 6
5 Select ‘Paragraph’. Now the following Paragraph dialog

box will appear on the screen. (Fig 4)
Fig 4
10 “New Paragraph Heading” new style will now appear in

the Style Gallery, Style panel and also will changed in
6 See the Fig-4 and follow to change the same option of the document. Follow the fig-7
Alignment – Left, in the spacing option – Before 12pt
Fig 7
and After 6 pt, Line spacing – At least.
7 Click ‘OK’ Button. And also Click ‘OK’ Button in the
“Create new style from formatting dialog box”
8 “New Heading” new style will now appear in the Style
Gallery, Style panel and also will changed in the
document. Follow the fig 5.
Fig 5
11 Do the same steps of 2 to 8 to create “Body Text”

style. See the fig-8 and change the options and value.
(Fig 8)
12 “Body Text” new style will now appear in the Style
13 Do the same steps of 2 to 4 to create “New Numbering”
style.
9 Create, New paragraph heading style for to do same
14 Select Numbering option. Now the Numbering and
method of steps 2 to 8 will get another New style see
Bullets dialog box will appear on the screen.
the fig-6 and change the same options and values.
(Fig 6)
Fig 8 Fig 10
Fig 9 Fig 11
15 Click “Define New Number Format”button in the left Modify a style manually in the Modify Style dialog
side bottom corner of the Numbering and Bullets dialog box
box You can modify a style directly in the Styles gallery, with-
16 Dialog box will appear and change the options and value out using the text in your document.
appear in the fig 10. 1 Click Home tab, right-click any style in the Styles gal-
17 Click ‘OK Buttons in the tree dialog boxes of Define lery and click Modify (Fig 12)
New Number Format, Numbering and Bullets and Create 2 In the Formatting section, make any formatting
New Style from Formatting. changes you want, such as font style, size, or color,
18 “New Numbering” new style will now appear in the Style alignment, line spacing, or indentation. (Fig 13)

Fig 12 Fig 13
3 Choose whether the style change applies to the cur-

rent document or to all future documents. (Fig 14)
Fig 14
TASK 2: Find and replace the text
1 Select the → Replace It replaces all Sachin into Little Master Sachin
as shown in Fig 2
2 Type Sachin in Find what and type Little Master
Sachin in Replace with as in Fig 1. 4 Click 'OK'.
FigFig
15 1 Fig 16
Fig 2
3 Click Replace All.

IT & ITES Exercise : 1.6.32A
Insert and format the table

• insert table in different methods
• format the table
• convert text to a table and convert table to text.
Requirements
• A working PC with window, OS and MS Office 2007 - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Insert table in different methods
Insert a Table Fig 2

Method 1
1 Click Insert tab > Table
2 Move the cursor over the grid until you highlight the
number of columns and rows
3 Click the cursor over the grid after selected the num-
ber of columns and rows. The table will appear the
screen Fig 1.
Fig 1
Fig 3
Method 2 Method 3
5 Click Insert tab > Table > Insert Table 1 Click Insert tab > Table > Draw Table. The cursor will
show in the screen like pencil view
6 See the fig-2 and type the value to Number Columns 6
and Number of Rows 6 in the Insert Table dialog box. 2 Drag to draw the cursor left to right side of the page for
(Fig 2) example rectangle shape
Click OK. The screen will show in the following fig 3. 3 Draw vertical lines for creating columns and horizontal
lines for rows.
134
Type the text into the table and format the table
1 Insert the Table, Number Columns in 6 and Number Fig 4

Rows in 6
2 Place the courser in the top left side corner of the table
3 Type the text “Sl. No.”
4 Press Tab key on the Keyboard for to type in next
column. After the fill the text in this cell again press to
Tab key to fill the text in another cell and so on.
5 See the fig-4 and type the text
TASK 2: TypeFormat the table
Use table styles to format an entire table

Fig 6
1 Click or select the table
2 Click the Design Tab under the Table Tool
3 Choose the Table style in the Table Style group. See
the fig-5 and follow.
Fig 5
Remove the Table Borders

1 Select the table
Add or Remove Borders 2 Click Design Tab and select the Borders button
Add Borders 3 Choose “No Border”
1 Click the Layout Tab, under the Table Tools Add or Remove shading in a table
2 Click Select button and then select the Table Add shading to a table
3 Click the Design Tab under the Table Tools 1 Click in the table, and then click the Table Move Handle
in the upper-left corner for to select the table
4 Click Line Weight button in the border group and se-
lect 1½ pt. 2 Click Shading button in the Table Tools Design Tab
5 Click Borders button in the border group and Select 3 Under Theme colors, Select the shading color you want
“Outside Borders”. See the fig-6 apply. See the fig-7 and follow.

Fig 7 2 Click Layout tab under the Table Tools
3 Click, “Table Properties” Button. The “Table Properties”
dialog box will appear on the screen
4 Click Rows tab, enable the Specific height
5 Type the value 0.36 inch. See the fig-9 and follow
Fig 9
Remove shading from a table

1 Click in the table, and then click the Table Move Handle
in the upper-left corner for to select the table
2 Click Shading button in the Table Tools Design Tab
3 Click “No Color”
Set Table properties
Table
1 Select the Table
6 Click ‘OK’ button. The changed rows height will ap
2 Click Layout tab under the Table Tools
pear on the screen. See the fig-10
dialog box will appear on the screen Fig 10
4 Click Table Tab, disable the “Preferred Width” in the

size option, select center Alignment and to choose
Text Wrapping is none.
5 Click ‘OK’ Button. The Table will align in center of the
pages. (Fig 8)
Fig 8
Columns
1 Select the Column, Place the cursor in the Top of the
table click the cursor for selecting single column or
drag left to right of the particular columns of the table
for selecting multiple columns
2 Click Layout tab under the Table Tools
dialog box will appear on the screen
4 Click Columns tab, enable Preferred width type value
0.5 inch in first column
5 Click Next column button change the values of pre-
Row
ferred width 1.5 inches
1 Select the Rows, Place the cursor left margin side of
6 Click Next column button change the values for next 3
the table click and drag to down of the particular rows
columns of preferred width 1 inches and the last col-
of the table
umn change to 1.3 inches

7 Click ‘Ok’ button, now the tablewill appear as shown 3 Do one of the following:
in Fig 11.
• To add a column just to the left of the cell clicked in, in
the Rows and Columns group, click Insert Left.
Fig 11
• To add a column just to the right of the cell clicked in,
in the Rows and Columns group, click Insert Right
Delete a cell, row, or column

1 Do one of the following:
A cell Click the left edge of the cell.
.
A row Click to the left of the row.
Add a cell, row, or column A column Click the column’s top gridline or top
Add a cell
border.
1 Click in a cell that is located just to the right of or
above to insert a cell.
2 Under Table Tools, on the Layout tab, click the Rows 2 Under Table Tools, click the Layout tab.
& Columns Dialog Box Launcher. 3 In the Rows & Columns group, click Delete, and then
3 Click one of the following click Delete Cells, Delete Rows, or Delete Columns,
as appropriate.
Shift cells right
Merge or split cells
Insert a cell and move all other cells in that row to the
right. Merge cells
NOTE: This option may result in a row that has 1 Select the cells that you want to merge by clicking the
more cells than the other rows. left edge of a cell and then dragging across the other
cells that you want.
Shift cells down 2 Under Table Tools, on the Layout tab, in the Merge
Insert a cell and move remaining existing cells in that group, click Merge Cells.
column down one row each. A new row will be added at Split cells
the bottom of the table to contain the last existing cell.
1 Click in a cell, or select multiple cells that you want to
Insert entire row split.
Insert a row just above the cell that you clicked in. 2 Under Table Tools, on the Layout tab, in the Merge
Insert entire column group, click Split Cells.
Insert a column just to the right of the cell that you 3 Enter the number of columns or rows that you want to
clicked in. split the selected cells into.
Add a row Align Text in a Table
1 Click in a cell that is located just below or above to add 1 Select the Heading Row
a row. 2 Click Layout Tab under the Table Tools and Select
2 Under Table Tools, click the Layout tab. “Align Center” in the Alignment group. See the fig and
follow. (Fig 12)
3 Do one of the following:
Fig 12
• To add a row just above the cell clicked in, in the Rows
and Columns group, click Insert Above.
• To add a row just below the cell clicked in, in the Rows
and Columns group, click Insert Below.
Add a column
1 Click in a cell that is located just to the right or left of
where you want to add a column.
2 Under Table Tools, click the Layout tab.

3 The table will appear as shown in following Fig 13. Fig 15
Fig 13
4 Practice to do the remaining text alignment of Align Fig 16

Top Left, Align Top Center, Align Top Right, Align Center
Left, Align Center Right, Align Bottom Left, Align Bottom
Cener, and Align Bottom Right.
Change the Text Direction in a Table
1 Select the particular Cell

2 Select Layout Tab under the Table Tools and Double Fig 17
Click “Text Direction” in the Alignment group. See the
fig and follow. (Fig 14)
Fig 14
6 Click OK. The Descending sorted table will appear as

shown in following fig 18.
Fig 18
Sort a list Alphabetically
1 Create a table and formatting the table same as shown

in following fig 15.
2 Select the text in a column of “Name of the Trainees”
list.
3 Select Layout tab under the Table Tools, click Sort
Button. (Fig 16)
4 In the Sort Text box, set Sort by to Paragraphs and
Text.
5 Click Descending (Z to A). See the fig and follow.
(Fig 17)

Apply formula to the Table 4 Click ‘OK’ button
1 Select the particular cell in a Table. See the fig and 5 The row’s value will added in the selected cell. See
follow (Fig 19)
the fig 21.
Fig 19
Fig 21
2 Choose Layout Tab under the Table Tools and click

Formula Button. The Formula dialog box will appear 6 Practice to use formula in the remaining rows.
on the screen.
3 Type “=SUM(LEFT)” into the Formula tab. See the fig
and follow (Fig 20)
Fig 20
TASK 3 :Convert text to a table or a table to text

To convert text to a table or a table to text, start by Convert text to a table
clicking the Show/Hide paragraph mark on the Home
1 Insert separator characters—such as commas or
tab so you can see how text is separated in your
tabs—to indicate where to divide the text into table
document. (Fig 1)
columns.
Fig 1
Note: If you have commas in your text, use
tabs for your separator characters.
2 Use paragraph marks to indicate where you want to

begin a new table row.In this example, the tabs and
paragraph marks will produce a table with 3 columns
and 2 rows: (Fig 2)

Fig 2 5 Under Table size, make sure the numbers match the
numbers of columns and rows.
6 Under AutoFit behavior, choose how you want your table
to look. Word automatically chooses a width for the
table columns. If you want a different column width,
choose one of these options:
To do this Choose this option

3 Select the text that you want to convert, and then click
Insert > Table > Convert Text to Table. (Fig 3) Specify a width for all the In the Fixed column
column width box, type or
Fig 3 select value
Resize the columns to fit
the width of the text in AutoFit to contents
each column
Resize the table automatically
in case the width of the
available space changes (for AutoFit to window
example, web layout or
landscape orientation)
7 Under Separate text at, choose the separator character

you used in the text.
8 Click OK. The text converted to a table should look
something like this: (Fig 5)
Fig 5
Convert a table to text

1 Select the rows or table to convert to text.
2 Under Table Tools, on the Layout tab, click Convert to
Text. (Fig 6)
Fig 6
In the Convert Text to Table box, choose the options.

(Fig 4)
Fig 4
3 In the Convert to Text box, under Separate text with,

click the separator character you want to use in place
of the column boundaries. Rows will be separated by
paragraph marks.
4 Click OK.

Insert and format the table and objects

• insert file, clipart, picture and use picture in different options
• insert a check mark and others symbol
• insert header and footer
• insert word art style and shape
• insert drop cap and formate the remove drop cap.
Requirements
• A working PC with window, OS and MS Office 2007 - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Insert file, clipart, picture and use picture in different options
Insert a file
1 Open a new document. Fig 2 Fig 10
2 Choose insert tab, in the text group. Click the arrow
next to object and then click Text from tab.
3 The insert File display box will appear on the screen.
4 Choose and select the file from the specific location.
5 Click OK button, the entire file inserted in to a new
document.
Fig 1
2 Type as "Education" in the search for option which

displays cliparts as in Fig 4.
Insert a clipart into word 3 Select the clipart that need to be inserted into the
document which makes the clipart to be on the document.
1 Select Insert -> ClipArt option from Ribbon as in Fig 2
(Fig 5)
Fig 921
Fig 4 Save the document.
A clipart dialog box appears as in Fig 3
141
Fig 4 3. Select a picture from the pictures library -> Sample
Fig 11
Pictures to insert into the document as in Fig 7
(Desert.jpg)
Fig
Fig714
4 Choose Picture Tools -> Corrections option (Fig 8)
Fig 8
Fig 15
Fig 5 Fig 12
Insert a picture into word document.

Adjust picture brightness and contrast as to
1 Insert pagebreak to get a new page. avalable options and apply
2 Select Insert -> Picture option from illustations tab and
choose a picture to insert Fig 6. 5 Select Color Option to adjust color settings as in Fig 9
FigFig
136 Adjust picture color options and contrast as to
avalable options and apply
6 Select Artistic Effects option and make the image in a

different style as in Fig 10.

Fig
Apply a picture into the document as in Fig 12
Fig9 16
1 Insert a picture into the document as in Fig 12.
Fig 12Fig 19
Fig 10
Fig 17
2 Choose metal frame option to get an outside frame as

in Fig 13.
Fig 13
Fig 20
3 Click on Picture Border and apply a border with different

color as in Fig 14.
Fig2114
Fig
7 Save the file for reference. (Fig 11)
FigFig
11 18
4 View the output as in Fig 15..

5 Apply a 3D effect using Picturer Effects→Picturer
Effect 9 as in Fig 16.

Fig 15
Try with different effect and border styles.
Fig 22
Positioning and Wrapping of Image / Clipart
1 Select the picture to position and wrapping.
2 Choose position option to place the object on the proper
place as from Fig 18.
Fig 18 Fig 25
Fig
Fig16
23
It places the object as we select from the menu

option
3 Select Wrapping method using Wrap Text option as in

Fig 19.
Fig26
Fig 19
6 Check the output of the image as in Fig 17.
Fig 17 Fig 24

Inserting Picture Layout Smartart Fig 30
22
Fig
1 Select the picture for this option to apply
2 Choose Picture Layout to select a layout as in Fig 19.
Fig 19
27
Fig
Fig23
31
32
3 Select Hexagon cluster to set the image as smartart

and add text as required as in Fig 20.
Fig28
Fig 20
The background is selected by default as to

figure. To adjust, just crop its level to get other
areas. Even it can be drawn on the pictures to
select items to remove area.
4 Apply keep changes to remove the background from

image as in Fig 24.
Fig 24
Fig 33
4 Add pictures to other shapes available and as required
5 Try with other smart options to get different items.
(Fig 21)
Fig 29
Fig 21
Which will give result as in Fig 25.
Fig
Fig25
34
Wrapping makes the text placement around

the image, leaves space square, tight, text
through the image, even place text behind the
image or in front of image.
Remove background of a Picture

1 Select and insert a picture (eg. tulips.jpg)
2 Select Picture -> Format tool and Remove Background
as in Fig 22.
3 Choose the background level as displayed in the Fig 23.

Note : Reset all changes makes the original Fig Fig
29 38
image to apply again.
Insert Shapes on the images

1 Insert an image to the document
2 Select Shapes from Insert menu (Fig 26)
Fig 26
Fig 35
FigFig
3039
3 Draw an oval on the image as in Fig 27.
Fig27
Fig 34
Fig 36
Grouping & ungrouping of Objects

1 Open a new document for working.
2 Insert a ClipArt using Insert Clipart as in Fig 31
4 Select the drawing and apply outline and fill properties Fig 31 Fig 40
(Fig 28)
Fig
Fig28
Fig 35
37
Note: Outline will be as in Fig 29
5 Apply a shape style as in Fig 30

Save the file and exit.

3 Select the clipart and find the bounding box has few Fig40
Fig 33
objects combined as in Fig 32. Fig 41
Fig 32
Fig 42
4 Ungroup the object using Picture - Format tab -> Group

option as in Fig 33.
The clipart now gets ungrouped and separated as different
objects. Use the same group option for making the objects
a single clipart.
5. Check with instructor for more options.
TASK 2 : insert a check mark and others symbol

1 Place your cursor in the file at the spot where you want 4 Scroll up or down to find the symbol you want to insert.
to insert the symbol.
Different font sets often have different symbols in them
2 On the Insert tab, click Symbol.(Fig 1) and the most commonly used symbols are in the Segoe
UI Symbol font set. Use the Font selector above the
Fig 1 symbol list to pick the font you want to browse through.
5 Find the symbol and double-click it. The symbol will
be inserted in your file. You can click Close now unless
you want to insert additional symbols.
Tip: If you want to make your symbol larger or

smaller, select it and use the Font Size setting.
If you’re going to insert the same symbol often, consider

3 See the symbol you want listed on that gallery, just setting up AutoCorrect to insert it for you. You can find
click it to insert. Otherwise, click More Symbols to more info about that here: Insert a check mark or other
open the Symbol dialog box. (Fig 2) symbol using AutoCorrect.
A special character like em dashes or section
Fig 2
marks (§)
1 Click where you want to insert the special character.
2 Click Insert>Symbol>More Symbols.
3 In the Symbol dialog box, click the Special
Characters tab. (Fig 3)
4 Double-click the character that you want to insert.
Tip: Many of the special characters have short-

cut keys associated with them. If you want to
insert that special character again in the fu-
ture, just press the shortcut key.
ALT+CTRL+C inserts the Copyright symbol (©), for

example.
5 Click Close when you’re finished inserting special
characters.
Fig 3 3 In the Subset dropdown, choose Number Forms.
(Fig 4)
Fig 4
Fractions (1/3, 2/5)

Some fractions (1/4, 1/2, and 3/4) automatically switch to
a fraction character (¼, ½, ¾) when you type them. But Note: Not all fonts have a number forms subset.
others do not (1/3, 2/3, 1/5, etc.) so if you want to insert If you don’t see the number forms subset
those as symbols you’ll need to use the insert symbol available for your font you will have to use a
process. different font, such as Calibri, to insert the
1 Click where you want to insert the fraction. fraction character.
2 Click Insert>Symbol>More Symbols. 4 Double-click the fraction that you want to insert.
5 Click Close.
TASK 3 : Insert header and footer

Headers and footers are areas in the top, bottom, and Insert a custom header or footer
side margins of each page in a document. (Fig 1)
1 On the Insert tab, in the Header & Footer group, click
Header or Footer. (Fig 3)
Fig 1
2 Click Edit Header or Edit Footer.
Fig 3
Insert a predefined header or footer

3 Type text or insert graphics and other content by using
1 On the Insert tab, in the Header & Footer group, click
the options in the Insert group on the Design tab, un-
Header or Footer. (Fig 2)
der the Header & Footer Tools tab.
Fig 2 Fig 4
2 Click the header or footer design that you want. .

TIP To save the header or footer that you cre- Fig 1
ated to the gallery of header or footer options,
select the text or graphics in the header or
footer, and then click Save Selection as New
Header or Save Selection as New Footer.
Make the first page header or footer different from

the rest of the pages
1 On the first page of the document, double click the
header or footer area.
2 Under Header & Footer Tools, on the Design tab, in NOTE If you don’t see a gallery of header or
the Options group, select the Different First Page footer designs, there might be a problem with
check box. the Building Blocks template on your computer.
See I don’t see galleries of page numbers,
NOTE : If your document includes a cover page headers and footers, cover pages, or equations
from the gallery of cover pages in Office Word for information about how to fix this problem.
2007, the Different First Page option is already
turned on. Inserting or editing a header or footer 4 Under Header & Footer Tools, on the Design tab, in
on this page does not affect the other pages in the Options group, select the Different Odd & Even
the document. Pages check box.
5 Under Header & Footer Tools, on the Design tab, in
3 Create a header or footer, or make changes to the ex-
isting header or footer, on the first page. the Navigation group, click Next Section to ad-
vance the cursor to the header or footer for even-num-
Use no header or footer on the first page bered pages.
1 On the first page of the document, double click the 6 Under Header & Footer Tools, on the Design tab, in
header or footer area. the Header & Footer group, click Header or Footer.
2 Under Header & Footer Tools, on the Design tab, in 7 In the gallery of headers or footers, click a
the Options group, select the Different First Page designlabeled (Even Page), such as Austere (Even
check box.
Page).
NOTE If the Different First Page check box is
NOTES
already checked, do not clear it. Go on to the
next step. • If necessary, you can format text in the header or footer
by selecting the text and using the formatting options
3 In the First Page Header or First Page Footer area, on the Office Fluent Mini toolbar.
delete the contents of the header or footer.
• If you want to switch to a different predefined header or
Make the header or footer different for odd and even footer, repeat these steps, and choose a different
pages header or footer from the gallery.
For example, you can use the title of the document on Create odd and even headers or footers in a docu-
odd-numbered pages, and the chapter title on even-num- ment that already has headers or footers
bered pages. Or, for a booklet, you can place page num-
1 Double-click in the header or footer area.
bers on odd-numbered pages to be on the right side of the
page and page numbers on even-numbered pages to be 2 Under Header & Footer Tools, on the Design tab, in
on the left side of the page. This way, the page numbers the Options group, select the Different Odd & Even
are always on the outside edge when the pages are printed Pages check box.
on both sides of the paper. The existing header or footer is now configured for odd-
Create odd and even headers or footers in a docu- numbered pages only.
ment that does not yet use headers or footers 3 Under Header & Footer Tools, on the Design tab, in
1 Click an odd-numbered page, such as the first page of the Navigation group, click Next Section to ad-
your document. vance the cursor to the header or footer for even-num-
2 On the Insert tab, in the Header & Footer group, click bered pages, and then create the header or footer for
Header or Footer. (Fig 1) even-numbered pages.
3 In the gallery of headers or footers, click a design
labeled(Odd Page), such as Austere (Odd Page).

Make the header or footer different in each section Use a document’s section breaks to vary the header
or chapter or footer
If your document is divided into sections, you can vary the If your document is already divided into sections, you can
headers and footers so that they display different content use the section breaks to configure headers and footers.
for each section. For example, if your document is divided
1 Starting at the beginning of the document, click in the
into chapters by using section breaks, the chapter title
first section for which you want to vary the header or
can be displayed in the header of each chapter.
footer.
TIP If you are unsure whether your document 2 On the Insert tab, in the Header & Footer group, click
has sections, you can search for them. (Fig 2) Header or Footer. (Fig 3)
Fig 3
Fig 2
3 Click Edit Header or Edit Footer.

4 On the Headers & Footers tab, in the Navigation
group, click Link to Previous to break the connec-
tion between the header or footer in this section and
the previous section.
5 Change the existing header or footer, or create a new
header or footer for this section.
6 In the Navigation group of the Design tab (Header &
Footer contextual tab), click Next Section to ad-
1 Click Drafts on the status bar. vance the cursor to the header or footer of the next
section.
2 On the Home tab, in the Find group, click Go To.
7 On the Headers & Footers tab, in the Navigation
3 Click Section. group, click Link to Previousto break the connection
4 Click Next to find section breaks in the document. between the header or footer in this section and the
previous section.
5 Draft view makes it easy to see the section breaks in
the document. 8 Change the existing header or footer, or create a new
header or footer for this section.
Add section breaks to a document
9 Repeat the previous three steps for all of the sections
If your document is not divided into sections, you can in the document.
insert section breaks where you want the header or footer
to vary. Use the same header or footer across section bound-
aries
1 Starting at the beginning of the document, place the
cursor at the beginning of the page where you want to In a document where the header or footer varies by sec-
start varying the header or footer. tion, you can make the header or footer the same across
section boundaries.
2 On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group,
click Breaks, and then under Section Breaks, click 1 Double-click the header or footer that you want to pre-
Next Page. serve across section boundaries.
3 Place the cursor at the beginning of the next page where 2 On the Headers & Footers tab, in the Navigation
you want to vary the header or footer, such as the first group, click Next Section .
page of a new chapter.
3 Click Link to Previous .
click Breaks, and then under Section Breaks, click 4 Office Word 2007 will ask if you want to delete the
Next Page. header and footer and connect to the header and footer
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for every section break that you in the previous section. Click Yes.
want in the document.

Change the contents of a header or footer • Many header and footer designs are laid out in a table,
and pressing TAB moves the cursor without inserting a
1 On the Insert tab, in the Header & Footer group, click tab stop. To insert a tab stop within a table cell, press
Header or Footer. (Fig 4) CTRL+TAB. To determine whether the header or footer
that you are working with is laid out in a table, look for
Fig 4 the Table Tools contextual tab at the top of the Rib-
bon while the cursor is in the header or footer.
• Many header and footer designs contain content con-
trols for storing content such as the document title
and the date. When you click to edit the header or
footer, the cursor might automatically select the con-
tent control. To move the cursor away from the content
control (so that you can insert the page number in the
header or footer without deleting the content of the
2 Click Edit Header or Edit Footer. content control), press the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT
ARROW key.
3 Make your changes to the header or footer by select-
ing the text and revising it or by using the options on 3 On the Insert tab, in the Header & Footer group, click
the Fluent Mini toolbar to format the text. For example, Page Number (Fig 5)
you can change the font, apply bold format, or apply
different font color. Fig 5
TIP InPrint Layout view (Print Layout view: A

view of a document or other object as it will
appear when you print it. For example, items
such as headers, footnotes, columns, and text
boxes appear in their actual positions.), you
can quickly switch between the header or
footer and the document text. Just double-click 4 Click Current Position.
the dimmed header or footer, or the dimmed
document text. 5 Choose a page number design from the gallery of de-
signs.
Insert a page number Add header or footer content to a preformatted page

number design
If your document already has content in the header or 1 On the Insert tab, in the Header & Footer group, click
footer, you can add the page number to the header or Page Number. (Fig 6)
footer.
If you want to use one of the preformatted page number Fig 6
designs, but you want more information in the header or
footer than just the page number, it is easiest to start with
a page number and then add other text or graphics to the
header or footer.
NOTE: Many of the footer designs in the gal-

lery of footers already include the page num-
ber as part of the content.
For more information about inserting page numbers, see 2 Click Top of Page, Bottom of Page, or Page Mar-
Insert page numbers. gins, depending on where you want page numbers to
appear in your document.
Add a page number to an existing header or footer
1 Double-click the header or footer area. 3 Choose a page number design from the gallery of de-
signs.
2 Position the cursor where you want to insert the page
number. 4 Do one of the following:
NOTES • To insert header or footer content before the page num-

ber, press the HOME key, enter the content, and then
• You may need to press the TAB key, adjust paragraph press TAB to position the content.
alignment, or make other changes to the header or
footer content to position the cursor where you want it. •
To insert header or footer content after the page num-
ber, press the END key, press TAB, and then enter the
content.
• If you chose a design from the Page Margins designs, Insert the document title, author’s name, or other
click in the header or footer, and add the content that document property
you want.
1 Place the cursor where you want to insert the docu-
NOTES ment property in the header or footer.
• You may need to press TAB, adjust paragraph align- 2 Under Header & Footer Tools, on the Design tab, in
ment, or make other changes to the header or footer the Insert group, click Quick Parts.
content to position the cursor where you want it.
3 Point to Document Property, and then click the docu-
• Many header and footer designs are laid out in a table, ment property that you want.
and pressing TAB moves the cursor without inserting a
Insert the current date
tab stop. To insert a tab stop within a table cell, press
CTRL+TAB. To determine whether the header or footer 1 Place the cursor where you want to insert the date in
that you are working with is laid out in a table, look for the header or footer.
the Table Tools contextual tab at the top of the Rib- 2 Under Header & Footer Tools, on the Design tab, in
bon while the cursor is in the header or footer. the Insert group, click Date & Time.
• Many header and footer designs contain content con- 3 In the Available formats list, click the format in which
trols for storing content, such as the document title you want the date (and time, if you want) to appear.
and the date. When you click to edit the header or
footer, the cursor might automatically select the con- Remove the header or footer
tent control. To move the cursor away from the content 1 Click anywhere in the document.
control (so that you can insert the page number in the
header or footer without deleting the content of the 2 On the Insert tab, in the Header & Footer group, click
content control), press the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT Header or Footer. (Fig 7)
ARROW key.
Fig 7
Insert the file name of the document
1 Place the cursor where you want to insert the file name
in the header or footer.
2 Under Header & Footer Tools, on the Design tab, in
the Insert group, click Quick Parts, and then click
Field.
3 In the Field names list, click FileName. If you want 3 Click Remove Header or Remove Footer.
to include the path as part of the file name, select the
Add path to filename check box. The headers or footers are removed from the entire docu-
ment.
Security: Because field codes can be visible
to anyone reading your document, be sure that IImportant: If you created different first-page
the information you place in field codes is not or odd-and-even headers or footers, or if there
information that you want kept private. are sections that aren’t linked, be sure to re-
move the headers or footers from each differ-
ent page or section.
TASK 4: Insert WordArt style and shape
1 Press control + home key to move to the beginning of Fig 1

the document.
2 Invoke WordArt using Insert menu -> WordArt option in
ribbon. The WordArt shows available styles as in Fig,1
3 Choose a style to apply on the box, "Your Text Here"
block to type the input as in Fig.2

Fi g 5
Fig 2 g
4 Click on shape outline in shape styles option to get

outline on the text as in Fig.3
Fig 3
Fig 6
5 Fill color using Shape fill option as in Fig .4
Fig 4
g
Fig 7
6 Create outline using shape outline option as in Fi g.5
The output after line and fill objects will be as

in (Fig 6)
7 Apply a shape effect from the presets available, choose

Preset -> Preset -> Preset 10 as to Fig.7

The output will be as in Fig.8 Note : WordArt can be placed at any place and
set for text wrapping as like pictures.
Fig 8
8. Save the work for future reference.
TASK 5: Insert and remove Dropcap
1 Select the first character of a paragraph. • To create a drop cap that is in the margin, outside of
your paragraph, select In margin. (Fig 3)
2 On the INSERT tab, in the Text group, select Drop
Cap. (Fig 1)
Fig 3
Fig 1
3 Select the drop cap option you want.

• To create a drop cap that fits within your paragraph,
select Dropped. (Fig 2)
Fig 2
Note: You can change the size and font of the

drop cap, as well as its distance from the text.
To do so, click Drop Cap>Drop Cap Options,
and under Options, make your selections.
Remove a drop cap

1 Highlight the large drop cap letter.
2 On the INSERT tab, in the Text group, click Drop
Cap>None.
Fig 4

Page layout setting and printing the document

• setting up a page in the document
• print the document.
Requirements
• A working PC with windows OS and MS Office 2007 - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Setting up a page in the document
1 On the PAGE LAYOUT tab, click the icon at the bot-

Note : If you have a long document, you might
tom-right corner of the Page Setup group to pop out
want to split it into multiple booklets, which
the Page Setup window. (Fig 1)
you can then bind into one book. Under Sheets
per booklet, choose how many pages to print
Fig 1
per booklet.
3 To reserve space on the inside fold for binding, increase

the width of the Gutter.
4 On the Paper tab, select the Paper size. Keep in
mind that the final size of the booklet is one half of the
paper size. Make sure your printer is stocked with paper
of the right size.
2 On the Margins tab, under Pages, change the setting Fig 3

for Multiple pages into Book fold. The orientation
automatically changes to Landscape.(Fig 2)
Fig 2
Note : You can add many embellishments to

your booklet’s appearance. For example, to
add borders to every page, on the Layout tab
of the Page Setup window, click Borders.
155
5 Click OK. If your document already has content, the 1 Select the content that you want on a landscape page.
text is formatted automatically, but you might need to
2 Go to Layout, and open the Page Setup dialog box.
adjust objects like images and tables manually.
3 Select Landscape, and in the Apply to box, choose
Note : An easy way to make sure that a table Selected text (Fig 6)
doesn’t flow over the margins is to right-click
the handle on the top-left corner of the table, Fig 5
and select AutoFit>AutoFit to Contents.
Change page orientation to landscape or portrait

1 To change the orientation of the whole document, se-
lect Layout>Orientation.
2 Choose Portrait or Landscape. (Fig 4)
Fig 4
4 Click OK
Change or set page margins
Page margin options
Change part of a document to landscape. (Fig 5)
• Add margins for binding Use a gutter margin to
Fig 5 add extra space to the side or top margin of a docu-
ment that you plan to bind. A gutter margin helps en-
sure that text isn’t obscured by the binding. (Fig 6)
Fig 6
1 Gutter margins for binding

2 Mirror margins for facing pages
• Set margins for facing pages Use mirror margins
to set up facing pages for double-sided documents,
such as books or magazines. In this case, the mar-
gins of the left page are a mirror image of those of the
right page (that is, the inside margins are the same
width, and the outside margins are the same width).
NOTE: You can set gutter margins for a docu-
ment that has mirror margins if the document
needs extra space for binding.

• Add a book fold Using the Book fold option in the after the text that has the new margin settings. If your
Page Setup dialog box, you can create a booklet. document is already divided into sections, you can click
You can use the same option to create a menu, invita- in a section or select multiple sections and then change
tion, event program, or any other type of document the margins.
that uses a single center fold. (Fig 7)
View page margins
Fig 7
Word Options.
2 Click Advanced, and then click the Show text bound-
aries check box under Show document content.
The page margins appear in your document as dotted lines.
NOTE: You can view page margins in either

Print Layout view or Web Layout view, and
1 Word inserts a single, center book fold
the text boundaries do not appear on the
printed page.
Change or set page margins Set margins for facing pages

click Margins. (Fig 8) When you choose mirror margins, the margins of the left
page are a mirror image of those on the right page. That
is, the inside margins are the same width, and the outside
Fig 8
margins are the same width.
1 On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup

group,click Margins. (Fig 9)
Fig 9
2 Click the margin type that you want. For the most com-
mon margin width, click Normal.
When you click the margin type that you want, your entire
document automatically changes to the margin type
that you have selected. 2 Click Mirrored.
3 You can also specify your own margin settings. Click 3 To change the margin widths, click Margins, click
Margins, click Custom Margins, and then in the Top, Custom Margins, and then, in the Inside and Out-
Bottom, Left, and Right boxes, enter new values for side boxes, enter the widths that you want.
the margins. Set gutter margins for bound documents
NOTES A gutter margin setting adds extra space to the side mar-
• To change the default margins, click Margins after you gin or top margin of a document that you plan to bind. A
select a new margin, and then click Custom Margins. gutter margin helps ensure that text isn’t obscured by the
In the Page Setup dialog box, click the Default but- binding.
ton, and then click Yes. The new default settings are 1 On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group,
saved in the template on which the document is based. click Margins (Fig 10)
Each new document based on that template automati-
cally uses the new margin settings. Fig 10
• To change the margins for part of a document, select
the text, and then set the margins that you want by
entering the new margins in the Page Setup dialog
box. In the Apply to box, click Selected text. Microsoft
Word automatically inserts section breaks (section
break: A mark you insert to show the end of a section.
A section break stores the section formatting elements,
such as the margins, page orientation, headers and
footers, and sequence of page numbers.) before and
1 Click Custom Margins. Fig 11
2 In the Multiple pages list, click Normal.
3 In the Gutter box, enter a width for the gutter margin.
4 In the Gutter position box, click Left or Top.
NOTE: The Gutter position box is not available

when you use the Mirror margins, 2 pages per
sheet, or Book fold option. For those options,
the gutter position is determined automatically.
If this article didn’t answer your question, you can get

assistance from an OmniTech support agent. For a lim-
ited time, first-time users can get up to 15 minutes of free
support.
Create newsletter-style columns
Apply columns to your document
1 On the Layout tab, click Columns. (Fig 11)
2 Click the column layout you want. This applies that b Click Page Layout>Columns.
layout to the entire document or section.
c Click the column layout you want.
Notes: To apply columns to part of a document, Word automatically sets the column widths to fit your page.
or to change columns you’ve already applied: If the presets don’t work for your layout or if you want
more than three columns, choose More Columns and
a Select the text or click in the section you want to adjust the settings in the Columns dialog box.
change.
Create columnized text
1 Select first paragraph for column setting as in Fig 12
Fig 12
2. Select Page Layout -> Columns -> Two to make the

paragraph as two column as in Fig 13. Fig 13 Fig 2
The Text is split into two columns and displayed

as in Fig 14

Fig 14
3 Select More Columns option opens window for columns 3 Select the Keep lines together check box.
options, try with different values for columns as in
Prevent page breaks between paragraphs
Fig 15.
1 Select the paragraphs that you want to keep together
FigFig
153
on a single page.
Box Launcher, and then click the Line and Page
Breaks tab.
3 Select the Keep with next check box.
Specify a page break before a paragraph
1 Click the paragraph that you want to follow the page
break.
Breaks tab.
3 Select the Page break before check box.
Place at least two lines of a paragraph at the top or
bottom of a page
1 Select the paragraphs in which you want to prevent
4 Check with instructor for more options and workings. widows and orphans.
Insert a page break 2 On the Page Layout tab, click the Paragraph Dialog
Insert a manual page break Breaks tab.
1 Click where you want to start a new page. 3 Select the Widow/Orphan control check box.
2 On the Insert tab, in the Pages group, click Page Break.
(Fig 16) Note: This option is turned on by default.
Fig 16 Prevent page breaks in a table row

1 Click the row in the table that you don’t want to break.
Select the entire table if you don’t want the table to
break across pages.
Note: A table that is larger than the page must
break.
2 On the Table Tools tab, click Layout. (Fig 17)

Prevent page breaks in the middle of a paragraph
Fig 17
1 Select the paragraph that you want to prevent from
breaking onto two pages.
Breaks tab.
3 In the Table group, click Properties. (Fig 18)
4 Click the Row tab, and the clear the Allow row to
break across pages check box.
Fig 18
TASK 2: Print the document
Preview your document
1 Click File>Print. Fig 3
2 To preview each page, click the forward and backward

arrows at the bottom of the page. (Fig 1)
Fig 1
If the text is too small to read, use the zoom slider at the
bottom of the page to enlarge it. (Fig 2)
Fig 2
3 Choose the number of copies, and any other options

you want, and click the Print button. (Fig 3)
Print specific pages

Print specific pages
Fig 5
1 Click File>Print.
2 To print only certain pages, print some of the
document’s properties, or print tracked changes and
comments, click the arrow under Settings, next to
Print All Pages (the default), to see all of your op-
tions.
Fig 4
If your printer doesn’t support automatic printing on both

sides, select Manually Print on Both Sides, and feed
the pages back to the printer when prompted. To avoid
pages from printing upside down, flip the sheets on the
short edge of the paper according to your printer’s instruc-
tions.
Note : For a professional touch, consider add-

ing page numbers in the header or the footer.
For example, if you want to have page num-
bers appearing on the outer bottom corner of
each page, set up a different page number
fomat in the footers of odd and even pages.
3 To print only certain pages, do one of the following:
• To print the page shown in preview, select Print Cur-
rent Page.
• To print consecutive pages like 1 -3, select Custom
Print and enter the first and last page numbers in the
Pages box.
• To print individual pages and a range of pages (like
page 3, and pages 4-6) at the same time, select Cus-
tom Print, and enter the page numbers and ranges
separated by commas (e.g. 3, 4-6).
Print settings for booklets

When you print the booklet, check the print settings to
make sure you print on both sides of the paper and flip
the papers correctly for the printing to work as intended.
1 Click FILE>Print.
2 If your printer supports automatic printing on both sides,
under Settings, change Print One SidedtoPrint on
Both Sides. Choose the option Flip pages on short
edge to avoid printing the second side of each sheet
upside down.

IT & ITES
COPA - Word Processing Exercise 1.6.34
Use templates
• open a template
• choose AutoCorrect options for capitalization, spelling, and symbols
• create and run macros.
Requirements
• A working PC - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Open a template
Open a new document and start typing My templates in the New Document dialog box. To
save a template in the My templates folder, do the
1 In Microsoft Office Word 2010, 2013 or 2016, click following:
File, and then click New. In Microsoft Office
Word 2007, click the Microsoft Office 1 Click the File tab.
2 Click Save As.
Button , and then click New.
3 In the Save As dialog box, click Templates.
2 Double-click Blank document.
4 In the Save as type list, select Word Template.
Start a document from a template
5 Type a name for the template in the File name box,
To use a template as a starting point, do one of and then click Save.
the following:
1 In Microsoft Office Word 2010, 2013 or 2016, click Delete a document
File, and then click New. In Microsoft Office 1 Click the File tab.
Word 2007, click the Microsoft Office Button,
and then click New. 2 Click Open.
2 Under Templates, do one of the following: 3 Locate the file that you want to delete.
• If you are using Microsoft Office Word 2007, click 4 Right-click the file, and then click Delete on the
Installed Templates to select a template that is shortcut menu.
available on your computer. If you are using Microsoft
Office Word 2010, look in Available Templates Create a template
• In Microsoft Office Word 2007, click one of the links If you frequently create a certain type of document, such
under Microsoft Office Online. In Microsoft Office as a monthly report, a sales forecast, or a presentation
Word 2010, click Office.com Templates. In Microsoft with a company logo, save it as a template so you can
Office Word 2013 and 2016, all available installed use that as your starting point instead of recreating the
templates are shown when you click File, and then file from scratch each time you need it. Start with a
click New and additional templates can be discovered document that you already created, a document you
by using the Search for online templates search downloaded, or a new template you customized.
box.
Save a template
2 Double-click the template that you want.
1 To save a file as a template, click File>Save As.
Save and reuse templates 2 Double-click Computer or, in Office 2016 programs,
double-click This PC. (Fig 1)
If you make changes to a template that you download,
you can save it on your computer and use it again. It’s
easy to find all your customized templates by clicking
162
Fig 1
If your document contains macros, click Word Macro-
Enabled Template.
Office automatically goes to the Custom Office Templates
folder.
5 Click Save.
Note : To change where your application auto-

matically saves your templates, click
File>Options>Save and type the folder and
path you want to use in the Default personal
templates location box. Any new templates you
save will be stored in that folder, and when
you click File>New>Personal, you’ll see the
templates in that folder.
Edit your template

To update your template, open the file, make the changes
you want, and then save the template.
1 Click File>Open.
2 Double-click Computer or This PC.
3 Browse to the Custom Office Templates folder that’s
under My Documents.
3 Type a name for your template in the File name box. 4 Click your template, and click Open.
4 For a basic template, click the template item in the 5 Make the changes you want, then save and close the
Save as type list. In Word for example, click Word template.
Template. (Fig 2)
Fig 2
TASK 2: : Choose AutoCorrect options for capitalization, spelling, and symbols
1 Click File>Options>Proofing>AutoCorrect Options Fig 1

(Fig 1)
Click “Auto Correct Options” button
In the Auto correct tab, select the following boxes
• Correct TWo INitial CApitals
• Capitalize first letter of sentences
• Capitalize first letter of table cells(Not in Excel or
OneNote)
• Capitalize names of days

• Correct accidental use of cAPS LOCK key (Fig 2) Add, change, or delete an entry on the AutoCorrect
list
Fig 2 To add an entry follow these steps:

1 Go to the AutoCorrect tab.
2 In the Replace box, type a word or phrase that you
often mistype or misspell — for example, type usualy.
3 In the With box, type the correct spelling of the word
— for example, type usually.
4 Click Add.
To change the replacement text for an entry, select it in
the list of entries and type a new entry in the With box.
To delete an entry, select it in the list and click Delete.
TASK 3: : Create and run macros
Record a macro with a button 3 To run your macro when you click a button, click But-
ton. (Fig 3)
1 Click View>Macros>Record Macro. (Fig 1)
Fig 1 Fig 3
4 Click the new macro (it’s named something like

Normal.NewMacros.<your macro name>), and click
Add (Fig 4)
Fig 4
2 Type a name for the macro.(Fig 2)
Fig 2
To use this macro in any new documents you make, be

sure the Store macro in box says All Documents
(Normal.dotm).

5 Click Modify. (Fig 5) 8 To stop recording, click View>Macros>Stop Record-
ing. (Fig 7)
Fig 5
Fig 7
9 The button for your macro appears on the Quick Access

Toolbar. (Fig 8)
6 Choose a button image, type the name you want, and
click OK twice. (Fig 6) Fig 8
Fig 6
10 To run the macro, click the button. The recorded text

will appear on as shown in the following fig 9.
Fig 9
7 Now it’s time to record the steps. Click the commands

or press the keys for each step in the task. Word
records your clicks and keystrokes.
Note: Use the keyboard to select text while

you’re recording your macro. Macros don’t
record selections made with a mouse.

Mail merge using MS word

• create a form letter
• type list of recipients and edit recipients list
• use mail merge to personalize letters for bulk mailings.
Requirements
• A working PC with windows OS
and MS Office 2007 - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Create form letter
2 Select a blank word document

appears on the screen.
1 Select Mailing →
3 Type the following letter
FROM
A drop down menu as shown in Fig.1.
TO
Fig. 1
National iNSTRUCTIONAL media institute,

CTI campus, guindy,
Chennai 600 032
Sir,
We trainees studying in ITI, we need to know the
price list of few trades for purchasing course materials
like
1. COPA 2. FITTER
3. WELDER 4. TURNER
5. PPO 6. MACHINIST
7. COE AUTOMOBILE (BBBT & AAT)
Sir Please send us the price details and the discount
details, which will enable our friends give bulk orders.
Thanking you
TASK 2: Type the list of recipients and edit recipients list
A "New address list" window appears on the

screen as on Fig. 3
1 Select → choose and click
"type new list" as on Fig. 2
166
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
2 Select "Customize columns" 3 Select "title" & click "Delete"

A "Customize Address list" window appears on The title gets deleted & a screen prompts as
Screen as on Fig. 4 "Are you sure you want to delete field "title"?.
Fig. 4
Click "Yes" as on Fig. 5.
Fig. 5

1 Use select & delete "Country & region",
"Home phone", "Work phone" & "Email
address"
2 Fig. 6 shows the final customize address list
window.
Fig. 6
4 Press OK the screen displays as shown in Fig.7
Fig. 7

5 Type "HARI" below "First Name " as in Fig. 8.
Fig. 8
6 Press "TAB" key to move to the next column or position 7 Repeat the step 6 to enter the following data as in Fig.9
the mouse button on the next column and right click the
mouse.
Fig. 9
8 Click OK and a "Save Address list" dialog box appears

as shown in Fig. 10

Fig. 10
9 Type " MAIL ADDRESS" as file name. 11 Click OK.

10 Click save. To use the existing list of address saved on your
A confirm Data Source dialog box appears as system follow step 12.
shown in Fig. 11
Fig. 11
12 Select → →
as dialog box
appears on the screen as shown in Fig. 12
13 click
TASK 3: Use mail merge to personalize letters for bulk mailings.
Step 1: Prepare your main document

Fig 1
1 On the Mailings tab, in the Start Mail Merge group,
choose Start Mail Merge>Letters.(Fig 1)

2 In Word, type the body of the letter (example follows) 2 Do one of the following:
you want to send to everyone. (Fig 2)
• If you don’t have a mailing list, choose Type a New
Fig 2 List and create one.
or
• If your mailing list is in an Excel spreadsheet, an Ac-
cess database, or another type of data file, choose
Use an Existing List. Then browse to your list and
choose Open.
or
• If you’re using your Outlook contacts, choose Choose
from Outlook Contacts.
3 Choose File>Save as.
Step 2: Set up your mailing list 4 In the File name box, type a file name, and then choose
Save
The mailing list is your data source. It can be an Excel
spreadsheet, a directory of Outlook contacts, an Edit recipient list
Access database, or an Office address list. It contains If you’re creating and printing letters for everyone on your
the records that Word uses to pull information from to list, go to “Step 4: Add personalized content to your let-
build your letter. ter.” If you want to send letters to people who live, for
example, within 20 miles of an event you’re hosting, then
Note use a filter like a ZIP Code or a postal code to narrow the
• If you don’t have a mailing list, you can cre- list.
ate one during mail merge. Before you start Choose Edit Recipient List (Fig 4)
the mail merge process, collect all of your
data records, and add them to your data Fig 4
source.
• If you’re using an Excel spreadsheet, make
sure the column for ZIP Codes or postal
codes is formatted as text so that you don’t
lose any zeros.
• If you want to use your Outlook contacts, make
sure Outlook is your default email program
Step 3: Link your mailing list to your main docu-

ment
1 On the Mailings tab, in the Start Mail Merge group, In the Mail Merge Recipients dialog box, select the
choose Select Recipients, and then choose an op- check box next to the name of each person who you want
tion. (Fig 3) to receive your email message. (Fig 5)
Fig 3 Fig 5

In the Mail Merge Recipients dialog box, there are op- Note: To view how an address will appear in
tions to refine the recipient list. The two most frequently the letter, under Preview, choose Preview Re-
used options are to sort and to filter the list to make it sults. Choose the Next or Previous record
easier to find names and addresses. (Fig 6) button to move through records in your data
source.
Fig 6
4 In the Write & Insert group, choose Greeting Line.

(Fig 9)
Fig 9
5 In the Insert Greeting Line dialog box, choose the

format you want to use.
6 Choose OK to insert the merge field in the letter.
Step 4: Add personalized content to your letter 7 Choose File>Save to preserve the letter (example fol-
1 On the Mailings tab, in the Write & Insert Fields group, lows) you’re creating for the mail merge. (Fig 10)
choose Address Block. (Fig 7)
Fig 10
Fig 7
2 In the Insert Address Block dialog box, choose a for-

mat for the recipient’s name as it will appear in the To insert other custom information in the letter from your
letter. (Fig 8) mailing list, see add mail merge fields one at a time.
Fig 8 Verify merge field names

Make sure Word finds the names and addresses in your
mailing list.
On the Mailings tab, in the Write & Insert Fields group,
choose Match Fields.
Note : Merge Fields also can be opened from

the Insert Address Block dialog box you used
to add an address block to the main document.
1 In the Match Fields dialog box, verify that the record

fields that appear in the list match the names of col-
umn headings for records in your mailing list data
source. (Fig 11)
Note: There are two columns in the dialog box.
The left column is a list of common names in a
3 Choose OK. business record for example. The right column
is the field name for the common name that is
mapped to a column heading in your data
source file.

Fig 11 4 On the Page Layout tab (Word 2013) or Layout tab
(Word 2016), choose the paragraph spacing you want.
(Fig 15)
Fig 15
Note: Because Word treats each line in an

1 Do one of the following: Address Block as a paragraph, you might want
• If the field names shown match column headings you to reduce the spacing between the lines.
used for records in your mailing list data source, do
nothing. Step 5. Preview and print the letters
or 1 Choose Preview Results, and then choose the
• If (not matched) appears in a field name that you ex- Next or Previous record button to make sure the
pected to match a column heading in your data source, names and addresses in the body of your letter look
choose the drop-down arrow, and then choose the field right.
name in your mailing list data source. Repeat as nec-
essary. Note : To go to the start of the list, choose the
2 Choose OK. First record button, and to go to the end of
Format mail merge fields the list, choose the Last record button.
To change the font, size, or spacing of the merged con-
2 Choose Finish & Merge>Print Documents. (Fig 16)
tent, select the merge field name and make the changes
you want.
Fig 16
1 On the Mailings tab, in the Preview Results group,
choose Preview Results to switch from the merged
results back to the mail merge fields in your letter.
Fig 12
Step 6: Save your personalized letter

When you save the mail merge document, it stays con-
2 Choose the merge field name. (Fig 13) nected to your mailing list so that you can use it for your
next bulk mailing.
Fig 13
To reuse your mail merge document
• Open the mail merge document and choose Yes when
Word prompts you to keep the connection.
To change addresses in mail merge document
• Open the mail merge document and choose Edit Re-
3 On the Home tab, choose the font and the font size cipient List to sort, filter, and choose specific ad-
you want to use. (Fig 14) dresses.
Fig 14

Word - Publishing options

• create a table of content
• format or customize a table of contents
• create and update of Index
• create a Hyperlink in different options
• insert Book mark, comment, equation, cross reference and Foot notes
• check spelling and grammar, translate utility.
Requirements
TASK 1; Create a table of content

Create text file with more number of heading file and make
Styles in each headings and paragraph Fig 2
Put your cursor in page number 1 for add the table of

content
Go to Reference > Table of Contents > Custom Table of
contents. The Table of Contents dialog box will appear on
the screen Fig 1.
Fig 1
Fig 3
Click Options button. The Table of Contents Options dia-

log box will appear Fig 2.
Delete the TOC Level tab of 1,2,3, and so on
See the Fig 3 and set the TOC level 1 and click Ok button
174
The Table of Contents dialog box’s Print preview and Click OK Button. The Contents will appear as shown in
Web preview options TOC level will be changed as Fig 5.
shown in Fig 4.
Fig 5
Fig 4
TASK 2: Format or customize a table of contents
After you have created a table of contents in Word, you Add dot leaders (Fig 3)
can customize the way it appears. For example, you can
change the layout, change the text formatting, select how
Fig 3
many heading levels to show, and choose whether to show
dotted lines between the entries and the page numbers.
Format the text (Fig 1)
Fig 1
Change the number of levels shown (Fig 4)
Fig 4
Change the level of an entry (Fig 2)
Fig 2
Change the layout of your table of contents

1 On the References tab of the Ribbon click Table of
Contents>Custom Table of Contents. (Fig 5)

Fig 5 Note : “Levels” in this context refers to your
heading levels. You may have Heading 1 for
your major headings then Heading 2 for your
subsections of those headings. You can have
even more sub-levels within those that in your
table of contents if you choose.
3 Click OK.
Format the text in your table of contents
To change how the text in your table of contents looks,
change the style for each level in the table of contents.
1 On the References tab of the Ribbon click Table of
Contents>Custom Table of Contents.
2 In the Table of Contents dialog box, click Modify. If
the Modify button is grayed out, change Formats to
2 Make your changes in the Table of Contents dialog From template. (Fig 8)
box. You’ll see what they look like in the Print Pre-
Fig 8
view and Web Preview areas.
• To add a dot leader, or dotted line, between each en-
try and its page number, click the Tab leader list and
then click the dotted line. You can also choose a dash
leader or remove the leader entirely and just have a
blank space. (Fig 6)
Fig 6
3 In the Styles list, click the level that you want to change
and then click Modify. (Fig 9)
• To change the overall appearance of your table of con-
tents, click the Formats list, and then click the format
Fig 9
that you want.
• To change the number of levels displayed in your table
of contents, click Show levels, and then click the
number of levels you want. (Fig 7)
Fig 7
4 In the Modify Style dialog box, make the formatting

changes that you want, and then click OK.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all the levels that you want to 2 In the Table of Contents dialog box, in the Tab leader
display in your table of contents. list, click the dotted line option. (Fig 13)
Word will remember these customizations each time you
update the table of contents in this document. Fig 13
Change the level of an entry

To change the level of an entry in your table of contents,
just change the heading level of that text in the body of
your document.
1 Click the heading that you want to change.
2 On the Home tab, in the Styles group, click the head-
ing level you want.(Fig 10)
Fig 10
Change the number of levels shown

To change the number of levels shown in your table of
contents is to replace the existing table with one that con-
tains the levels you want. A shorter, but more technical
way to do it is to edit the field code information.
1 Click References>Table of Contents>Custom Table
3 On the References tab, click Update Table. (Fig 11) of Contents. (Fig 14)
Fig 11
Fig 14
4 Click Update entire table, and then click OK.

Add dot leaders to your table of contents
If you’ve already added a table of contents to your docu-
ment, the following procedure will replace it with a new
table of contents that contains the same information and
has dot leaders, or dotted lines, between the entries and
the page numbers.
1 Click References>Table of Contents>Custom Table
of Contents. (Fig 12)
Fig 12
2 In the Table of Contents dialog box, in the Show

levels list, choose the number of levels that you want,
and then click OK. (Fig 15)
For example, if you click 2, then all text with the Heading
1 style or the Heading 2 style applied is displayed in the
table of contents.
3 When you are asked whether you want to replace the
existing table of contents, click Yes.

Fig 15 You can edit the field code information to quickly change
the number of levels shown in your TOC.
1 Click in your table of contents, and then press Alt+F9.
The field code information appears between curly brack-
ets and looks like this: (fig 16)
Fig 16
2 Change the numbers in the quotation marks. For ex-

ample, if you want to show only two levels, change “1-
3” to “1-2”.
Edit the field code information (to change the num- 3 Press Alt+F9 to display the table of contents again.
ber of levels)
4 Update the table of contents to see your changes
Word inserts fields automatically when you use particular (References>Update Table).
commands. For example, when you Add page numbers,
Word inserts the Page field. When you Create a table of
contents, Word inserts the TOC field.
Task 3 : Create and update an index
An index lists the terms and topics that are discussed in

3 You can edit the text in the Mark Index Entry dialog
a document, along with the pages that they appear on. To
box. (Fig 3)
create an index, you mark the index entries by providing
the name of the main entry and the cross-reference in Fig 3
your document, and then you build the index. (Fig 1)
Fig 1
Mark the entries

These steps show you how to mark words or phrases for
your index, but you can also Mark index entries for text
that spans a range of pages.
1 Select the text you’d like to use as an index entry, or
just click where you want to insert the entry.
2 On the References tab, in the Index group, click.
Mark Entry. (Fig 2)
Fig 2
• You can add a second-level in the Subentry box. If
you need a third level, follow the subentry text with a
colon.
• To create a cross-reference to another entry, click
Cross-reference under Options, and then type the
text for the other entry in the box.

• To format the page numbers that will appear in the index, Edit or format an index entry and update the index
select the Bold check box or Italic check box below
Page number format. If you mark more entries after creating your index, you’ll
need to update the index to see them.
4 Click Mark to mark the index entry. To mark this text
everywhere it shows up in the document, click Mark 1 If you don’t see the XE fields, click Show/Hide in
All. the Paragraph group on the Home tab.
5 To mark additional index entries, select the text, click 2 Find the XE field for the entry that you want to change,
in the Mark Index Entry dialog box, and then repeat for example, { XE “Callisto” \t “See Moons” }.
steps 3 and 4
3 To edit or format an index entry, change the text inside
Create the index the quotation marks.
After you mark the entries, you’re ready to insert the index 4 To update the index, click the index, and then press
into your document. F9. Or click Update Index in the Index group on the
References tab. (Fig 6)
1 Click where you want to add the index.
2 On the References tab, in the Index group, click In- Fig 6
sert Index. (Fig 4)
Fig 4
If you find an error in the index, locate the index entry that
you want to change, make the change, and then update
the index.
3 In the Index dialog box, you can choose the format
for text entries, page numbers, tabs, and leader char- Delete an index entry and update the index
acters. (Fig 5) 1 Select the entire index entry field, including the braces
({}), and then press DELETE.
Fig 5
If you don’t see the XE fields, click Show/Hide in the
Paragraph group on the Home tab.
2 To update the index, click the index, and then press
F9. Or click Update Index in the Index group on the
References tab. (Fig 7)
Fig 7
4 You can change the overall look of the index by choosing

from the Formats dropdown menu. A preview is
displayed in the window to the top left.
5 Click OK.

TASK 4 : Create a Hyperlink in different options
Create a hyperlink to a location on the web path or browse to a different save location by clicking
Change. You can also choose whether to Edit the
1 Select the text or picture that you want to display as
new document later or open and Edit the new docu-
a hyperlink.
ment now. (Fig 2)
2 On the Insert tab, click Hyperlink. . You can Fig 2
also right-click the text or picture and click Hyperlink

on the shortcut menu.
3 In the Insert Hyperlink box, type or paste your link in
the Address box.
Note: If you don’t see the Address box, make

sure Existing File or Web Page is selected
under Link to.
Optionally, type different display text for your
link in the Text to display box.
If you don’t know the address for your
hyperlink, click Browse the Web to locate
the URL on the Internet and copy it.
Create a hyperlink to a new email message
Create a hyperlink to a file on your computer

1 Select the text or picture that you want to display as a
You can add a hyperlink to a file on your computer, or to a hyperlink.
new file that you want to create on your computer.
1 Select the text or picture that you want to display as a 2 On the Insert tab, click Hyperlink .. You can also
hyperlink. right-click the text or picture and click Hyperlink on
the shortcut menu.
2 On the Insert tab, click Hyperlink.
3 Under Link to, click E-mail Address. (Fig 3)
3 Under Link to, do one of the following:
Fig 3
• To link to an existing file, click Existing File or Web
Page under Link to, and then find the file in the Look
in list or the Current Folder list. (Fig 1)
Fig 1
4 Either type the email address that you want in the E-

mail address box, or select an address in the Re-
cently used e-mail addresses list.
5 In the Subject box, type the subject of the message.
Note: Some web browsers and email programs

might not recognize the subject line.
• To create a new, blank file and link to it, click Create
New Document under Link to, type a name for the
6 Click Ok button.
new file, and either use the location shown under Full

Create a hyperlink to a location in the current Create a hyperlink to a location in another document
document
1 Select the text or picture that you want to display as a
1 Select the text or picture that you want to display as a hyperlink.
hyperlink.
2 On the Insert tab, click Hyperlink . You can also
2 On the Insert tab, click Hyperlink .. You can also right-click the text or picture and click Hyperlink on
right-click the text or picture and click Hyperlink on the shortcut menu.
the shortcut menu. 3 Under Link to, click Existing File or Web Page.
3 Under Link to, click Place in This Document. (Fig 5)
(Fig 5)
Fig 5
Fig 4
4 In the list, select the heading (current document only),

bookmark, slide, custom show, or cell reference that 4 In the Look in box, click the down arrow, and find and
you want to link to. select the file that you want to link to.
5 Click Ok button. 5 Click Bookmark, select the heading, bookmark, slide,

custom show, or cell reference that you want, and then
Optional click OK.
To customize the ScreenTip that appears when you rest
the pointer over the hyperlink, click ScreenTip in the top-
right corner of the Insert Hyperlink dialog box and enter
the text you want.
TASK 5 : Insert Book mark, comment, equation, cross-reference footnotes
Add or delete bookmarks in a Word

Note: Bookmark names need to begin with a
Bookmark the location letter. They can include both numbers and
1 Select text, a picture, or a place in your document letters, but not spaces. If you need to separate
where you want to insert a bookmark. words, you can use an underscore ( _ )—for
example, First_heading.
2 Click Insert>Bookmark. (Fig 1)
Fig 1
Go to the bookmarked location
Type Ctrl+G to open the Go To tab in the Find and

Replace box. Under Go to what, click Bookmark. Enter
or select the bookmark name, and then click Go To.
(Fig 2)
3 Under Bookmark name, type a name and click Add.

Fig 2 Insert Equations
1 Place the cursor where you want to insert an Equation
2 Choose > Insert > Equation and click arrow button.
See the fig- and follow. (Fig 3)
Fig 3
Link to a bookmark
You can also add hyperlinks that will take you to a
bookmarked location in the same document.
1 Select the text or object you want to use as a hyperlink.
2 Right-click and then click Hyperlink .
3 Under Link to, click Place in This Document. 3 Choose and click the equation which type you want to
4 In the list, select the heading or bookmark that you insert it. Now the Inserted equation will appear as
want to link to. shown in fig 4.
Note: To customize the Screen Tip that Fig 4
appears when you rest the pointer over the

hyperlink, click ScreenTip, and then type the
text that you want.
5 Click OK.
Delete a bookmark
1 Click Insert>Bookmark.
2 Click either Name or Location to sort the list of
bookmarks in the document.
3 Click the name of the bookmark you want to delete,
and then click Delete.
4 If you have inserted a hyperlink to the deleted book-
mark, right-click the linked text and then click Remove 4 After you insert the equation the Equation Tools
Hyperlink. Design tab opens with symbols and structures that
can be added to your equation
Note: To delete both the bookmark and the
bookmarked item (such as a block of text or Insert Equation in normal typed text
other element), select the item, and then press 1 Type the text given in the following fig 5.
Delete.
Fig 5
Insert or delete a comment
1 Select the content you want to comment on.

2 Go to Review >Comments >New Comment, and
make your comment. If you want to make changes to
any of your comments, just go back and edit them.
3 To reply to a comment, go to the comment, and se-
lect Reply

2 Select the text Fig 9
3 Choose Insert and click Equation button
4 Select Professional Button in the Tool group under the
Equation Tools. Fig 6
Fig 6
4 In the Insert reference to box, click the information

you want inserted in the document. Choices depend
on what you chose in step 3. (Fig 10)
Fig 10
5 The Equation will appear in professionally as shown in

the following fig 7.
Fig 7
5 In the For which box, click the specific item you want
to refer to, such as “Insert the cross-reference.”
6 To allow users to jump to the referenced item, select
the Insert as hyperlink check box. (Fig 11)
Fig 11
Insert the cross-reference

1 In the document, type the text that begins the cross-
reference.
2 On the Insert tab, click Cross-reference. (Fig 8)
Fig 8
7 If the Include above/below check box is available,

check it to include specify the relative position of the
referenced item.
3 In the Reference type box, click the drop-down list
8 Click Insert.
to pick what you want to link to. The list of what’s
available depends on the type of item (heading, page
number, etc.) you’re linking to. (Fig 9)
Insert footnotes and endnotes 1 Click where you want to reference to the footnote or
endnote.
Footnotes appear at the bottom of the page and endnotes
come at the end of the document. A number or symbol on 2 On the References tab, select Insert Footnote or
the footnote or endnote matches up with a reference mark Insert Endnote. (Fig 13)
in the document. (Fig 12)
Fig 13
Fig 12
3 Enter what you want in the footnote or endnote.

4 Return to your place in the document by double-click-
ing the number or symbol at the beginning of the note.
TASK 6 : Check spelling and grammar, translate utility.
1 Goto Page 3 in the word document saved. 5 Select a word in the sentence, say Word in this ex-
ample, and right click for options and find Translate.
2 Type as following ( though it is error, ignore it
6 Click on translate to get the panel enabled as in
This are to find speling errors and grammer mistakes
Fig 3
in Word. Try to find what Word does with error mes-
sages.
Fig 3
3 Save the document on completion and see, green un-
derlined errors are grammatical mistakes, while red
underlined are spelling mistakes as in Fig 1.
Fig 1
4 Right click on the error underlined phrase to find the

correct options and replace proper grammar / spelling
as in Fig 2. Word displays the translate panel with languages options,
Fig 2
which allows to get translated word in the selected lan-
guage if available or send to Microsoft translator option
online and get back proper translation.
7 For other options get cleared with instructor.

Typing practice using open source typing Tutor

• download and install open source typing tutor application
• practice typing
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK : 1 Download and install open source typing tutor application
Fig 1
1 Type "Typing tutor download" in google page Use Any open source typing tutor application
2 Click "Google Search" Practice the proper typing format
https://typingmaster.en.softonic.com/redirect-download Increase typing speed.
or Improve typing accuracy.
https://sourceforge.net/projects/typefaster/ Type different formats and generate the report with the
?source=typ_redirect help of your instrctor.
or
TASK 2: Practice typing

Fig 1
Easy to use and for free
TIPP10 is a free 10-finger touch typing tutor. You can use

TIPP10 directly in your browser or you can download the
software version for Windows, Mac OS and Linux. TIPP10
is easy to use and features a clear user interface. Begin-
ners will find their way around right away so they can
start practicing without a hitch. You will be able to learn
touch typing quickly and efficiently with the program's in-
telligent practice lessons, useful support functions and
an extensive progress tracker. You can also play a typing
game and expand the program with open lessons or make
your own to meet your specific needs. (Fig 1)
2 Intelligent text selection typing efficiently. A wide range of dictations ensures you'll
never get bored. You will become acquainted with all the
The lesson texts react instantly to your typing mistakes keys on the keyboard in 20 sequential practice lessons.
by repeating mistyped letters more frequently. The sys-
tem helps you eliminate typing mistakes and learn touch
185
Commonly used characters are practiced earlier and more to easily compare your results. TIPP10 also shows you
frequently than those that appear less frequently. (Fig 2) your error rate for all the characters and fingers used in
the typing lessons. This way you can see right away which
keys and which fingers you still need to work on.
Fig 2
2 Open lessons and create your own texts (Fig 4)
Fig 4
3 Ticker and virtual assistance keyboard

You can change the font, speed and color of the text in
the ticker to ensure a steady typing flow. Keys and key
paths appearing in color on a virtual keyboard help you to 3 Extensive customization
use the right fingers and keep the right starting position. A
status bar displays the fingers that should be used and
tallies errors and characters per minute. Fig 5
Checking typing speed
1 Detailed results (Fig 3)
Fig 3
You can choose how the lesson will run. You can set the
duration of the lesson, how the typing tutor reacts to typ-
ing mistakes and which visual aids will support you during
the lesson. In general settings you can also personalize
the software even more. Here, for example, you can se-
After each typing lesson you will receive a printable com- lect a different speed for the ticker or a larger typeface
prehensive report that evaluates the lesson. A list of all
completed lessons including details about duration, num-
ber of errors, characters per minute and an evaluation pro-
vide you with an overview of the work you have done. A
lesson trend diagram shows your progress and allows you

Shortcut keys for open office and word processor

• practice the shortcut keys in word document.
Common tasks in microsoft word
CTRL+SHFT+SPACEBAR Create a nonbreaking space.
CTRL+SHFT+HYPHEN Create a nonbreaking hyphen.
CTRL+B Make letters bold.
CTRL+I Make letters italic.
CTRL+U Make letters underline.
CTRL+SHFT+< Decrease font size one value.
CTRL+SHFT+> Increase font size one value.
CTRL+[ Decrease font size 1 point.
CTRL+] Increase font size 1 point.
CTRL+SPACEBAR Remove paragraph or character formatting.
CTRL+C Copy the selected text or object.
CTRL+X Cut the selected text or object.
CTRL+V Paste text or an object.
CTRL+ALT+V Paste special
CTRL+SHFT+V Paste formatting only
CTRL+Z Undo the last action.
CTRL+Y Redo the last action.
CTRL+SHFT+G Open the Word Count dialog box.
Create, view, and save documents
CTRL+N Create a new document.
CTRL+O Open a document.
CTRL+W Close a document.
ALT+CTRL+S Split the document window.
ALT+SHFT+C or ALT+CTRL+S Remove the document window split.
CTRL+S Save a document.
187
Find, replace, and browse through text
CTRL+F Open the Navigation task pane (to search document).
ALT+CTRL+Y Repeat find (after closing Find and Replace window).
CTRL+H Replace text, specific formatting, and special items.
CTRL+G Go to a page, bookmark, footnote, table, comment, graphic, or

other location.
ALT+CTRL+Z Switch between the last four places that you have edited.
ALT+CTRL+HOME Open a list of browse options. Press the arrow keys to select
an option, and then press ENTER to browse through a
document by using the selected option.
CTRL+PAGE UP Move to the previous browse object (set in browse options).
CTRL+PAGE DOWN Move to the next browse object (set in browse options).
Switch to another view
ALT+CTRL+P Switch to Print Layout view.
ALT+CTRL+O Switch to Outline view.
ALT+CTRL+N Switch to Draft view.
Outline view
ALT+SHFT+LEFT ARROW Promote a paragraph.
ALT+SHFT+RIGHT ARROW Demote a paragraph.
CTRL+SHFT+N Demote to body text.
ALT+SHFT+UP ARROW Move selected paragraphs up.
ALT+SHFT+DOWN ARROW Move selected paragraphs down.
ALT+SHFT+PLUS SIGN Expand text under a heading.
ALT+SHFT+MINUS SIGN Collapse text under a heading.
ALT+SHFT+A Expand or collapse all text or headings.
ALT+SHFT+L Show the first line of body text or all body text.
ALT+SHFT+1 Show all headings with the Heading 1 style.
ALT+SHFT+n Show all headings up to Heading n.
CTRL+TAB Insert a tab character.
Print and preview documents

CTRL+P Print a document.
ALT+CTRL+I Switch to print preview.
Arrow keys Move around the preview page when zoomed in.
PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN Move by one preview page when zoomed out.
CTRL+HOME Move to the first preview page when zoomed out.
CTRL+END Move to the last preview page when zoomed out.

Review documents
ALT+CTRL+M Insert a comment.
CTRL+SHFT+E Turn change tracking on or off.
ALT+SHFT+C Close the Reviewing Pane if it is open.
Full screen reading view
HOME Go to beginning of document.
END Go to end of document.
n, ENTER Go to page n.
ESC Exit reading layout view.
References, footnotes, and endnotes
ALT+SHFT+O Mark a table of contents entry.
ALT+SHFT+I Mark a table of authorities entry (citation).
ALT+SHFT+X Mark an index entry.
ALT+CTRL+F Insert a footnote.
ALT+CTRL+D Insert an endnote.
Move through your document
LEFT ARROW One character to the left
RIGHT ARROW One character to the right
CTRL+LEFT ARROW One word to the left
CTRL+RIGHT ARROW One word to the right
CTRL+UP ARROW One paragraph up
CTRL+DOWN ARROW One paragraph down
SHFT+TAB One cell to the left (in a table)
TAB One cell to the right (in a table)
UP ARROW Up one line
DOWN ARROW Down one line
END To the end of a line
HOME To the beginning of a line
ALT+CTRL+PAGE UP To the top of the window
ALT+CTRL+PAGE DOWN To the end of the window
PAGE UP Up one screen (scrolling)
PAGE DOWN Down one screen (scrolling)
CTRL+PAGE DOWN To the top of the next page
CTRL+PAGE UP To the top of the previous page

Move through your document
CTRL+END To the end of a document
CTRL+HOME To the beginning of a document
SHFT+F5 To a previous revision
SHFT+F5 After opening a document, to the location you were working in

when the document was last closed
Move around in a table
TAB To the next cell in a row
SHFT+TAB To the previous cell in a row
ALT+HOME To the first cell in a row
ALT+END To the last cell in a row
ALT+PAGE UP To the first cell in a column
ALT+PAGE DOWN To the last cell in a column
UP ARROW To the previous row
DOWN ARROW To the next row
ALT+SHFT+UP ARROW Row up
ALT+SHFT+DOWN ARROW Row down
Insert paragraphs and tab characters in a table
ENTER New paragraphs in a cell
CTRL+TAB Tab characters in a cell
Copy formatting
CTRL+SHFT+C Copy formatting from text.
CTRL+SHFT+V Apply copied formatting to text.
Change or resize the font
CTRL+SHFT+F Open the Font dialog box to change the font.
CTRL+SHFT+> Increase the font size.
CTRL+SHFT+< Decrease the font size.
CTRL+] Increase the font size by 1 point.
CTRL+[ Decrease the font size by 1 point.

Apply character formats
CTRL+D Open the Font dialog box to change the formatting of

characters.
SHFT+F3 Change the case of letters.
CTRL+SHFT+A Format all letters as capitals.
CTRL+B Apply bold formatting.
CTRL+U Apply an underline.
CTRL+SHFT+W Underline words but not spaces.
CTRL+SHFT+D Double-underline text.
CTRL+SHFT+H Apply hidden text formatting.
CTRL+I Apply italic formatting.
CTRL+SHFT+K Format letters as small capitals.
CTRL+EQUAL SIGN Apply subscript formatting (automatic spacing).
CTRL+SHFT+PLUS SIGN Apply superscript formatting (automatic spacing).
CTRL+SPACEBAR Remove manual character formatting.
CTRL+SHFT+Q Change the selection to the Symbol font.
Set the line spacing
CTRL+1 Single-space lines.
CTRL+2 Double-space lines.
CTRL+5 Set 1.5-line spacing.
CTRL+0 (zero) Add or remove one line space preceding a paragraph.
Align paragraphs
CTRL+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned.
CTRL+J Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned.
CTRL+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned.
CTRL+L Left align a paragraph.
CTRL+M Indent a paragraph from the left.
CTRL+SHFT+M Remove a paragraph indent from the left.
CTRL+T Create a hanging indent.
CTRL+SHFT+T Reduce a hanging indent.
CTRL+Q Remove paragraph formatting.

COPA - Spreadsheet Application
MS Excel Screen components and Tools
• open new microsoft office excel 2010 workbook in windows 10 operating system
• observe the Excel workbook Tabs, Ribbons and its components.
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK : 1 Opening new microsoft office excel 2010 workbook in windows 10 operating system
3 Click Blank work book. The new Microsoft office excel

1 Press windows Key in Keyboard
2010 workbook will appear on screen.
2 Choose Micsrosoft office 2010 and click Microsoft

office excel 2010.
TASK : 2 Observe the Excel workbook Tabs, Ribbons and its components
1 Open the New Excel 2010 workbook (Fig 1) 2 Observe and write name of the Tabs and Ribbon groups
of the corresponding Tab in the below table
Fig 1
S.No Tab Name Ribbon Group
192
Create Save and Formating Excel Sheet

• create an excel worksheet
• enter data into the cell
• insert borders to the table
• save and exit excel.
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Create MS-Excel Worksheet
1 Invoke Excel application package by following

sequence
Click start button -> All Programs -> Microsoft Excel
2010
Microsoft Excel splash screen appears for a mo-

ment and a blank Excel Worksheet appears as
shown in Fig1
Fig 1
193
TASK 2: Enter data into the cell
1 Click at C1 cell and type the name of a stationery The existing cell address will be displayed in
shoppe and press "Enter" key. Name box and content will be displayed in
formula bar/ reference area and in the cell. If
the typed text is more than that can be ac-
commodated in the cell it gets displayed over
the next cell as shown in Fig 2.
Fig. 2
2 Click the Center alignment button from

Fig 4
Alignment group as shown in Fig.3.
Fig 3
The underline style can be changed into single

or double by clicking on the drop down arrow
next to button.
3 Click the Bold and Underline button from 4 Enter the following data in the cells as given below
Font group as shown in Fig.4. Click on cell A4. Type "Sl.No." and press "Right Arrow"
key.

Entering Data using Fill
Type "Item" and press "Right Arrow" key.
Type "Rate" and press "Right Arrow" key. 5 Click on cell A5 and type 1 and press "Enter" key.
Type " Quantity" and press "Right Arrow" key.
6 Click on cell A5 and move the pointer to the right
Type "Amount" and press "Enter" key. bottom of the cell
Up /Down arrow keys can be used to move to A black '+' sign will appear
cells in vertical directions and Left/Right ar-
row keys can be used to move to cells in hori- 7 Click Right button of the mouse and drag till A14
zontal directions
A context will appear as shown in Fig.5.
Fig 5
8 Click Fill Series from this menu. 10 Enter the following data into the cell. (Fig 6)
9 Click CENTER ALIGNMENT button from Alignment
group.

Fig 6 7
Fig
TASK 3: Inserting borders to the table
1 Click on the cell A4 and move the Mouse pointer to- 3 Click on the cell A5 and move the Mouse pointer to-
wards to E4 without releasing the mouse button to wards to A12 without releasing the mouse button to
select the cells select the cells
2 Click on the Border button from Font group 4 Click on the Border button from Font group and choose
Outside Border.
A Context menu appears as shown in Fig 8.
5 Repeat the steps 3 and 4 by selecting the cells B5 to
Choose All Border from this menu. B12, C5 to C12, D5 to D12, E5 to E12. (Fig 7)

Fig
Fig 78
TASK 4: Save and Exit Excel
1 Click on the (Office button)
A main pop-up menu will appear as shown in

Fig 8.

FigFig
Fig 9 8
2 Select Save command from the above menu On the Title bar, Microsoft Excel displays the name
of the workbook as shown in Fig 9.
Give you own name to this file. (Here for example "Sta-
tionery" is given).
Fig 9
3 Select Close command from Main menu 4 Select command from Main menu.

Absolute and Relative referencing linking sheets
• create relative reference between worksheets
• conditional formatting in excel 2010.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Create relative reference between worksheets
1 Open new excel work book The output window will display as shown in
2 Type the number 1,2,3,4,5 in A1, A2,A3,A4,A5 cells Fig 3
3 Select the cell E1
Fig 3
4 Type =A1 in E1 cell as shown in Fig 1.
Fig 1
6 Select sheet2, type any number in A1 to A5 cells as

on Fig 4
Fig 4
5 Drag the selection point up to E5 as shown in
Fig 2.
Fig 2
7 Select any cell for example D1
199
8 Type =A1+sheet1!A1 in D1 cell as shown in Fig 5 and 9 Drag the selection point up to D5 cell.
press Enter
The output window will display as shown in
Fig 5 Fig 6
Fig 6
TASK 2: Conditional formatting in excel 2010
1 Create a marks sheet as shown below.(Refer table 1)

(Fig 1)
6 In the "Format cells that are less than" text box type
40. (Refer Fig 2)
Fig 1
Fig 2
7 In the adjacent text box indicated as "with" use the

drop down menu and select "Custom format".
2 Select cells in the rangeC3 : G12 for marks of all stu- 8 The "Format cells" window appears. Select the Font
dents in all subjects. style as bold and the text color as red.
3 In the Home ribbon "Conditional Formatting". 9 Click OK.
4 Place the mouse on Highlight Cell Rules. A drop down 10 All the cells containing values less than 40 appear with
menu for rules appears. the formatting set in step 8.
5 Click on “Less Than” rule and then "Less Than ". 11 Change the values in the marks sheet randomly to val-
ues above and below 40 and test the results.
A Less Than window appears.

IIT & ITES Exercise 1.7.42
Practice Excel Functions in all major categories
• wok with Mathematical and Statistical Functions
• work with date and time Functions
• practice on Financial Functions
• work with Text based Functions
• logical function to arrive a decision.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Work with Mathematical Functions and Statistical functions
Count
Countifs
1 To count the number of cells that contain numbers,
3 To count cells based on multiple criteria (for example,
use the COUNT function. (Fig 1)
green and greater than 9), use the following
Fig 1 COUNTIFS function. (Fig 3)
Fig 3
Countif
2 To count cells based on one criteria (for example,
greaterthan 9), use the following COUNTIF function. Sum
(Fig 2) 4 To sum a range of cells, use the SUM function. (Fig 4)
Fig 2 Fig 4
Note: visit our page about the COUNTIF Sumif

function for many more examples. 5 To sum cells based on one criteria (for example, greater
than 9), use the following SUMIF function (two
arguments).
201
Fig 5
General note: in a similar way, you can use
the AVERAGEIF and AVERAGEIFS function to
average cells based on one or multiple criteria.
Statistical functions
Average
6 To calculate the average of a range of cells, use the
AVERAGE function. (Fig 8)
Fig 8
To sum cells based on one criteria (for

example, green), use the following SUMIF
function (three arguments, last argument is the
range to sum). (Fig 6)
Fig 6
Averageif
7 To average cells based on one criteria, use the
AVERAGEIF function. For example, to calculate the
average excluding zeros. (Fig 9)
Fig 9
Sumifs
To sum cells based on multiple criteria (for Median

example, circle and red), use the following
SUMIFS function (first argument is the range Note: <> means not equal to. The AVERAGEIF
to sum). (Fig 7) function is similar to the SUMIF function.
Fig 7
8 To find the median (or middle number), use the
MEDIAN function. (Fig 10)
Mode
Fig 10

9 To find the most frequently occurring number, use the 12 To find the maximum value, use the MAX function.
MODE function. (Fig 11) Large
Standard Deviation
Fig 14
Fig 11
13 To find the third largest number, use the following

LARGE function.(Fig 15)
10 To calculate the standard deviation, use the STEDV
function. (Fig 12) Small
Min Fig 15
Fig 12
14 To find the second smallest number, use the following

11 To find the minimum value, use the MIN function. SMALL function. (Fig 16)
(Fig 13)
Fig 16
Max
Fig 13
TASK 2: Practice on Date/Time Functions
1 Enter a date in Excel, use the "/" or "-" characters. To Fig 1

enter a time, use the ":" (colon). You can also enter a
date and a time in one cell. (Fig 1)
Note: Dates are in US Format. Months first,

Days second. This type of format depends
on your windows regional settings. Learn
more about Date and Time formats.

Year, Month, Day Current Date & Time
2 Get the year of a date, use the YEAR function. (Fig 2) 5 Get the current date and time, use the NOW function.
(Fig 5)
Fig 2
Fig 5
Note: use the TODAY function to get the current

Note: use the MONTH and DAY function to get
date only. Use NOW()-TODAY() to get the current
the month and day of a date.
time only (and apply a Time format).
Date Function
3 Add a number of days to a date, use the following Hour, Minute, Second
simple formula. (Fig 3) 6 Return the hour, use the HOUR function. (Fig 6)
Fig 3 Fig 6
4 Add a number of years, months and/or days, use the Time Function
DATE function. (Fig 4)
7 Add a number of hours, minutes and/or seconds, use
Fig 4 the TIME function. (Fig 7)
Fig 7
Note: the DATE function accepts three

arguments: year, month and day. Excel knows Note: Excel adds 2 hours, 10 + 1 = 11 minutes
that 6 + 2 = 8 = August has 31 days and rolls and 70 - 60 = 10 seconds.
over to the next month (23 August + 9 days = 1
September).
TASK : 3 Practicing Financial Functions
Pmt Fig 1
1 Select cell A2 and insert the PMT function. (Fig 1)
Note: The last two arguments are optional. For

loans the Fv can be omitted (the future value
of a loan equals 0, however, it's included here
for clarification). If Type is omitted, it is
assumed that payments are due at the end of
the period.

Result. The monthly payment equals $1,074.65. (Fig 2) Fig 5
Fig 2
Conclusion: if we make monthly payments of

$2,074.65, it takes less than 90 months to pay
off this loan.
Tip: when working with financial functions in
Excel, always ask yourself the question, am I
PV
making a payment (negative) or am I receiving
money (positive)? We pay off a loan of $150,000 5 Or the PV (Present Value) function. If we make monthly
(positive, we received that amount) and we payments of $1,074.65 on a 20-year loan, with an
make monthly payments of $1,074.65 annual interest rate of 6%. (Fig 6)
(negative, we pay). Fig 6
Rate
2 If Rate is the only unknown variable, we can use the
RATE function to calculate the interest rate. (Fig 3)
Fig 3
Fv
6 And the FV (Future Value) function. If we make monthly
payments of $1,074.65 on a 20-year loan,With an
annual interest rate of 6%, do we pay off this loan?
Yes. (Fig 7)
Fig 7
Nper
3 Or the NPER function. If we make monthly payments
of $1,074.65 on a 20-year loan, with an annual
interest rate of 6%, it takes 240 months to pay off this
loan. (Fig 4)
Fig 4
But, if make monthly payments of only

$1,000.00, we still have debt after 20 years.
(Fig 8)
Fig 8
4 We can change the monthly payment now to see how

this affects the total number of periods. (Fig 5)

TASK 4: Work with Text based functions
Join Strings Len
1 Join strings, use the & operator. (Fig 1) 5 Get the length of a string, use the LEN function.
(Fig 5)
Fig 1
Fig 5
Note: to insert a space, use " "

Note: space (position 8) included!
Left
2 Extract the leftmost characters from a string, use the Find
LEFT function. (Fig 2)
6 Find the position of a substring in a string, use the
FIND function. (Fig 6)
Fig 2
Fig 6
Right
3 Extract the rightmost characters from a string, use
the RIGHT function. (Fig 3) Note: string "am" found at position 3.
Fig 3 Substitute
7 Replace existing text with new text in a string, use
the SUBSTITUTE function. (Fig 7)
Fig 7
Mid
4 Extract a substring, starting in the middle of a string,
use the MID function. (Fig 4) Separate Strings
8 This example explains how to separate strings in
Excel. (Fig 8)
Fig 4
Fig 8
Note: started at position 5 (p) with length 3.

The problem we are dealing with is that we 3. Select the range B2:C2 and drag it down. (Fig 11)
need to tell Excel where we want to separate
Fig 11
the string. In case of Smith, Mike the comma
is at position 6 while in case of Williams,
Janet the comma is at position 9.
1 Get the first name, use the formula below. (Fig 9)

Fig 9
Number of Words
This example describes how to count the number

of words in a cell.
1 Use the LEN function to get the length of the string

Explanation: to find the position of the comma,
(25 characters, including spaces). (Fig 12)
use the FIND function (position 6). To get the
length of a string, use the LEN function (11 Fig 12
characters). =RIGHT(A2,LEN(A2)-FIND(",",A2)-
1) reduces to =RIGHT(A2,11-6-1). =RIGHT(A2,4)
extracts the 4 rightmost characters and gives
the desired result (Mike).
2 Get the last name, use the following formula. (Fig 10)
Fig 10
2 The SUBSTITUTE function replaces existing text with

new text in a string. LENS 9SUBSTITUTE (A1, B1,’’”))
equals 13 (the length of the string without the words
dog). If we subtract this number from 25, we get the
length of the dog instances (25-13=12). (Fig 13)
Fig 13
Explanation: to find the position of the comma,

use the FIND function (position 6).
=LEFT(A2,FIND(",", A2)-1) reduces to =LEFT(A2,6-
1). =LEFT(A2,5) extracts the 5 leftmost characters
and gives the desired result (Smith).
Dividing this number by the length of the word dog (3),gives

us the dog instances (12/3=4)
Number of Words
This example describes how to count the

number of words in a cell.

1a The TRIM function returns a string with extra spaces, Fig 18
starting spaces and ending spaces removed. (Fig 14)
Fig 14
1b Get the length of the string with normal spaces, we Fig 19

combine the LEN and TRIM function. (Fig 15)
Fig 15
1 Use the LOWER function to convert all letters in a

text string to lowercase. (Fig 20)
2a The SUBSTITUTE function replaces existing text with
new text in a text string. We use the SUBSTITUTE Fig 20
function to get the string without spaces. (Fig 16)
Fig 16
2 Use the UPPER function to convert all letters in a text

string to uppercase. (Fig 21)
Fig 21
2b.Get the length of the string without spaces, we
combine the LEN and SUBSTITUTE function. (Fig 17)
Fig 17
3 Use the PROPER function to convert a text string to

proper case. That is, the first letter in each word in
uppercase, and all other letters in lowercase. (Fig 22)
4 Now comes the simple trick. To get the number of
Fig 22
words, we subtract the length of the string without
spaces (10) from the length of the string with normal
spaces (12) and add 1. (Fig 18)
Lower/Upper Case
This example teaches you how to convert a text string to
lower, upper or proper case in Excel. (Fig 19)

Compare Text 4a.The CONCATENATE function produces the exact same
result. (Fig 26)
This example shows two ways to compare text
Fig 26
in Excel. One is case-sensitive and one is case-
insensitive.
1 Use the EXACT function (case-sensitive) (Fig 23)
Fig 23
4b.The CONCAT function in Excel 2016 produces the

exact same result. (Fig 27)
Fig 27
2 Use the formula =A1=B1 (case-insensitive). (Fig 24)
Fig 24
4c.The CONCAT function can also join a range of strings.

If user don't need a delimiter (space, comma, dash,
etc.) this can be useful. (Fig 28)
Fig 28
Concatenate Strings
5a.The CONCAT function cannot ignore empty cells. Take
This example illustrates four different ways to a look at all the extra spaces in column E below if
concatenate (join) strings in Excel. drag the function in cell E2 down to cell E11. (Fig 29)
Fig 29
3 Simply use the & operator to join strings. (Fig 25)
Fig 25
Note: to insert a space, use " "

5b.The TEXTJOIN function in Excel 2016 is that it can Note: the TEXTJOIN function joins a range of
ignore empty cells (if the second argument is set to strings using a delimiter (first argument)
TRUE). (Fig 30)
Fig 30
TASK 5: Logical function to arrive a decision

If Function
The IF function checks whether a condition is met, The AND function returns FALSE because the value in
and returns one value if TRUE and another value cell B1 is not higher than 5. As a result the IF function
if FALSE. returns Incorrect.
1 Select cell C1 and enter the following function. (Fig 1) Or Function
Fig 1 The OR function returns TRUE if any of the

conditions are TRUE and returns FALSE if all
conditions are false.
3 Select cell E1 and enter the following formula. (Fig 3)
Fig 3
The IF function returns Correct because the value in cell

A1 is higher than 10.
And Function
The AND Function returns TRUE if all conditions are true
and returns FALSE if any of the conditions are false.
2 Select cell D1 and enter the following formula. (Fig 2)
Fig 2

Perform Sort, Filter and Validity data in MS Excel 2010
• sort the data in a Table
• filter the data under certain conditions.
Requirements
• A working PC with MS Office - 1 No./batch.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Sort the data in a Table

1 Open a new file and enter the data's in the subsequent cells as shown in Fig 1.
Fig 1
2 Select the range from B1 to F21. A Context menu will appear as shown below
3 Click on drop down arrow in Sort & Filter button in Fig 3.
Fig 8
from Editing group as shown in Fig 2.
Fig 2
211
4 Select to sort the 6 Select
data in ascending order. A new window will appear as shown in Fig 4.

5 Select to sort the
data in descending order.
Fig 4
7 Click on the drop down arrow near the

Fig 6
A drop down list will appear with all the field

name in the table as shown in Fig 5.
Fig 5
10 Select "A to Z".
11 Click on
12 Select "Trade" field.
13 Click on Sort by level.
14 Select "Z to A".
8 Select "Quali" field 15 Click button.
9 Click on the drop down arrow near the The data's are now sorted according to our
requirement.
A drop down list will appear with all the field name 16 Select from Sort & Filter option.
in the table as shown in Fig 6.

22 Select "Quali" field.
17 Click on
23 Select "Z to A".
18 Repeat the step 11.
19 Select "Trade" field.
25 Select "DOR" field.
20 Select "A to Z".
26 Select "Oldest to Newest".
27 Click button.
TASK 2: Filter the data under certain conditions.
1 Select C1 & D1. Fig 8
2 Click on drop down arrow in Sort & Filter button
from Editing group as shown in Fig 7.
Fig 7
3 Click on Filter command. An Drop Down will be

displayed near the Heading "Quali" & "Trade" in the
Table as shown in Fig 9.
A Context menu will appear as shown below in Fig.8.
Fig 9
4 Click on the Drop down arrow and a drop down menu

related to it will displayed as shown in Fig 10.

Fig 10
5 Deselect some trade name by clicking on the check

box near it as shown in Fig 11.
Fig 11
6 Click button.

Create and Format various Static and dynamic charts in Excel 2010
• create a chart using given data
• make a static chart with Fixed values of table
• create a dynamic chart with updatable values of table.
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Create a chart using given data
1 Open a new file and enter the data's in the subsequent

cells as shown in Fig 1.
Fig 1
2 Save it with file name "Sales Report".
3 Select the cell D14 and type the formula given below
to calculate discount for the condition and press "Enter
key".
215
=IF(C14<3000, "NIL", IF(C14<=5000, C14*10/ Fig 2
100,IF(C14<=10000,C14*20/100,
IF(C14<=35000,C14*25/100,C14*30/100))))
4 Select the cell D14.
5 Move the mouse pointer to the right bottom corner of

the cell
A '+' sign will appear at the right bottom corner of The contents in C14 to C18 is added and the result
the cell will be displayed in C19.
6 Press the left button and drag till D18. 11 Copy the formula in C19 to D19 and E19.
The formula in D14 will be copied to D15, D16, 12 Select the cell C9
D17 & D18.
13 Type "=C19"
7 Select the cell E14 and type the formula given below
to calculate "Payable Amount" as Amount - Discount 14 Select the cell C10
and press "Enter key".
15 Type "=D19"
=C14-D14
The contents in C19 is also displayed in C9 and
8 Repeat the steps 5 to 6. the content in D19 is also displayed in C10.
9 Select Cells C14 to C18
10 Click from Editing group in Home Tab as shown

in Fig 2.
TASK 2: Make a static chart with Fixed values of table
1 Select the cells B13 to E18. 3 Click on the drop down arrow below the column button
2 Click on the tab.
from Charts group as shown in Fig.3.
Fig 3

A Context menu will appear as shown below in Fig Fig 4
4.
4 Select any one of the above chart type.
The chart will be inserted into the Excel worksheet

as shown in Fig 5.
Fig 5
80250
19975

Changing chart style and type. The colour combination and style of the bar
can be change by using
1 A new Menu is insert with sub group from Design tab.
Appearance of the legends and value in the
menus.
chart can be changed using
from Design tab
2 Select →
A new sub menu will appear as shown in

Fig 6.
Fig 6
3 Select from group. 6 Select from group.
A Context menu will appear as shown in

Fig 7. A Context menu will appear as shown in Fig 8.
Fig 7 Fig 8
7 Select
and type "Employees" and press Enter Key.
8 Select
and type "Amount" and press Enter Key.
Try with various options in Legend, Data La-

bels and Data Table and also try with various
4 Select from the above menu. options in axes and gridlines in Axes group.
5 Type the heading as "SALES REPORT". 9 Select →

‘Chart Tools’ menu will appear as shown in This menu is used to change the style, shape
Fig 9. and colour of the fonts used in the chart.
Fig. 9
Changing row & column, data.
1 Click on the chart. 3 Click on from group.
2 Select →
The row and column data with automatically
(Fig 10)
Fig 10
80250
19975
Amount
Employees

TASK 3: Create a dynamic chart with updatable value of table
1 Open a new file and enter the data's in the subse-
quent cells as shown in Fig 1.
Fig 1
2 Save it with file name "Mark Sheet".

5 Click on the tab.
3 Calculate the Total
6 Click on the drop down arrow below the pie button
4 Select B9 to C14.
from Charts group as shown in Fig 2.
Fig 2
A Context menu will appear as shown below The chart will be inserted into the Excel
in Fig 3. worksheet as shown in Fig 4.
7 Select any one of the above chart type.

8 Insert Chart Name and Other Options using Chart
Fig
ig 3
3
Tool → Layout.
9 Get it checked by the instructor.
Fig 4

Practice Importing and Exporting Excel data

Objective : At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• importing data into excel from Access database.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Importing data into Excel from Access Database
1 Click Data Tab

5 Select the cell where you want to import the Access
database as shown in Fig 2
2 Click From Access Icon in Get External Fig 2
Data Ribbon Group as shown in Fig 1
Fig 1
The select Data Source window will display 6 Click OK button.

on the screen
The output window will display as on Fig 3
3 Select the already saved MS-Access Data base file
and click Open.
Fig 3
The Import Data dialog Box will display on

the screen
4 Select the Table option
222
COPA - Computer Fundamentals
Perform data analysis using Pivot Table, Chart and Macros

• practice on pivot table and chart
• crreat a Macro and run
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Practice on pivot table and chart

1 Open a new file and enter the data's in the subse-
quent cells as shown in Fig 1.
Fig 1
223
2 Click somewhere inside the table to make the active
"Create Pivot Table" dialog box will appear as
cell inside the table.
shown in Fig.3.
3 Select tab.
5 Click button in the above dialog box.
4 Click button from group
A new worksheet will appear in the workbook, with
as shown
a special pane at right side of the screen as shown
in Fig.4.
in Fig 2.
Fig 2
6 Drag the "Trade" field and drop it under
pane and the screen appears as shown in Fig 5.
Fig 3

Fig 4
Fig 5

7 Drag the "Name" field and drop it under
pane and the screen changes its appearance as
shown in Fig 6.
Fig 6
8 Drag the "Trade" field and put it outside of the pane. Here Excel uses "Count" function to find the
number of persons under each qualification
9 Drag the "Quali" field and drop it under and "Sum" function to add the age of persons
pane. under each qualification.
10 Drag the "Name" field & "Age" field and drop it under 11 Double click on the word "Sum of Age".
pane. A "Value Field Setting" dialog box will appear

as shown in Fig 8.
The appearance of the screen will be as shown
in Fig 7.

Fig 7
Fig 8
12 Select Min option and press . 13 Double click on the word "Min of Age".
Now it will display the Minimum age comes under 14 Select Average option and press .
each qualification as shown in Fig.9.

Fig 9
Now it will display the Average age comes

under each qualification as shown in Fig.10.
Fig 10

15 Select c5 to c8.
Mini Toolbar buttons will appear on the screen
as shown in Fig.11.
16 Click the mouse right button.
17 Select "Decrease Decimal" to show fewer decimal
places.
Fig 11
TASK 2 : Sorting and Filtering data's in PIVOT Table.
1 Repeat the Steps 6 and 7 from Task I.

Fig 12
2 Click on the Drop down arrow near the
A context menu will appear as shown in Fig

12.
3 Select to arrange the name re-

versely.
You can change the order manually also by

dragging the names here and there
4 Deselect some trade name by clicking on the check

box near it as shown in Fig 13.

Fig 13 Now the worksheet will appear as shown in
Fig 14.
Fig 14
5 Double click on B4, to view the details of MMV group

as shown in Fig 15.
Fig 15

TASK 2 : Create a Macro and run
1 Click on the to open the drop down menu as 2 Click on the Excel Options button located at the bot-
tom of the menu to open the EXCEL Options dialog
box as shown in Fig 2.
shown in Fig 1.
3 Click on the Popular option at the top of the left hand
Fig 1 window of the open dialog box.
4 Click on the Show Developer Tab in the ribbon in the

right hand window of the open dialog box.
5 Click OK.
Fig 2

1 Open a new Excel File. 5 Type "f" in the check box in Shortcut key and press
OK.
2 Select A1 Cell and Type "COPA - SPREED SHEET
APPLICATION" and place the pointer in A1 cell. 6 Select tab.
3 Click on tab.
7 Click on Font group and from
4 Select from Code tab. Alignment group.
8 Click on Font face and change it as "STENCIL".
Record Macro will appear as shown in Fig 3.
9 Click on Font Size and change it as "14".
Fig 3
10 Click on Fill Color and select "Light Green".
11 Click on Font Color and select "Purple"
12 Select from Code tab.
Now the Macro for the above task is recorded.
13 Click on any cell and type "SAMPLE"
14 Press Ctrl+f.
Now the word will be displayed as

If the above formatting is required for any cell, it
can be available by just pressing Ctrl+f.

Page setup and printing in Excel Worksheet
• prepare an existing table to printing setup
• working with printing screen options and print the given Excel sheet
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Preparing an existing table to printing setup
1 Open the existing excel file as on Fig 1. 3 Set the print area in Page Layout Tab as shown in
Fig 3
Fig 1
Fig 3
4 Set the paper size and fit to 1 , and click ok as on

Fig 4.
Fig 4
2 Select the table as on Fig 2.
Fig 2
233
TASK 2: Working with printing screen options and print the given Excel sheet
1 After set the page layouts Click File menu and click 2 In Fig 6 window select number of copies, printer name,
Print option as on Fig 5 number of pages, page orientation
Fig 6
Fig 5
3 Finally click print button as on Fig 7
Fig 7
When select the print option , simultaneously
printing options and preview window will
display as on Fig 6

COPA - Spread sheet Application
Simple project work using in Excel
• prepare a employee due and drawn statement from December-2011 to February -2014
• prepare student list in word.
Requirements
TASK1: Prepare a employee due and drawn statement from December-2011 to February -2014.
235
1 Perform following criteria 5 DA rate is increased every 6 months
2 Give 3% increment in july month every year 6 If change December -2011 basic pay total difference
amount should be calculated automatically.
3 Use Roundup function for increment calculation and
rounded to nearest to 10 7 After finishing the exercise check with the instructor
for deduct the error.
4 HRA is 30% on basic pay
TASK2: Prepare student list in word.
Perform following criteria
1 Create a table 100 rows and 4 column 5 Change sl.no at 20 as 30 in single stroke by using “set
numbering value” option.
2. Top row used for header
6 Split table at sl.no.50 using “ split table “ option.
3 Give Sl.No. using numbers and bullets
7 After finishing the exercise check with the instructor
4 Apply header on each page using “repeat as header at for deduct the error.
the top of each page”. opton

COPA - Image Editing and Creating presentations
Edit image using MS Paint
• open image file in MS Paint
• resize, Crop the image according to size required
• save in different formats of image( JPG, PNG, BMP)
Requirements
• A working PC with MS Office 2007 - 1 No. /trainee
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Open image file in MS Paint
1 Type paint in the search box to open the paint app. 4 Click on the Open in the drop down menu.(Fig 3)
(Fig 1)
Fig 3
Fig 1
5 Select the image file you want to open and click Open
(Fig 4)
Fig 4
You can open the paint app using start menu

also. Click on Start button and scroll down to
the Paint tab.
2 Click on the Paint tab

3 Click on the File tab as in Fig 2.
Fig 2
In case the image file is not in the recent file,

search for the file in the drive or desktop the
file was earlier saved.
237
TASK 2: Resize, Crop the image according to size required
1 Open the Paint App 5 UntickMaintain aspect ratio, if you want to have
unequal resize percentage in horizontal and vertical
2 Open the image file to work on (Fig 5)
resizing of the image. Enter the resizing percentage.
(Fig. 8)
Fig 5
Fig 8
6 Click OK (Fig 9)
3 To resize the image click on the resize tab (Fig 6)
Fig 9
Fig 6
4 Change the Percentage or pixels according to the

required size. The aspect ratio can be maintained with 7 To Crop the image, Click Select and click either
the image skewed by the required degrees (Fig 7) Rectangular selection or Free-form selection.(Fig 10)
Fig 7 Fig 10

8 Select the portion of the file that should not be cropped 9 Click Crop (Fig 12)
by dragging and expanding the dotted lines(Fig 11)
Fig 12
Fig 11
TASK 3: Save in different formats of image( JPEG, PNG, BMP)
1 To save the edited MS Paint file , Click File ->Save as 2 Select the format the image should be saved (JPEG,
(Fig 13) PNG, BMP) (Fig 14)
Fig 13 Fig 14
3 Give the file a name and press Save

Editing images with open office draw

• create a drawing using open office draw.
• format the drawing.
• distort the image.
• create and edit 3D objects.
Requirements
• A working PC with open office - 1 No./batch.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Create a drawing using open office draw

1 Identify the 'Draw' workplace elements in the file menu
Fig 2
of ‘Draw (Refer Fig.1)
Fig 1
Method 3: Select a picture from the gallery. To select a

picture from the gallery, click on the gallery button in the
drawing tool bar. (Ref Fig 3)
Fig 3
4 The gallary window opens. Select a picture from a

category. Drag it into the drawing area. This will insert
2 Click on the 'New' button to start a new drawing. the picture.
3 Insert a picture. 5 Click again on the gallery button to close the gallery
window.
This opens a new changing window
Method 4: Insert a shape into the drawing area by clicking
Method 1: Insert a picture from a file or a scanner or from in the basic shapes in the drawing toolbar.For ex. Select
the drawing toolbar(Refer fig.2) the image 'Leaf1'.
Method 2: Click on "Open a document" to open a drawing 6 Then click on the drawing area, for ex. a circle and drag
you were already workingon. the mouse while still holding the left button down. This
will insert the circle in the drawing area.(Ref. Fig. 4)
240
Fig 4
TASK 2: Format the drawing
1 Insert a basic shape, for ex. a circle in the drawing area. 6 Align the object as needed by right clicking it and
selecting an option form 'Alignment'.
2 Resize the image by holding and drawing handles
displayed. 7 Convert it to a 3D image or choose from other options
available by right clicking on it and selecting the
3 Right click on the shape and select the 'Area' option. 'Convert' option. Change the transparency of this object
Change the fill color and transparency using the options and see the result.
provided.
8 Now select the object.
4 Right click on the shape and select 'Position and Size'
to change the position, size, slant angle and the 9 Click on the format tool bar and select page.
rotation of the image.
10 In the page setup window, select the background.
5 Right click on the image and select the 'Arrange' option
to bring to front, back etc. 11 Choose an appropriate option for the color. This will
change the background color of the page.
TASK 3: Distort the image:

1 Insert the image 'Leaf1' from the gallery into the workplace
Fig 5
following the steps mentioned in Task 1 steps c to e.
2 Select the image and click on the effects button in the
drawing tool bar.
3 Select the option 'distort'. A Pop window pops up asking
"Select the object to curve?". Click 'Yes'. The color of
the sizing handles changes now.
4 Click on any of the sizing handles and drag it any
direction. This distorts the picture.
5 The result will be as shown below. (Refer Fig.5)
6 Select the image and then click on the 'Points' button
in the drawing tool bar. Alternately you may select the
image and press F8 function key. An 'Edit Points' tool
bar appears now.
7 Click on the 'Insert points' button in the edit points tool
bar and click at any place on the selected image. A new
point is inserted now.
8 Click and Hold the new point and drag it to distort the 9 Similarly points can be deleted by clicking in a point
image.(Refer Fig. 6) and clicking in the 'Delete points' on the Edit Points
toolbar

Fig 6
TASK 4: Create and edit 3D objects
1 Insert a rectangle and a cylinder from the drawing tool 6 Right click the selection again and click on "Convert".
bar in the workplace. Color them as needed.
7 Select the option "To 3D". The object is now converted
2 Select the cylinder and click on "Effects button" on the to a 3D Object as in figure below.(Refer fig.8)
drawing tool bar.
Fig 8
3 Distort it to create a cone as shown in the following
figure.(Refer fig.7).
Fig 7
8 Right click on the object and select the option "3D

effects".
4 Select both the cylinder(now a cone) and the rectangle
using the shift key. 9 The 3D effects window appears with various options.
5 Right click on the selection and click on "Group". Now 10 Apply 3D effects from the available options and view the
both the objects are treated as one group. effect of each on the image.

Create Power point presentations

• open a Power point and creat a new document
• familiarize different Power point screen components.
Requirements
• A working PC with MS Office 2007 - 1 No./batch.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Open a Power point and creat a new document
1 Boot the system, if not booted Fig 1
2 Click Start Button
3 Select Programs
4 Click Microsoft PowerPoint (Fig 1)
5 PowerPoint window will open (Fig 2)
MICT110H1
Fig 2
MICT110H2
243
Create a New Presentation (Fig 3) Fig 3
1 Choose File Menu
2 Click New option (Short cut key : Ctrl + N)
3 Created a New presentation
MICT110H3
TASK 2 : Familiarize different Power point screen components. (Fig 4)
Fig 4 Fig 5
MICT110H4
MICT110H5
1 Choose Fie Menu

2 Click Open option which displays,
3 Displayed Save as window
3 existing presentation.
4 Type the name of the presentation "sample" (Fig 6)
4 Choose any one presentation " presentation1"
5 Choose saving location
5 Click Open button to open the presentation 1’
6 Click save button
Save a current Presentation
7 Saved current presentation "sample" (Fig 7)
1 Choose File menu
2 Click Save option (Fig 5)

Fig 6 Insert a New Slide
1 Choose Insert Menu

2 Click New Slide (Short cut key : Ctrl + M) (Fig 8)
Fig 8
MICT110H6
Fig 7
MICT110H7
Close the current presentation:

1 Choose file menu
2 Click Close option
3 Closed current presentation

Insert picture and theme in PowerPoint slideshow

• insert a picture from the web on a slide
• change a Theme of a presentation
• show presentation in slide show mode.
Requirements
• A working Computer with MS Office 2007 - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Insert a picture or images from the clipart gallery
1 Click-on the Insert tab and select the Clip Art image Fig 24
Fig
(Fig 1)
FigFig
3 1
Note: An imagesimilar to the one on theleft will

appear. (Fig 2)
2 Since the presentation tells how to make a peanut

butter and jelly sandwich, type sandwich in the Search
for: box.
Then click the Go button (see left arrows above). A
Microsoft Clip Art Task Pane then appeared as on the
left. (Fig 3)
Note: That there are a lot of sandwich clip art
images available. "run down" the choices by
using the "elevator bar" on the right side of the
Clip Art Task Pane.
3 Move up and down the selections and find one that fite.
(Fig 4)
4 We moved down the selections until our Clip Art menu
screen looked like the one on the right. We chose the Fig 3
Fig 5
"sandwich" on the right. moved our cursorover the above
of the image we chose and a blue selection barwith a "V"
appeared. We clicked the blue bar and the image and
drop down menuyou see on the right appeared. We
move our cursor over Insert and clicked.
246
Fig 4 Fig 6 Note: The menu will disappear and you will see
the image you selected on the right side of your
slide.
Slide 3 should look similar to the image on the right.

5 Before we go to Slide 4, we'll close the Clip Art Task
Pane on the right side of the screen. This will give us
more room in the center to work on the next slides.
(Fig 6)
Fig76
Fig
TASK 2: Change a theme of a presentation
1 When click Create New Theme Colors,the image on the Fig76

Fig
right will appear. (Fig 6) Fig 9
Fig 6 Fig 8
Fig 8Fig 10
2 Click on the theme color selection - sample area, which

appliens for each selection. (Fig 7)
Fig 8 is an image of the Theme Colors drop down menu for
Text/Background - Dark 1. As you choose colors - you will
see the result in the Sample area. (Fig 8)
3 On finishing color selection, sample is shown as in fig
We named our new theme - Your New Theme Color. You
can name your Themes anything you desire.
4 Name the theme as ‘sample’ which color be applid
letter.

TASK 3: Show presentation in slide show mode Fig 1
1 Click slide show tab.

2 Choose from begining button under start slide show
group.
3 Presentation display will appear on the screen. (Fig 1)

COPA - Create power point presentations
Add new slide, Format text, Link with word excel documents
• add a new slide and format layout
• format text and paragraph
• insert a word art for effect
• link with external documents
Requirements
• A working Computer with Ms Office 2007 - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Add a new slide and format layout
Note: Pick a pre-designed layout that matches 1 On the View tab click Slide Master.
the arrangement of text and other object
placeholders that you plan to put on your slide. 2 In Slide Master View, in the thumbnail pane on the left
click a slide layout that you want to change. (Fig 2)
1 On the View tab, click Normal. Fig 2
2 In Normal View, in the thumbnail pane on the left click

the slide that you want to apply a layout to.
3 On the Home tab click Layout, and then select the
layout that you want. (Fig 1)
Fig 1
3 On the Slide Master tab, to change the layout do one

or more of the following: (Fig 3)
Fig 3
4 Change a slide layout in Slide Master View
Note: If you are unable to find a slide layout that

works with the text and other objects that you
plan to put on your slides, change a layout in
Slide Master View.
249
4 To add a placeholder use slide Master and click Insert 6 To add a new layout click Insert Layout.
Placeholder, and then pick a type of placeholder from
7. To rename a layout, in the thumbnail pane on the left
the list.To rearrange a placeholder click the edge of the
right-click the layout that you want to rename, click
placeholder until you see a four-headed arrow, and the
Rename Layout, type the new name of the layout and
drag the placeholder to the new location on the slide.
then click Rename.
5 To delete a placeholder select the placeholder, and
then press Delete on your keyboard.
TASK 2 :Format text and paragraph
Note: About Line Spacing: Line spacing can Fig 5

either be measured in lines or points. For
example, when text is double-spaced, the line
spacing is two lines high. On the other hand,
you might set 12-point text with something like
15-point spacing, which gives enough height
for the text plus a little extra space. You can
reduce the line spacing to fit more lines on the
page, or you can increase it to improve
readability.Line spacing is also known as
leading
1 To Format Line Spacing

a Select the text you want to format.
b Click the Line Spacing button command in the Paragraph
group on the Home tab.
c Select the desired spacing option from the drop-down
menu.(Fig 4) 3 Paragraph Spacing
Note Just as you can format spacing between lines in your
Fig 4 document, you can also choose spacing options between
each paragraph. Typically, extra spaces are added between
paragraphs, headings, or subheadings. Extra spacing
between paragraphs helps to make a document easier to
read.
To Format Paragraph Spacing
1 Click the Line and Paragraph Spacing command on the
Home tab.
2. Select Add Space Before Paragraph or Remove Space
After Paragraph from the drop-down menu. (Fig 6)
Fig 6
2 Changing the line spacing

a From the drop-down menu, select Line Spacing Options
to open the Paragraph dialog box.
b Adjust the line spacing with even more precision.
c Select At least or Exactly in the Paragraph dialog box,
the line spacing will be measured in points. Otherwise,
it will be measured in lines. (Fig 5)

From the drop-down menu, you can also select Line even change their shape. If you want, you can format the
Spacing Options to open the Paragraph dialog box. From text inside the text box as WordArt, allowing you to apply
here, you can control exactly how much space there is 3-d effects and transformations to the text itself.
before and after the paragraph. (Fig 7)
To Insert a Text box:
Fig 7 1. Select the Insert tab on the Ribbon.
2. Click the Text Box command in the Text group. A drop-
down menu will appear.
3. Select Draw Text Box. (Fig 9)
Fig 9
Working with Columns

Columns are used in many types of documents, but are
most commonly used in newspapers, magazines, academic
journals, and newsletters.
To Add Columns to a Document
1 Select the text required to format.
2 Click the Column button wtih paragraph group command. 4 Click and drag on the document to create the text box.
3 Click the Columns command. A drop-down menu will (Fig 10)
appear. (Fig 8)
Fig 10
Fig 8
Drawing the text box

5. Start typing to create text inside the text box.
From the drop-down menu, you can also select one of the
4 Select the number of columns to insert.
built-in text boxes that have pre-defined colors, fonts,
(If you want to get rid of the columns, just click the Columns positions and sizes. If you choose this option, the text box
command and select One for the number of columns). will appear automatically, so you will not need to click and
drag to draw it. (Fig 11)
Text Boxes: You may want to insert a text box into your
document to draw attention to specific text or to have the
ability to easily move text around within a document. Text
boxes are basically treated the same as shapes, so you
can add the same types of effects to them, and you can

Fig 11
Note : The mouse pointer becomes a cross
with arrows on each end and looks like this:
3. Click and drag the text box to the desired location on the
page. (Fig 12)
Fig 12
To Move a Text Box

1 Click on the text box.
2 Hover the mouse over one of the edges of the text box.
TASK 3: Insert a word art for effect
Creating WordArt
Note: In addition to adding effects to a text box, Fig 13

you can also add effects to the text inside the
text box, which is known as WordArt. For the
most part, the types of effects you can add are
the same as the ones you can add to shapes or
text boxes (shadow, bevel, etc.). However, you
can also Transform the text to give it a wavy,
slanted, or inflated look.
To Apply a Quick Style to Text:

A Quick Style will automatically apply several effects to
your text at once. You can then refine the look of your text 4. Select the desired style preset to apply the style to your
by adding or modifying text effects. text.
1 Select the text box, or select some text inside of the After you have applied a Quick Style, you can still modify
text box. The Format tab will appear. the font or font color from the Home tab if desired. Select
the desired the desired effect preset. The effect will be
2 Click the Format tab.
applied to your text. If you can combine several different
3 Click the Quick Styles command in the WordArt Styles effects.
group. A drop-down menu will appear. (Fig 13)

Change shape 3 Click the Shape Fill command to display a drop-down
1 Click Change Shape to display a drop-down list. menu.
(Fig 14) 4 From the drop-down menu, you can select a color from
the list, choose No Fill, or select More Fill Colors to use
Fig 14 a color that's not on the list.
To Change the Shape Outline
1 Select the text box. The Format tab appears.
2 Click the Shape Outline command to display a drop-
down list. (Fig 17)
Fig 17
2 Select the desired shape from the list.

To Choose a Shape Style: Choosing a Shape Style allows
you to apply a preset fill and outline color, and in some
cases, other effects such as beveling and shadow. You
don't have to pick a style for your text box, but it can help
you save time or experiment with different appearances.
2 Select the Format tab.
3 Select a color from the list, choose No Outline, or select
3 Click the More drop-down arrow in the Shape Styles More Outline Colors to use a color that's not on the list.
group to display more style options. (Fig 15)
4 From the drop-down menu, you can change the outline
color, weight (thickness), and whether or not it is
Fig 15
adashed line.
To Change Shape Effects
2 Select the Format tab.
3 Click the Shape Effects command.
4 Hover the mouse over the styles to see a live preview. 4 Click Shadow.
5 Select the desired style. 5 Move your mouse over the menu options to see a live
To Change Shape Fill preview in your document. (Fig 18)
1 Select the text box. The Format tab appears. Fig 18
2 Click the Format tab. (Fig 16)
Fig 16
6 Click the desired option to select the shadow effect.To

choose a different shadow color for your shape, select
Shadow Options from the drop-down menu and click
the Color button.
TASK 4: 3-D Effects
Note :Just like other types of shapes, text boxes To Use Bevel
can have 3-D Effects. There are two kinds of 1 Select the text box.
effects that you can apply to your shapes to give
them a 3-D appearance: 3-D Rotation and Bevel. 2 Click on the Format tab.
3-D Rotation gives the appearance that you are 3 Click Shape Effects from the Shape Styles group.
viewing the object from a different angle, and
it can be applied to any shape. Bevel adds 4 Hover the mouse over Bevel. A drop-down menu will
thickness and a rounded edge to shapes, appear. (Figs 21 & 22)
however it doesn't work with every type of
shape. Fig 21
To Use 3-D Rotation

1 Select the text box.
2 Click on the Format tab.
3 Click Shape Effects from the Shape Styles group.
4 Hover the mouse over 3-D Rotation. A drop-down menu
will appear. (Fig 19)
Fig 19
Fig 22
Fig 23
5 Select the desired rotation preset from the drop-down

menu. You can also click 3-D Rotation Options if you
would prefer to type in custom values. (Fig 20)
Fig2120
Fig
5 Select the desired bevel preset from the drop-down

menu, You can also click 3-D Options if you would
prefer to type in custom values.
If you click on 3-D options, you'll also be able to change
the shape's Material to give it a metal, plastic, or
translucent appearance, and you can choose the lighting
type to change how the shape is illuminated.

TASK 4: link with external documents (word/excel) 1 Click where you want to embed the file.
2 On the Insert menu, click Object, and then click From
Embed information from one file in a different file file.
If you want the two files to remain connected but you do not 3 Locate and click the file that you want to embed.
want the main file to update when the other file is changed,
you can embed the information. For example, suppose that If you embed an Excel sheet, it must be the first sheet in
you want to embed the latest sales returns in your monthly the workbook.
status report. The status report is a PowerPoint presentation, 4 Click Insert, and then click OK.
and the sales returns are on an Excel sheet. By embedding
the sheet in a presentation, the two files remain connected. If you can't see the information in the embedded file, drag
(Fig 23) a sizing handle until you see the file contents.
Fig
Fig23
24

Practice animation and transition effects

• insert a simple animation to text
• arrange timings for each animation
• set transition between slides.
Requirements
• A working Computer with Ms Offcie 2007 - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Insert a simple animation to text
1 When the Slide 1 Normal View screen appears,

Fig 1
2 click on the first line of text.
3 The first Text Box will appear as below. (Fig 1)
4 When you see the above Text Box, highlight the text.
When you do, you will again see the Drawing Tools Tab
appear.
5. Click the Drawing Tools Tab and the Drawing Tools

Ribbon will again appear - just like it did for WordArt.
(Fig 2)
Fig 2
Arrange timings for each animation 3 When the drop down menu appears click Custom
Animation… (Fig 3)
1 Click the Animations Tabagain,
4 The following Custom Animation Task Pane will appear
2 Thenclick the down triangle to the right of Custom
on the your screen.When this screen appears, first,
Ani….
click Add Effect,Then click Entrance, and finally click
Fig 3
More Effects (because we want ALL of the effects).
(Fig 4)
5 The Add Entrance Effect menu screen will appear.
(Fig 5)
6 Move your cursor over the blue Add Entrance Effect
"bar" at the top of the menu screen. Click and hold down
the left mouse button and drag the menu screen to the
right of your screen so that you cansee the textin the
Title text box. After you have moved this box raise your
finger from the left mouse button.
256
Fig 4 Fig 6
Fig 5
Fig 7
Choose one of the effects by clicking-on it. You will now

be able to see the animation effect in the Text box. You
may hear a sound that is "part" of your Slide Transition.
We'll show you how to add sounds for your text in a Well cover dimming and all at once when we animate text
moment. in slide2.
Notice - on the right side of the screen - under Custom Go ahead and experiment with Entrance effects and
Animation - that the Titles (on which we added effects) are sounds for your first slide. (Fig 8)
shown as a part of this screen (just like when we created
our flying bat on Slide 9).
Fig 8
Also notice, on the right side of our second title there is a
small, down pointing arrow. If you click-on this arrow it will
show you each line of text that you animated in the lower
sub-title box. (Fig 6)
Now we'll enhance our text some more. (Fig 7)
Move your cursor over the first title and click the left mouse
button. Next click the small down arrow on the right sideof
this box. You will see a menu screen appear that will let
you enhance your title (just like you did in Slide 9). Choose
(click)Effect Options and the menu screen below will
appear.
This screen is similar to the one in slide9, but a little
different. Notice that we chose magnify for our text effect
and then chose laser for our sound.

TASK 2: Arrange Timings for each animations
Name: Created set times on the Animations Tab 3 click the circular area to the left of Using timings, if
for your slides, and desire to have the show present. Look over the other choices in this menu
screen. Notice that there are a lot of enhancements in
1 Run in "automatic," click theSlideShowTab and then this Set Up Show menu screen. Experiment, as you
desire.
2 Clickthe Set Up Slide Show button. (Fig 9)
4 Click theOKbutton when you have made your changes.
Fig 9 5 if they desire to have the show repeat continuously, is
the Loop continuously until 'Esc' selection. This is
indicated by an arrow to the Show options area. (Fig 12)
Fig 12
The following Set Up Show menu screen will appear.

(Fig 10)
Fig 10
6 Clickon Slide Show Taband then select Rehearse

Timings. (Fig 13)
Fig 13
7 A small, rehearse timings "box" will appear (image

above). It will "show" a running clock on the right side
of the menu - that indicates the time for the entire show.
In the Advance slides box (Fig 11)
Fig 11

TASK 3: Set transition between slides
1 Now well add some pizzazz to our presentation. When

Fig 18
you viewed your slide show, a few moments ago, it was
like "flopping down" plastic transparencies on an overhead
projector." Now add some motion, animation, sound,
and color and really make our presentation something
to view. (Fig 14)
Í More Arrow
Fig 14
6 Transitions are neat, visual actions, as we move from

slide to slide in our show. To get a "feel" for what
Transitions do, click the More Arrow in the lower right
corner of the Transition to This Slide Group. (Fig 19)
2 Go to the Slide Sorter button at the bottom right area of
the screen.
Fig 19
3 Click on the button with four white squares.
4 You can now seeall nine slides (as shown below).
Notice that Slide 9 (the one with the flying bat) does not
show the path of the bat. This is because of the motion
path - not a big deal. Lightly,click once on the first slide
to highlight the slide (an orange border will surround the
slide - see arrow below). Now point in the MIDDLE of
Slide 1 and click on your RIGHT mouse button. (Fig 15)
Fig 15
A Transition selection screen similar to the image on the

right will appear.
5 If you accidentally quick twice on Slide 1, this will take
you to the Slide View, again. If this happens, simply 7 So, let's get started in creating some movement
click on the Slide Sorter View button at the bottom of the (transitions) as we enhance our PowerPoint slide show.
screen, just like you did on the last page.With Slide 1 Remember that we clicked-on Slide 1 to begin this
"marked," click the Animations Tab. The Animations process.
Ribbon will again open. (Fig 16)
We have enlarged the Fades and Dissolves and Wipes
Fig 16 sections of the Transitions image on the last page. We
moved our cursor over Wipe Up and clicked on it. Immediately
our Slide 1 Transitioned with a Wipe Up. (Fig 20)
Fig 20
For previous PowerPoint users, this is another "totally
new" method. (Fig 17)
Fig 17
8 AtthebottomoftheTransition to This Slide Group there is

Notice in - the Animations Ribbon a Group - Transition to a Random area. One of the choices has a Question
This Slide. (Fig 18) Mark ( ? ). We chosethis selection and then chose
Apply to All Slides. So, when we show our slides, each
slide will transition with a different effect. (Fig 21)

Fig 21 Also notice that there is a Transition Speed selection in this
same area. You may change your transition from Fast to
Medium or Slow. (Fig 24)
Fig 24
9 Go ahead and try as many Slide Transitions as you

desire. When you have one you like, look at the lower
left corner of Slide 1. You will see a small "shooting"
star. This means that a transition has been applied to
this slide. If you click the star, you will see the transition
you selected will Play again. (Fig 22)
Fig 22
11.You may also add a Sound to your transition. Click the

small down arrow to the right of Transition Sound. A
drop down list of sounds will appear. We chose Chime
for our Slide 1 Transition.
Notice at the bottom of the "list" it indicates Other
Sound…. When we found the bat sound on Microsoft
Office Online, it placed the sound in our Clip Art
Organizer. To use this sound we had to choose Other
Sound. When we did, it was added to our list at the top.
As you get more comfortable with sounds, you can find
some really neat sounds all over the internet. (Fig 25)
Fig 25
10 You can repeat the above process by clicking on each

slide and selecting a different transition for each slide.
Or - Notice - on the right side of theTransition to This
Slide Group - you can select Apply to All. And the
transition you choose will be applied to all of your
slides. It's up to you on how you want each slide to
transition - or not transition. (Fig 23)
Fig 23

Insert Video and Audio presentations

• insert external Video into presentations
• insert a recorded audio into presentations.
Requirements
• A working Computer with MS office 2007 - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Insert external Video into presentations

1 Click the Movie button on the Insert tab 2 ChooseMovie from File or Movie from Clip Organizer
(Fig 1)
Fig 1
To edit the video options: 4 Click the Format tab (Fig 2)

3 Click the movie icon
Fig 2
TASK 2: Insert a recorded audio into presentations
Audio clips can be added to the presentation. To add an 3 Play CD Audio Track, orRecord Sound (Fig 4)
audio clip:
To edit the audio options:
1 Click the Audio button on the Insert tab
4 Click the audio icon
2 ChooseSound from File, Sound from Clip Organizer
(Fig 3) 5 Click the Format tab
Fig 3
Fig 3
Fig 78
Fig 4
261
Modify Slide page setup and print the slides

• change the slide sizep
• print your PowerPoint slides, handouts, or notes
• print slides with background images.
Requirements
• A working Computer with MS Office 2007 - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: change the slide size
1 On the Design tab, in the Customize group at the far

right end, click Slide Size.(Fig 1)
Fig 1
2 Click Custom Slide Size. (Fig 2) 4 Click OK.

5 PowerPoint now asks you to choose between
Fig 2
maximizing the size of your content on the new layout
(to do this, click Maximize) or scaling it down so that
all of the content fits into the new layout (to do this,
click Ensure Fit).
Note: If you choose to maximize, some content

might fall outside the print margins. (Fig 4)
Fig 4
3 In the Slides sized for list, click the size you want to
use, or use the Width and Height boxes to select
custom sizes. (Fig 3)
Fig 3
g3
262
Note: Unlike Word document pages, Fig 6
PowerPoint slides don’t have margins that you
can adjust to change the slide layout. Your slide
stretches from edge to edge. When you print
the slides, printer limitations can result in a
white edge around the slides. However, you
can change the margins inside Text Boxes and
Shapes.
Change the slide orientation

Although wide format landscape presentations are most
popular, you might find that your slides work better in
vertical, portrait mode.
Note: You can change the orientation of the

entire presentation only, not individual slides.
Note: You can also change the orientation of
1 On the Design tab, in the Customize group, click your notes, handouts, and outline.
Slide Size.
4 Click OK.
2 Click Custom Slide Size. (Fig 5)
5 PowerPoint now asks you to choose between
Fig 5
maximizing the size of your content on the new layout
(to do this, click Maximize) or scaling it down so that
all of the content fits into the new layout (to do this,
click Ensure Fit). (Fig 7)
Fig 7
3 Change the orientation for the slides to Portrait or

Landscape. (Fig 6)
Note: If you choose to maximize, some content

might fall outside the slide.
TASK 2 :Print your PowerPoint slides, handouts, or notes
Print slides
Fig 1
1 Select File. (Fig 1)
2 Select Print.

3 Select Full Page Slides, and then choose Full Page 4 Set the other printing options you want, and click Print.
Slides from the Print Layout list. (Fig 2)
Print an outline
Fig 2 1 Select File. (Fig 5)
Fig 5
4 Set the other printing options you want, and click Print.
Print slides with speaker notes 2 Select Print.
1 Select File. (Fig 3) 3 Select Full Page Slides, and then choose Outline
from the Print Layout list. (Fig 6)
Fig 3
Fig 6
2 Select Print.
3 Select Full Page Slides, and then choose Notes
Pages from the Print Layout list. (Fig 4)
Fig 4
4 Set the other printing options you want, and click Print.

TASK 3 : Print slides with background images
1 Open the PowerPoint presentation that contains the 4 Select Automatic in the Change Selected Object group
coloured background. or right-click the background and select Grayscale
setting, then select Automatic.
2 Click the View tab, and then select the Slide Master
button under the Presentation Views group. 5 Select Back to Colour View in the Close group of the
Grayscale tab.
3 Click the View tab, then select Grayscale in the Colour/
Grayscale group. 6 Select Close Master View in the Close group of the
Slide Master tab. (Fig 1)
Fig 1 Fig 5

Create simple project using power point presentation

• create simple project for India tourism.
TASK 1 : Simple project for india tourism

1 Create slide show for India Tourism, At least for 5 major 2 slide show should cover Description page , Images
cities. page and transport facilities page for each place.
266
COPA - Database Management with MS-Access
Create Database and design a table in Access

• open an Access Database
• create a new Database
• design a simple table in Access
• save and Close Database
• open Existing table
• to add and Save Records
• navigate between table
• edit a Record
• delete a Record
• resizing fields and rows
• hide/unhide Fields
Requirements
• A working PC with MS Office - 1 No. /trainee
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Openan Access Database
1 Invoke Access application package by following
sequence
g
Microsoft Access splash screen appears for the Fig

Fig 21
movement and screen as fig.1 appears
TASK 2: Creat a New Database

Fig 2
1 Click on Fig
Fig 42
2 Enter the name (give your own name) of the database

in the space provided as shown in Fig 2.
267
3 Click
A new database will open with the filename

given (Here COPA SEM1 as shown in Fig.3
Fig
Fig 36
TASK 3: Design a simple table in Access
1 Click 'Create' tab 5 Select a field name to be set as Primary key and click
2 Click 'Table Design' from Table group the mouse right button. A pop menu will appear on the
screen as shown in Fig.6
3 A new table will appear as shown in Fig.4
Fig 6
Fig 8
Fig
Fig34
Fig 7
6 Select .
4 Enter the name of the field in 'Field Name' column and
type of the field in 'Data Type' column as shown in Fig.5 7 A symbol will appear near the field name as shown
Fig
Fig 48
Fig5 in Fig 7.
Fig 7
Fig 9

TASK 4: Save and Close database
1 Select 'SAVE' option from 'FILE' menu to save the table. 2 Select Close Database.
3 If any unsaved objects, a dialog box will pop up for each
A dialogue box will appear as shown in Fig 8
one asking to save it. Select Yes to save the object, No
to close it without saving, or Cancel to leave database
Fig13
8
open.
Fig Fig15
Fig 10
3. Select 'Exit' option from 'FILE' menu to close the MS

Access.
2. Type the Table Name as 'Customers' and press 'OK'.

2. Type the Table Name as 'Customers' and press 'OK'.
To close a database:
1 Click the File tab to go to Backstage View.
Fig 14
Fig 9
TASK 5: Opening an Existing table
1 Open your database, and locate the Navigation pane. Fig16

11
Fig
2 In the Navigation pane, locate the table alreaddy created
to open. Tables are marked with the icon.
3 Double-click the name of the table. It will open and
appear as a tab in the Document Tabs baras show on
Fg 11.

TASK 6: To add a new record c Simply begin typing in the row below last added record.
(Fig 14)
There are three ways to add a new record to a table:
a In the Records group on the Home tab, click the New Fig 14
Fig 19
command. (Fig 12)
Fig17
Fig 12
To save a record
1 Select the Home tab, and locate the Records group.
2 Click the Save command.
Be sure to save any unsaved records before closing a table.
b On the Record Navigation bar at the bottom of the
Access will not prompt to save them when table is closed.
window, click the New Record button. (Fig 13)
(Fig 15)
Fig 13
Fig 18 Fig
Fig 2015
TASK 7: Navigating within tables
1 To navigate records in a table, use the up and down

Note: Other method to find any record in the
arrow keys, scroll up and down, or use the arrows in the
currently open tableis by searching for it using
record navigation bar located at the bottom of table.
the record search box. Simply place cursor in
Click on to go next record, the search box, type any word that appears in
the record you want to find, and press Enter. To
click on 3symbol to go previous record, click on
view additional records that match search
|symbol to go to first record,
criteria, press Enter again.
click on | symbol to go to last record,click on

symbol to Add new record, (Fig 16)
Fig
Fig2116

TASK 8: Edit records:
1 To quickly edit any record within a table, simply click 2 Access also has the ability to find and replace a word
it and type any changes required. within multiple records, as well as to delete records
entirely.
TASK 9: Delete a record:

1 Select the entire record by clicking the gray border at 3 Click the Delete command. The record will be
the left side of the record. permanently deleted.
Fig22
Fig 17 Fig 2318
Fig
Fig 18
2 Select the Home tab, and locate the Records group.

Note :The ID numbers assigned to records stay
the same even after you delete a record.
TASK 10 : Resizing fields and rows
To resize a field:
1 Place cursor over the right gridline in the field title. Fig 20
Fig25
Fig 20
mouse will become a double arrow As shown in

Fig 19.
Fig24
Fig 19
To resize a row:
1 Place cursor over the bottom gridline in the gray area to
the left of the row. Mouse will become a double arrow
2 Click and drag the gridline to the right to increase the 2 Click and drag the gridline downward to increase the
field width or to the left to decrease the field width. row height or upward to decrease the row height.
3 Release the mouse. The field width will be changed. 3 Release the mouse. The row height will be changed.
(Fig 20)

TASK 11: Hidingand Unhiding fields Fig 27
Fig 22
To hide a field:
1 Right-click the field title.
2 From the drop-down menu, select Hide Fields. (Fig 21)
Fig26
Fig 21
3 The field will be hidden.

4 To make Field visible again, Right-click any field title,
then select Unhide Fields. In the dialog box, click the
check boxes of any fields to be visible again, then click
Close. (Fig 22)

Modifying Properties of Tables and Fields

• to add a new field to an existing table
• to move a Field
• change data type of Existing Fields
Requirements
• A working PC with Access - 1 No./batch.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: To add a new field to an existing table:

1 Open the table, then click the header with the text Click 2 A drop-down menu will appear. Select the data type for
to Add as shown in Fig1. the new field.
Fig 1 3 Type a name for your field, then press Enter as Shown
in Fig 2.
Fig 2
TASK 2: To move a field:

1 Locate the field want to move, then move mouse over the 2 Click and drag the field to its new location. (Fig 4)
bottom border of the field header. cursor will become a
four-sided arrow. (Fig 3) Fig 4
Fig 3
3 Release the cursor. The field will appear in the new

location.
273
TASK 3: To change the data type for existing fields:
1 Select the field which data type to be changed. 4. The field data type will be changed. Depending on the
2 On the Ribbon, select the Fields tab, then locate the data type chosen.
Formatting group. Click the Data Type drop-down
arrow.
Fig 7
Fig 5
3. Select the desired data type.
Fig 6
Note : Don't change field data type unless you

are certain your field data is in the correct
format for the new data type. Changing a field
containing only text to the Number type, for
instance, will delete all of field data. This
process is often irreversible.

Create relationship between Multiple tables

• create Multiple Table
• create Relationship.
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Create three tables with the following Table Structure and set the primary keys as per the procedure
told in earlier Exercises.
Fig 1
Fig 2
Fig 3
TASK 2: Creating Relationship
1 Click the Relationships command in the Show/Hide

group on the Database Tools tab in the Ribbon.
2. When the Show Table dialog box appears:
NOTE: Tables must be closed in order to establish • Select each table name, then click Add for the tables
relationship to relate. close the Show Table dialog box.
275
Fig 4
• Drag the field name from one table to the other table in
the desired relationship.
• Drop the first field name onto the field name to relate by
releasing the left mouse button. As shown In the
example above, selected the Book ID field from the
Books table and dragged and dropped it on the Book ID
field in the Orders table.
• The Edit Relationships dialog box appears.
• Select Tables and Fields.
Fig 8
• A relationship map that contains all of the tables that

were selected will be shown as Fig 5.
Fig 5 • Select the Enforce Referential Integrity option.
• Create one to one and one to many relationship as
shown in above figure.
Note: To create a one-to-one relationship Both

of the common fields (typically the primary key
and foreign key fields) must have a unique
index. This means that the Indexed property for
these fields should be set to Yes (No Duplicates).
If both fields have a unique index, Access creates
a one-to-one relationship.
To create a one-to-many relationship The field
on the one side (typically the primary key) of the
There are a few ways to establish relationships relationship must have a unique index. This
between tables: means that the Indexed property for this field
should be set to Yes (No Duplicates). The field on
• Using the Edit Relationships command located on the the many side should not have a unique index.
Design tab of the Ribbon It can have an index, but it must allow duplicates.
• Using the drag-and-drop method This means that the Indexed property for this
field should be set to either No or Yes (Duplicates
3 To relate tables with the drag-and-drop method: OK). When one field has a unique index, and the
• Select a field name from one table by holding down the other does not, Access creates a one-to-many
left mouse button. relationship.
Fig 6

Create and format Forms

• Create Form Through Wizard
• Developing Customized Form
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Creating a form through wizard.
1 In the Navigation pan select the Customer table, then

Click on Create tab on the Ribbon, click on Form
Wizard.
Fig 1
2 The Form Wizard appears as shown in Fig 2.

Fig 3
3 Click the Tables/Queries list arrow and select the table
or query you want to use to create your form .
Fig 2
Click Next when you're finished.
4 Add a field to the form by select and click on Right arrow

button or double-click the field
277
5 Next the Form Wizard asks how to lay out the data on 6 Enter a title for your form in the text box and select to
the form Select the layout you want to use for the form either open the form or modify the form's design. Click
and click Next. Finish. The form appears in the window.
Fig 4 Fig 5
TASK 2: Developing Customized Form

1 In the Navigation pane, select the table you want to use 2 Select the Create tab, locate the Forms group, and
to create a form&do not need to open the table. click The Form command.
Fig 6
3 The form will be created and opened in Layout view. 4 To save the form, click the Save command on the Quick
Access Toolbar. When prompted, type a name for the
Fig 7 form, then click OK.
Fig 8
To open an existing form:

1 Open your database, and locate the Navigation pane.
2 In the Navigation pane, locate the form you want to
open. Forms are marked with the icon.
3 Double-click the name of the form. It will open and
appear as a tab in the Document Tabs bar.

To add a field to a form: 4 The field will be added.
1 Select the Design tab, then locate the Tools group on To add a field from a different table:
the right side of the Ribbon.
1 From the Field List pane, click Show All Tables.
2 Click the Add Existing Fields command.
2 Click the plus sign + next to the table that contains the
field you want to add, then double-click the desired field.
Fig 7
The new field will be added.
Fig 10
3 The Field List pane will appear. Double-click the desired

field(s).
Fig 9

Create Simple queries with various criteria and calculations

• create a single table query and run a query
• run a Query
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: To Create a table query and run a query

1 Select the Create tab on the Ribbon, and locate the 4 The selected table will appear as a small window in the
Queries group. Object Relationship pane. In the table window, double-
2 Select the Query Design command. click the field names to include in query. They will be
added to the design grid in the bottom part of the screen.
Fig 1 In above example, if we want to mail invitations to
customers who live in a certain area, so we'll include the
FirstName, Last Name, Street Address, City, State,
and Zip Code fields.
Fig 3
3 Access will switch to Query Design view. In the Show

Table dialog box that appears, select the table you want
to run a query on. Click Add, then click Close. To run
a query about customers, add the Customers table.
5 Set the search criteria by clicking the cell in the Criteria:

Fig 2
row of each field you want to filter.
6. Type criteria into more than one field in the Criteria: row
will set your query to include only results that meet all
of the criteria. If you want to set multiple criteria but don't
need the records shown in your results to meet them all,
type the first criteria in the Criteria: row and additional
criteria in the Or: row and the rows beneath it.
• For this one-table query, we'll use very simple search
criteria.
• If We want to find customers who live in a city called
Chennai, so in City field, type "Chennai". Typing "
Chennai" in quotation marks will retrieve all records with
an exact match for Chennai in the City field.
280
Fig 4
7 After you have set your criteria, run the query by clicking
the Run command on the Query Tools Design tab.
Fig 5
8 The query results will be displayed in the query's

Datasheet view, which looks like a table. Save query by
clicking the Save command in the Quick Access
toolbar.
9 When prompted to name it, type the desired name, then
click OK.
Fig 6
Create Simple queries with various criteria and calculations

Objectives: This shall be able to
• create a single table query
• run a Query.
TASK 1 : Creating a multi-table query and run
1 Select the Query Design Command from the Create tab 2 In the Show Table dialog box that appears, select each
on the Ribbon. table to be include in query, then click Add. After
adding all of the tables, click Close..
Fig 7
Fig 8

3 The tables will appear in the Object Relationship pane, 5 In the table windows, double-click the field names to
which is linked by a join line. Double-click the thin include in your query. They will be added to the design
section of the join line between two tables to edit its join grid in the bottom part of the screen.Include most of the
direction. fields from the Customers table: First Name, Last
Name, Address, City, State, Zip Code, and Phone
Fig 9
Number. We'll also include the ID number from the
Orders table.
Fig 11
4 The Join Properties dialog box will appear. Select an

option to choose the direction of join.
• Choose option 2: for a left-to-right join. In above query,
the left table is the Customers table, so choosing this
would mean all of the customers who met our location
criteria-whether or not they had placed an order-would 6 Set field criteria by entering the desired criteria in the
be included in results. We don't want to choose this criteria row of each field. We want to set two criteria:
option for our query.
• First, to find customers who do not live in Chennai, we'll
• Choose option 3: for a right-to-left query. Because our type Not In ("Chennai") in the City field.
right table is our Orders table, selecting this option will
let us work with records for all of the orders and only the • Second, to find customers who have a phone number
customers who've placed orders. choose this option for beginning with the area code 919, we'll type Like
our query because this is exactly the data we want to ("919*") in the Phone Number field.
see.
Fig 10
Fig 12 Fig 13

7. After you have set your criteria, run the query by clicking 8. The query results will be displayed in the query's
the Run command on the Query Tools Design tab. Datasheet view, which looks like a table. If you want,
saveyour query by clicking the Save command on the
Fig 12
Fig 14 Quick Access toolbar. When prompted to name it, type
the desired name, then click OK.
Fig15
Fig 13

Create Simple update, append, make table, delete and crosstab queries
• Create Make table Query
• Create Append Query
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Create a make table query

Step1: To create a make table query first create
select query then convert it to a make table
Query.
Create the select query
1 On the Create tab, in the Query group, click Query 3 In each table, double-click the field or fields that you
Design. want to use in your query. Each field appears in a blank
cell in the Field row of the design grid.
Fig 1
Fig 3
2 In the Show Table dialog box, double-click the table

Sales created in previous exercise from which to
retrieve data. Each table appears as a window in the
upper section of the query designer. Click Close when
have finished adding the tables.
Fig 2
4 Optionally, add any expressions to the Field row.

5 Optionally, add any criteria to the Criteria row of the
design grid.
6 Click Run to run the query and display the results in
a datasheet.
7 Optionally, change fields, expressions, or criteria and
rerun the query until it returns the data that you want
to place in your new table.
Convert the select query
1 Open your select query in Design view, or switch to
Design view.
2 On the Design tab, in the Query Type group, click Make
Table.
284
Fig 4 Co 63. a. 5 • If it isn't already selected, click Current Database, and
then click OK.
b Place the new table in another database:
• Click Another Database.
• In the File Name box, enter the location and file name
of the other database.
a The Make Table dialog box appears.
-or-
Fig 5
Click Browse, use the new Make Table dialog box to
locate the other database, and click OK.
• Click OK to close the first Make Table dialog box.
• Click Run , and then click Yes to confirm the operation.
Fig 6
3 In the Table Name box, enter a name for the new table.
-or-
Click the down-arrow and select an existing table name.
4 Do one of the following: Note: If you replace an existing table, Access first
deletes that table and asks you to confirm
a Place the new table in the current database: thedeletion. Click Yes, and then click Yes again
to create the new table.
TASK 2: Create a query to select the records to copy

1 Open the database and customers table created in 3 Double-click the Customers table and then click Close,
earlier exercise that contains the records. The tables or queries appear as one or more windows
in the query designer. Each window lists the fields in a
2 On the Create tab, in the Queries group, click Query
table or query. The figure below shows a typical table in
Design.
the query designer.
Fig 7
Fig 9
a The query designer opens, and the Show Table dialog

box appears
Fig 8

4 Double-click each field that you want to append. The • In the Table Name combo box, enter the name of the
selected fields appear in the Field row in the query destination table, and then clickOK.
design grid Step 3: Choose the destination fields
Note: The data types of the fields in the source The way that you choose destination fields depends on
table must be compatible with the data types of how create your select query in Step 1.
the fields in the destination table. Text fields are If Access leaves fields blank, you can click a cell in the
compatible with most other types of fields. Append to row and select a destination field. The figure
Number fields are only compatible with other illustrates how you click a cell in the Append to row and
number fields. For example, you can append select a destination field.
numbers to a text field, but you cannot append
text into a number field Fig 12
5 To quickly add all the fields in a table, double-click the

asterisk (*) at the top of the list of table fields. The figure
on the right shows the design grid with all fields added.
6 On the Design tab, in the Results group, click Run .
7 Verify that the query returned the records that you want
to copy. If you need to add or remove fields from the
query, switch back to Design view and add fields as
described in the preceding step, or select the fields that
you don't want and press DELETE to remove them from
the query.
Step 2: Convert the select query to an append query
1 On the Home tab, in the View group, click View, and
Step 4: Preview and run the append query
then click Design View.
1 To preview your changes, switch to Datasheet view or
2 On the Design tab, in the Query Type group, click
right-click the tab at the top of the query, and then click
Append.
the view that required
Fig 10 2 Return to Design view, and then click Run to append
the records.
Fig 13
a The Append dialog box appears.
Fig 11
3 Click yes to confirm the append ,Note that changes

cannot be undone.
3 Next, specify whether to append records to a table in

the current database, or to a table in a different database.
Do one of the following:
a In the Append dialog box, click Current Database,
select the destination table from the Table Name
combo box, and then click OK.
-or-
b In the Append dialog box, click Another Database.
• In the File Name box, enter the location and name of the
destination database.

TASK 3: Create and run an update query
Note: make back up of database before run an 4 Select the table Customers created in earlier exercise
update query. Changes cannot be undone after that contain the records, click Add, and then click
executing an update query Close.
a The table or tables appear as one or more windows in
Step 1: Create a select query to identify the records to the query designer, and the windows list all the fields in
update each table.
1 Open the database that contains the records you want 5 Double-click the fields that you want to update in the
to update. table windows.
2 On the Create tab, in the Queries group, click Query a The selected fields appear in the Field row in the query
Design. design grid.
Fig 1 b You can add one table field per column in the query
design grid.
c To add all the fields in a table quickly, double-click the
asterisk (*) at the top of the list of table fields in the table
window.
6 To limit the query results based on field values, in the
query design grid, in the Criteria row, enter the criteria
that you want to use to limit the results.
7 On the Design tab, in the Results group, click Run.
a The query designer opens, and the Show Table dialog
8 Verify that the query returns the records that you want
box opens.
to update.
3 Click the Tables tab.
a To remove any fields that you do not want included in the
Fig 2 query design, select the fields and then press DELETE.
b To add any fields that you want to include in the query
design, drag the additional fields to the query design
grid.
Step 2: Update the records
1 In Design view, on the Design tab, in the Query Type
group, click Update.
Fig 3

2. Locate the field that contains the data that you want to
Fig 5
change, and then type your expression (your change
criteria) in the Update to row for that field.
You can use any valid expression in the Update to row
The illustration shows an update query that update city
from "Chennai" to "Bangalore" for customer whose first
name is "Sunil"
Fig 4 3. On the Design tab, in the Results group, click Run.
a. An alert message appears.
4. To run the query and update the data, click Yes
TASK 4: Create and run an Delete query
Important: Make sure that you have a backup of your Step1 : To open a database in Exclusive mode
database before you delete the data.
1 Click the File tab, and then click Open.
What to verify before using a query to delete data
2 Browse to and point to select the database,
• Ensure that the database file is not read-only. To do so,
in Windows Explorer, right-click the database file and 3 click the arrow nextto the Open button, and then click
then click Properties. Open Exclusive.
• Verify that have the necessary permissions to delete Fig 6

records from the database. If not sure, contact your
system administrator or the database designer.
• Make sure that you have enabled content in the database.
By default, Access blocks all action queries (delete,
update, and make-table queries) unless you first trust
the database.
• Ask other users of the database to close all tables,
forms, queries, and reports that use the data that you
want to delete. This helps avoid lock violations.
• Before you edit or delete records, back up the database.
You cannot reverse operations that are performed by Create and use a delete query
delete and update queries, so making a backup copy 1 On the Create tab, in the Queries group, click Query
ensures that you can always reverse your changes. Design.
a The Show Table dialog box appears.
2 Double-click each table from which you want to delete
records, for example use Customers Table created in
earlier Exercise.and then click Close.

Fig 7 5) On the Design tab, in the Results group, click View, and
then click the Datasheet View.
6) Verify that the query returns the records that you want
to delete, and then press CTRL+S to save the query.
7) To run the query, double-click the Run query in the
Navigation Pane.
Confirmation message will appear on the secreen as
shown below , Click Yes to delete the records
Fig 9
a The table appears as a window in the upper section of

the query design grid. The window lists all of the fields
in the selected table.
3 Double-click the asterisk (*) to add all of the fields in the
table to the design grid.
4 Optionally, double-click any field that you want to use
to specify criteria for deletion, enter one or more criteria
in the Criteria row of the designer, and then clear the
Show check box for each criteria field.
Important: Use criteria to return only the records that needs
to be deleted. Otherwise, the delete queryremoves every
record in the table.
Fig 8

TASK 5: Create Simple Crosstab Query
1 Create Student Records table and Enter Some Records

Fig 3
as shown.
2 In the table shown below, there are three students in
total, secured different marks in the respective courses.
Fig 1
NOTE: Two new rows are added in field pane

below by the name of Crosstab and Total. Now
in the Crosstab row, click small drop-down
button for options and select Row Heading for
assigning Course field as row heading. In the
next row beneath the Name field, select Column
Heading from drop-down options. Select Value
for Marks field and in it's corresponding row
3 Navigate to Create tab to create query, (above), select Sum from drop-down options.
4 click Query design for design view.
5 Add table to see the contents. Fig 4
Fig 2
7. Click Run to run the query and display the results in

a datasheet
Note: Now Course, which was column heading

earlier is converted into row heading, and
names of the students which was row heading
earlier is changed into column headings,
resultantly now don't need to scroll down to see
6 Now head over to Design tab and hit Crosstab
the details of any student.

Modifying form design with controls -1

• Modify form design
• Add controls to the Form
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Modify form design
To resize form components: 3 Click and drag the edge to resize, and release when the
1. Switch to Layout view. field or button is the desired size.
Fig 1 Fig 3
4 The field or button-as well as every other item in line with

it-will be resized.
Fig 4
2 Select the field or button you want to resize, and hover

your mouse over the edge. The cursor will become a
double-sided arrow.
Fig 2
291
Fig 6
Fig 5
Form View: The normal view where can view, add,and edit
records. Form Structure can't be modified in this view.
Change Form views Layout View:, Layout View allowsto apply formatting and
1 Click the Design tab on the Ribbon, click the View rearrange fields while also displaying data.
button list arrow and select a view option. Design View: Use for in-depth modification
andcustomization of your form. Live data is not visible- here
only working with the structure of the form.
TASK 2: Adding Form Controls
To create a combo box:

1 In Form Layout view, select the Form Layout Tools 4 The Combo Box Wizard dialog box will appear. Select
Design tab and locate the Controls group. the second option, I will type in the values that I want,
then click Next.
2 Select the Combo Box command, which looks like a
drop-down list as shown in Fig1
Fig 3
Fig 1
3 Cursor will turn into a tiny crosshairs and drop-down list

icon . Move the cursor to the place where to insert the
combo box, then click. A yellow line will appear to 5 Type the choices to appear in your drop-down list. Each
indicate the location where the combo box will be choice should be on its own row.
created. As shown in Fig2.
For example, to create a combo box for the Add to Mailing
Fig 2 List? field in the form, Enter all of the possible valid
responses for that field. Users will be able to select one of
three choices from finished combo box as shown Fig3:
No, Yes-Weekly, and Special Offers Only.

Fig 4 8 Enter the label, or the name that will appear next to
combo box.
Fig 8
6 If necessary, resize the column so all of text is visible.

click Next.
Fig 5 9 Click Finish. combo box will appear on the form
10 Switch to Form view to test the combo box. Click the
drop-down arrow and verify that the list contains the
correct choices. The combo box can now be used to
enter data as shown in fig 8.
Fig 8
To add a command button to a form:

7 Select Store that value in this field, then click the drop-
1 In Form Layout view, select the Form Layout Tools
down arrow and select the field where you want
Design tab and locate the Controls group.
selections from your combo box to be recorded. After
making selection, click Next. 2 Select the Button command.
Fig 1
Fig 6
3 cursor will turn into a tiny crosshairs with a button icon

Place it in the spot where command button to be
inserted , then click.

Fig 2
• To include a picture, select the Picture option. To keep
the default picture for that command button, or you can
select another picture. Click Show All Pictures to
choose from another command button icon or Browse...
to choose a picture from the computer.
Fig 5
4 The Command Button Wizard will appear. In the

Categories pane, select the category of button to add.
choose the Record Navigation category.
5 The list in the Actions pane will update to reflect chosen
category. Select the action the buttonhas to perform,
then click Next.choose Find Record.
7 After selecting appearance of command button, click
Fig 3 Next.
8 Type a name for the button. This name won't appear on
the button, but knowing the name will help to quickly
identify the button if ever want to modify it with the
Property Sheet. After typing the button name, click
Finish.
Fig 6
6 Now decide whether button to include text or a picture.

A live preview of button appears on the left.
• To include text, select the Text option, then type the
desired word or phrase into the text box.
Fig 4
9 Switch to Form view to test the new button. Our Find

Record button opens the Find and Replace dialog box.
Fig 7

Modifying form design with controls -2
• adding option Buttons to the Form
• adding Checkboxes to the form.
TASK 1 : Adding Option Buttons (Radio Buttons) Bound to a table column (field)
1 Makea Accounts table with AccountClosed field as of
Yes/No Data type as shown in Fig1.
4 As soon as the Option Group is drawn on the form, the
Fig 8 Option Group Wizard will launch. The Option Group
Wizard takes care of setting up the Option Group and
binding it to a column (field) in a table.
5 The first step in the Option Group Wizard is to assign
labels to each option. For this example assign the
following to the labels: Account Open and Account
Closedas shown in Fig4. Click on the Next> button to
continue:
Fig 11
2 Save and close the Accounts table .Create

AccountsDataEntry form and open up the form in
Design View. With the AccountsDataEntry form opened
in Design View, click on the Design item in the ribbon
bar and scroll thorugh the controls list until find the
Option Group control as shown in Fig 2.
Fig 9
6 In Option Group Wizard set the default choice for the

Option Group. select the Account Open as the default
value and click on the Next> button to continue:
Fig 12
3 Click on the Option Group control and then draw the
option group on the form.
Fig 10
295
7 The next step in the Option Group Wizard is to assign Fig 15
a value to each of the option group's options. These
values must be an integer. When binding to a table
column (field) with the "Yes/No" data type, the values
assigned need to be 0 and -1
Fig 13
10 The final step of the Options Group Wizard is to give a

Caption for Option Group. This Caption will appear
above the option group. For example type in: Account
Status and click on the Finish button to complete the
wizard:
Assign the values as shown in the Fig6 below and click on
the Next> button to continue: Fig 16
8. Once the user select an option and the value from the
prior step is assigned, Access can either hold on to the
value or pass it along to a specific column (field) in the table.
In this case bind the Option Group to the AccountClosed
field by selecting the second option and selecting the
AccountClosed field from the list. Click on the Next> button
to continue:
Fig 14
11 Once the Option Group Wizard is completed, the new

object will appear on the form. Once in place it can be
re-sized and moved. The properties (such as Option
Value) can also be changed.
12 Save the form and switch to Form View to test the
Option Group functionality.
Fig 16
9 Customize the content and appearance of the Option

Group or set the defaults of Option Buttons with the
Etched style. Click on the Next> button to continue:

TASK 2: Adding a Check Box Bound to a table column (field)
Note: When bound to a table, check boxes must 3 Save the AccountsDataEntry form and open it up in
bind to a field with a special data type. So the Form View. Note the check box is set up and ready to
first step is to add such a column (field) to the use.
Accounts table. Make sure
AccountClosedColumn(field) is added as type Fig 18
Yes/No as shown in previous task while using
Option group.
1 Save open up the AccountsDataEntry form we used

previously in Design View. With the AccountsDataEntry
form opened in Design View, click on the Design item
in the ribbon bar and then click on the Add Existing
Fields button.
2 When the list of fields from the Accounts table appears,
drag the AccountClosed field from the list to the form as
shown below:
Fig 17

Import and export data to and from access

• to import the data to access
• to Export the data from access
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: To Import datato MS Access
1 In Access, on the External Data tab, in the Import 3 Select the first option, Import the source data into a new
group, select the Excel command button (see Fig 1). table in the currentdatabase (default option) (see Fig 2).
The Get External Data - Excel Spreadsheet window Select OK. The Import Spreadsheet Wizard window
opens. opens (see Fig 3). This starts the Import Wizard.
Fig 1 Fig 3
2 In the File name box, provide the location (path) and

name of Excel workbook (see Figure 2, #1). Select
Browse to help locate the file to be imported.
Fig 2
4 Select the worksheet to import (see Figure 3). This
screen only shows if worksheet has multiple sheets.
You can also select a range.
5 Select Next.
6 Always use column headings. Make sure every column
has a heading. Check the box for First Row Contains
Column Headings (see Fig 4).
298
Fig 4
8 Select Next.
9 Select Let Access add primary key (default option) (see
Figure 6). Primary keys uniquely identify each record in
table. They allow to retrieve data more quickly and help
ensure accuracy in data.
Fig 6
7 Select Next.
8 If required modify each field in the Field Options box
(see Figure 5).
Fig 5
11 Select Next.
12 Name the table in the Import to Table field (see Fig 7).
Fig 7
Note: following while importing Data:

• If column names need to be changed ,
select the column and enter a new name
in the Field Name box.
• If a column is searched frequently and
contains a lot of data, select the column.
13.Select Finish.
For the Indexed option, selec Yes. Indexing
a column makes it easier and faster to find
data.
• Set a data type for each field if required ,
though Access will do that. Data types
control what data can enter into a field.
• To remove a column, select the Do not
import field (Skip) check box.

TASK 2: EXPORTING DATA TO EXCEL
Note: Here is a list of items to keep in mind 5 In the Export - Excel Spreadsheet dialog box, review the
before export: suggested file name for the workbook (Access uses the
name of the source object). If you like, you can change
• Must be in Access.
the file name (see Figure 2).
• Can only export one object at a time (i.e.
a table, query, or form) Fig 8
• Cannot export macros or modules to Excel

• If an object contains subobjects, only the
main object can be exported at a time. If you
need to export the other subobjects, repeat
the export process for each subobject.
• Once all subobjects are in Excel, can
merge the data in multiple worksheets.
Step 1: PREPARING ACCESS DATA FOR EXPORT

1 Open the source database.
2 From the Navigation Pane, select the object want to
export. It can be a table, query, report, or form.
3 Review the source file to make sure it doesn't contain
any errors.
4 If there are errors, must resolve them before export to 6 In the File Format box, select the file format
Excel, otherwise, errors can occur during the export (see Fig 2).
process and null values might be inserted into fields.
7 If exporting a table or query, and you chose formatted
5 If the object is a table or query, you can export the data data, select Exportdata with formatting and layout (see
with or without its formatting. The difference affects two Figure 2).
aspects - the amount of data that is exported and the
display format of the data. Note: If exporting a form or report, this option is
always selected butunavailable (it's dimmed).
Step 2: RUN THE EXPORT PROCESS
8 To view the workbook after the export process is done,
1 Close the destination workbook if open. Open the destination fileafter the export operation is
2 In the Navigation Pane of the database, select the complete check box (see Figure 2).
object you want to export (remember, only one object 9 If the source object is open, and you selected a
at a time). record(s) in the view before starting the export operation,
3 If the object is a table, query, or form, and you want to select Export only the selected records. Do not check
export just a portion of the data, open the object in this box to export all the records displayed in the view.
Datasheet view and select the records you want. Note: The check box is grayed out if no records
4 On the External Data tab, in the Export group, select are selected.
Excel (see Fig1). 10 Select OK.
Fig 8 Note: If the export process fails because of an
error, Access displays a messagedescribing
the cause of the error.

Create and format various types of reports

• create Reports using Design mode
• printing Reports
TASK 1: To create a report:
1 Open the table or query to use in the report. Fig 2 Fig 10

2 Select the Create tab on the Ribbon, and locate the
Reports group. Click the Report command.
Fig
Fig 19
5 To save your report, click the Save command on the

Quick Access toolbar. When prompted, type a namefor
your report, then click OK.
FigFig
113
3 Access will create a new report based on the object.

4 It's likely that some of your data will be located on the
other side of the page break. To fix this, resize the
fields. Simply select a field, then click and drag its edge
until the field is the desired size. Repeat with additional
fields until all fields are fit.
To delete a field in a report:

1 Click any cell in the field you want to delete.
2 Press the Delete key.
TASK 2 :Printing and saving reports in Print Preview
To print a report:
1 On the Home tab of the Ribbon, click the View command 2 If necessary, modify the page size, margin width, and
and select Print Preview from the drop-down list. Your page orientation using the related commands on the
report will be shown as it will appear on the printed page. Ribbon.
301
Fig
Fig412 4 The Print dialog box will appear. Set any desired print
options, then click OK.
Fig
Fig15
7
Fig13
Fig 5
Saving reports
You can save reports in other formats so they will be
viewable outside of Access. This is called exporting a file,
and it allows you to view and even modify reports in other
formats and programs.
Access offers options to save your report as an Excel file,
text file, PDF, XPS file, email attachment, rich text file, or
HTML document. Experiment with the different export
options to find the one that best suits your needs.
3 Click the Print command.

Fig 6 Fig 14
Create Report Using Report Wizard

• create Report Using Report Wizard.
TASK 1: To create a report using the Report Wizard:
1 Select the Create tab and locate the Reports group. 2 The Report Wizard dialog box will appear.
Click the Report Wizard command.

Fig158 Fig 11
18
Fig
Fig Fig
16 9
Fig
Fig 12
19
Step 1: Select the fields to include in report

1 Click the drop-down arrow to select the table or query Step 2: Organize the report
that contains the desired field or fields.
1 Access will offer a list of several organization options.
Fig17
Fig 10 Select an option from the list to preview it.
Fig
Fig 13
20
2 Select a field from the list on the left, and click the right
arrow to add it to the report. 2 Click Next when satisfied with the basic organization of
3 Add fields from more than one table or query if required data.
by repeating the above steps. Once added the desired 3 If not satisfied with the way the data is organized,
fields, click Next. modify the grouping levels.

• Select a field from the list, and click the right arrow to Fig
Fig 2316
add it as a new level.
Fig13
Fig
Fig 14
21
Step 4: Select a layout and title

1 Click the various layout options to see how they look,
then select one to use in your report.
• If necessary, modify the order of your grouped fields by 2 Select either a portrait (tall) or landscape (wide)
selecting a field and clicking the up or down Priority orientation for your report.
arrow to move it up or down a level. Fig24
17
Fig
Fig 15
Fig 22
3 Once satisfied with the report layout, click Next.

4 Place cursor in the text box and type the title for the
report.
4 Once satisfied with the organization of the report, click 5 Select whether t to preview the report or modify its
Next. design, then click Finish.
Step 3: Sort report data
Fig25
Fig 18
1 Click the top drop-down arrow, and select the name of
the first field you want to sort.
2 Click the button on the right to change the sort to
ascending or descending.
3 Add any additional sorts. You may sort up to four fields.
The sort will be applied from top to bottom, meaning the
sort at the top of the list will be the main sort.
4 When satisfied with the way the data is sorted, click
Next.

Compress and Encrypt the database

• Encrypt the Database
• Decrypt the Database
• Compress the Database
• Take backup and restore
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: To Encrypt Access Database File
Note: Before encrypting or decrypting access Step 3: In Set Database Password dialog, enter a powerful
database, please pay attention to something password in Password box and type it again in Verify box.
about encryption/decryption: Click OK to finish access database encryption.
Step 1: When access database file is open in Microsoft Fig 3

Access 2010, tab File > Info.
Fig 1
Step 2: Click Encrypt with Password under information

about database. Sometimes, maybe you will receive a
message to ask you to open access database with Open
Exclusive mode at first, otherwise you cannot encrypt
database. When this happens, click OK and follow the
prompting message to do.
Fig 2
305
TASK 2 : To Decrypt Access Database File
Step 1: Open Microsoft Access, and select access Fig 5

database directly in the Access database list. Or click
Open button to open a dialog, to browse to location of
encrypted access database in computer. Select the
database file and choose Open Exclusive in Open mode.
Fig 4
Now encrypted access Database is but not decrypted, To

decrypt access database file do.
Step 4: Turn to File > Info, click Decrypt Database.
Unset Database Password dialog appears. Enter database
password in Password box and click OK.
Fig 6
Step 2: Once selected the encrypted access database

and are ready to open it in Microsoft Access. A dialog
would pop up to ask for database open password.
Step 3: Type database password in Enter database
password box. Click OK.
TASK 3: To Compress Database an Access
1 Close all the database which are open. 4 Provide a new name for the compacted database in the
Compact Database Into dialog box and click the Save
2 From the Database Tools Ribbon select Compact and
button.
Repair Database to open the "Database to Compact
From" dialog box. 5 Verify that the compacted database works properly.
3 Navigate to the database to compact and repair and 6 Delete the original database and rename the compacted
then click the Compact button. database with the original database's name. (This step
is optional.)
Fig 7

TASK 4: To make a backup copy of access database
1 Open the database for which to create a backup. Now 3 In the right, under File Types, choose Save Database
database is open in Access 2010. As.
2 Click File tab, and choose Save & Publish. 4. Under Save Database As option, move to Advanced,
and select Back Up Database. Click Save As.
Fig 8
5 In Save As window, specify a location and File name
for backup of database. Click Save.
Fig 9
TASK 5 : To Restore data or objects from Access database backup
To restore data from Access database backup, just choose To preserve bad objects and restore right objects, do like
a known good copy and paste it where Access database following.
saves which you want to replace with backup.
• Compare it with the restored version after restore,
To restore objects from Access database backup, you
• Rename the object before restore it. For example, if you
should make sure whether you want to use objects in
want to restore a damaged form named Checkin, you
backup to replace objects that ones in Access database
can rename the damaged form Checkin_bad. Delete
which contains bad or missing data or has stopped working
the object that you want to replace.
correctly, or you want to restore missing objects.

COPA - Configuring and Using Network
View network connections

• view and change the IP address of your computer
• establish connection between two computers.
Requirements
• A working PC with internet connection - 1 No./batch.
TASK 1 : View and change the IP address of your computer
Note to the instructor: Network icon should be placed on the desktop
1 Choose the network icon and right click from the desk- 2 Choose "Properties"
top.
Note: A "View your basic network information
Note : A menu displayed on the screen as on and setup connection" window appears as on
Fig 1. Fig 2.
Fig14
Fig 1 3 Click "Change adapter setting" option as shown in
Fig 2.
Note : A menu gets displayed on the screen.
4 Choose "Local area connection" and right click it
Note: A "Local area connection properties"

window appears on the screen as shown in
Fig 3.
5 Choose "Internet protocol version4 (TCP/IPv4)"
6 Click "Properties"
Note : Internet protocol version 4 (TCP/IPv4)

windows appears on the screen as on Fig 3.
308
FigFig
15 2
Fig 3
Fig 16
7 View and note down the IP address and subnet mask

8 Click "Obtain an IP address automatically"
and fill the following given table.
Note: As the radio button is clicked, the IP
IP Address address gets cleared as on Fig 4
Subnet mask
Class
Gateway

Fig 17Fig 4
9 Click "Use the following IP address" 10 Type "10.0.0.1" in the IP address and press tab key as
on Fig 5.
Fig 18Fig 5

Note: The subnet mask gets automatically 11 Click ok in "Internet protocol version 4 (TCP/IPv4) prop-
filled as on Fig 6 erties window
12 Click ok in "Local area connection properties" window.
Fig 19
Fig 6
TASK 2 : Establish connection between two computers (P2P)
1 View and note the IP address of two computers 4 In First computer (Check connectivity) Press Windows
button and R key simultaneously to invoke Run dialog
2 Insert one end of the cross cable in Ethernet port on box
the rear side of the CPU (First Computer)
5 Type 'cmd' and press Enter key to invoke DOS prompt
3 Insert another end of the cross cable (prepared in Task
2) in Ethernet port on the rear side of another CPU 6 Type "ping <IP address of Second computer>" and
(Second Computer) press Enter key
Note : If you get a 'Reply' as shown in Fig 7,

there is a connectivity between first computer
and second computer

Fig 20
Fig 7
6
Note :If you get the message ‘Request Timed

out ’as shown in Fig 8, then there is no
connectivity between first and second
computer
Fig Fig
21 8
Note : By repeating steps 4,5 and 6 in second FigFig

22 9
computer you can check the connectivity
between second computer and first computer
7 Get it checked with the instructor
Note : Using cross cable you can connect only

two computers in a peer to peer network. To
Connect more than two computers in a peer to
peer network you need a Hub/Switch as shown
in Fig 9.

Installing NIC card and sharing a printer with network

• install network interface card
• share the printer, folder and drives with the network
• change sharing option for different network profiles
• set sharing option and permissions specific files or folders in local network
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Install network interface card

6 Locate the expansion slots in the motherboard.
1 Shut down the system if it is on.
2 Remove all cables connecting to the computer. Note : Expansion slots are either long black
strips or short white strips. ISA slots are black.
3 Locate the screws holding the case cover in place on PCI slots are white. Open slots are those that
the frame. do not have other boards inserted in them.
4 Remove the screws attaching the cover to the frame.
7 Determine which interface (ISA or PCI) your card uses.
Note : Many new systems have tight cases and/
or special cases. Removing the casing might Note : ISA is long and the gold contacts are
require some prying. Use a flat-head large. PCI is much shorter and smaller.
screwdriver to push the case open against the
front panel. Seek assistance if you cannot 8 Check to see if the expansion slot opening next to
open the case alone. If the case seems really the slot is covered. If it is, remove the cover by un-
peculiar, check your computer's user manual screwing it from the frame or popping it out.
first to see if they instruct you on how to open 9 Insert your card into the expansion slot on the
your computer. motherboard as shown in Fig 2. Press firmly so the
5 Place the open computer frame on its side with the entire part of the card that has the gold contacts goes
motherboard facing up as shown in Fig 1. completely into the expansion slot on the motherboard
and will go no further
Fig 1
Note : Make sure the side of the card
resembling the expansion slot cover you just
removed is covering most of the open slot.
10 Screw the card into place with the screw you removed
from the expansion slot cover or a new screw.
Fig 2
Note : This means you can see the

motherboard from a bird's eye view. The
motherboard is the biggest board you can see
within the frame. It usually covers an entire
side and has other smaller boards sticking up
from it. 313
11 Replace the case and screw it back in place after con- 13 Turn on the power.
firming the proper placement of the card.
14 Refer to your user's manual to install the proper drivers
from the disk(s) that came with the card.
Note : Make sure you did not leave any tools
or screws within the computer. 15 Check the status of installed card (NIC) in device
manager
12 Reconnect all the cables to their proper places.
16 Get it checked with the instructor
TASK 2 : Share the printer, folders, and drives with the network
1 Share the printer panel as follows : Note : There you will see a list with all exter-
Start Control panel Hardware and Sound nal devices installed on your PC as in Fig 3.
Devices and Printers
Fig 3
2 Select the printer you want to share, right click on it 3 Click on the Sharing tab.
and select Printer properties.
Note : There, you will have some options
Note : Now you will see a window with all the similar to the Fig 4.
printer properties. Depending on the model
of your printer, and its drivers, you can see
different sets of options.

Fig 4
4 Select any check box that says 'Share this printer'. 5 Click on OK.
Note : Then, you can edit the printer share Note : Now the printer will be shared with the
name which, in most cases, is by default computers on your network.
completed by Windows with the name of your
printer model. If you want to change it, type Share the folder or drives
the name you want to use.
1 Open 'File Explorer".
Note : "Render all print jobs on the client 2 Select the folder or drive you want to share the net-
computers" can help keep performance levels work.
up on the computer where the printer is 3 Right click the mouse button and select properties .
plugged in, especially when big printing jobs
4 Select sharing tap and click advance sharing button.
are ordered. When this option is checked, all
the print jobs are rendered on the computers 5 Choose share this folder and click "OK" button.
which order the print job, not on the computer
on which the printer is plugged.
TASK 3 : Change sharing option for different network profiles
1 In Windows, right click the Network connection icon Fig 5

in the system tray as shown in Fig 5.

2 Click open Network and internet setting as on Fig 6. Fig 8
Fig 6
3 On the network status page, scroll down and click

Network and sharing center as on Fig 7.
Fig 7
Fig 9
4 In the left pane, click change advanced sharing

settings as on Fig 8. Note: There are sharing settings for your
5 Select both turn on network discovery and turn on file private profile, guest or public profile and all
and printer sharing in the sharing profile need to change networks.
as on Fig 9.
TASK 4 : Set sharing option and permissions specific files or folders in local network
1 In windows, search for and open File Explore. 5 Click the down arrow and select the user you want the
share with, if the user is not listed, type the user name
2 Browse to the folder you want to share.
and then click add.
3 Right - click the folder, select share with and the click
6 Clica an arrow under permission level to set the
Home Group (view), homegroup (view and edit) or
permission level for each user or group as on Fig 11.
specific people as on Fig 10.
Fig 10 Fig 11
4 If you choose specific people, the file sharing window

is displayed.

Identification of different cables and connectors used in networking

• identify various network devices, cables and connectors used in networking
• create straight and cross cable and punch a UTP cable in the patch socket
• testing the cable connectivity with the LAN tester
• create workgroup and check the network connections
• create a home group on a local network.
Requirements
Materials/components • Thin coaxial cable RG48 -5m.

• BNC connector -1No.
• UTP cable (CAT 5) -5m.
• T connector -1No.
• RS232 communication cable -10 core cable • Terminator -1No.
(5 metres).
• RS232 9 pin female & 25 pin -1 No.each. Tools/Equipments/Instruments
male connectors
• RJ45 jack -1 No.
• DMM -1No.
PROCEDURE
TASK1: Identify cables and connectors
1 Identify a labelled component referring to Table 1 and 3 Get the work checked by your instructor.
record the details in the Record sheet.
2 Repeat step 1 and record the details in the Record
Sheet.
Record sheet
Table 1
Cable/ connector Label Brief application
UTP cable No.of pins colour code Printedmark
Coaxial cable
RJ 45 connector No.of pins
T connector
Terminator Resistance between inner and outercore
RS232 cable Thinkness No.of cores
RS232 connector 9 pin type female 25 pin D-type male
317
TASK 2 : Create straight and cross cable and punch a UTP cable in the patch socket
Note to instructor : Instructor must arrange the required Fig 3a
length of cross cable, the tool for crimping and two
computer for making connection as shown in Fig 1.
Fig 1
Fig 4
1 Use crimping tool (as shown in Fig 2) to cut through a

cable and strip the cable jacket/insulation using cable
stripper/ crimping.
Fig 2
Fig 4a
Note : Crimp tools have two blades. One

designed to cut the cable and other to strip
the jacket. While stripping the cable care
should be taken not to cut the internal wires.
Remove the jacket insulation about an inch.
When the jacket insulation removed you will Note : The color code wiring order is different
find eight wires twisted in to four pair (for CAT for both ends in cross cable
5 cable as in Fig 3) and a separator inside the
• Cross over cable
CAT 6 cable as shown in Fig 3a
• One end (Fig 4)
Fig 3
• Other end (Fig 4a)
4 Grasp the wires firmly between your fingers and flat-
ten them to remove the curliness
Note : The wires must lay flat and together
aligned as closely as possible in order. When
finished the cable should look like as shown
in Fig 5
5 Cut a few mm while holding them firmly, so they are
2 Cut the separator off and untwist the wires back to all of the same length as shown in Fig 6.
within one-eighth inch of the jacket
6 Slide the RJ45 connector on to the wires making sure
3 Arrange the wires from left to right in the order they the wires stay lined up
are to be crimped. The normal crimping order for cross
cable is shown in Fig 4 & Fig 4a

Fig 5 Fig 8
Fig 9
Fig 6
Note : Try to make each wire fits in the slot of Fig 10

the connector and make each wire reach the
end of its slot. The cable jacket/insulation
should reach just beyond the end of the crimp
point as shown in Fig 7.
Fig 7
Note : Similarly straight through cable and roll

over cable can be prepared with the help of
7 Verify all the wires are in the correct order, and insert the instructor. The color code wiring order is
the connector in to the crimping tool and press to crimp shown in Fig 11.
as shown in Fig 8.
1 Green White
Note : Now half of the work done. The cable 2 Green
should look like as shown in the Fig 9 .The
process must be repeated for the other end of 3 Orange White
the cable. However the color code wiring order 4 Blue
changes for cross cable as shown in Fig 10.
5 Blue White

Fig 11
6 Orange Note : Cross over cable is used to connect be-

tween two hosts(PC's). Straight-through cable
7 Brown White
is used in a network when connecting a host
8 Brown to a switch. A rollover cable is used in a net-
working environment where a outer/switch is
to be configured from a computer. One end is
wired one way but on the other it is reversed.
You would typically use one end into a serial
port on a PC and the other into the console
port of the switch/router.
TASK 3 : Testing the cable with the LAN tester

1 Insert one end of the cross cable (prepared in Task 1) 3 Note the order in which LED's glowing in both the panel
in to one socket and other end in another plugged in of the LAN tester should correspond to the order shown
socket of the LAN tester as shown in Fig 12. in Fig 13.
Fig 12 Fig 13
One side other side
Note : Check for the batteries loaded in cable

tester
If the LED's doesn't glow , then there is a break in the
2 Switch ‘ON’ the LAN tester. cable.
TASK 4: Create workgroup and check the network connection
1 Open Control Panel from start menu. (Fig 14) 4 Select advance system setting.
2 Now select System & Security option. (Fig 15) 5 Select computer name.
3 Select System. 6 Click change. (See Fig 16)

Fig 14 Fig 16
Fig 7 Enter Computer Name (refer Fig 4)

15
8 Click OK
Fig 17
TASK 5 : Creating a Home Group on a local network
Create a Home Group to share libraries and Fig 18

devices with other computers on the network.
You can also stream media between devices.
1 In Windows, search for and open Home Group.

2 If a Home Group has been created already, enter the
password for it, and then click join.
User can find the password for the Home Group

on the computer that created it.
3 If a Home Group has not been created, click Create a

Home Group in Fig 18.
4 In he Create a Home Group window, click Next as
shown in Fig 19.

Fig 19 Fig 20
5 Select Shared in thebox next to the folders or devices

you want to share, then click Next as shown in Fig 21
Fig 20.
6 Write down or print the password and must use this
password to add other computers to the Home Group
Click Finish (Fig 21).

Practice IP addressing and subnet mask

• create IP address and subnet mask
• ping to test network.
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Assign different classes of IPv4 addressing

1 Connect PCs with switch using RJ45 cable as shown Fig 4
Fig 1.
Fig 1
Fig 5
2 Power on the PCs and network switch.

3 Type network connections in the search in PC1. (Fig 2)
Fig 2
4 Select "View network connections". (Fig 3)
Fig 3
For example : Class A IP address - 10.0.0.1 and

subnet mask 255.0.0.0 (Fig 6)
8 Assign IP address to other PCs 10.0.0.2, 10.0.0.3 and
5 Right click on Ethernet and select properties. (Fig 4) 10.0.0.4 etc.
6 Select Internet protocol version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click 9 Assign the same subnet mask to all PCs.
propertiesas shown Fig 5.
7 Select use the following IP address and assign ipv4
class-A IP address and subnet mask.
323
Fig 6
TASK 2: Test connectivity between computers

1 For testing connectivity between computers using
basic network commands. Fig 8
2 Open command prompt and Check IP configuration

using the command ipconfig. (Fig 7)
Fig 7
7 Change ip address and subnet mask of all PCs to

class-B.
8 Example: 128.0.0.1 to 128.0.0.2 etc and subnet mask
255.255.0.0 to all PCs.
9 Repeat the steps 2 to 4 to test the network.
10 Change ip address and subnet mask of all PCs to
class-C.
11 Example: 192.0.0.1 to 192.0.0.2 etc and subnet mask
255.255.255.0 to all PCs.
12 Repeat the steps 2 and 4 to test the network.
13 Change the IP address of PC1 to class B and keep all
other systems in Class A.
3 Note the systems IP configuration.
14 Check the connectivity from PC1 to other system using
4 Then check connectivity between system using ping Ping command.
command
15 Note the result.
5 Eg: ping 10.0.01 and note the result. (Fig 8) 16 Repeat the steps 13 to 15 by changing IP addresses
6 Check the connectivity to other systems also using to different classes.
that systems IP address.

Configuring HUB & switch

• install and configure HUB and switch.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Configure hub and switch
1 Select the HUB. (Fig 1)

Fig 4
Fig 1
Fig 5
2 Select Switch Rack. (Fig 2)
Fig 2
6 Connect all the connected ports of Patch Panel to the

HUB ports by drop cables. (Fig 6)
Fig 6
3 Fit the HUB in the Switch rack by screws.(Fig 3)

Fig 3
7 Connect the power source of HUB.

8 Now it is ready to use.
9 For Switch follow same procedure with a Switch
(Fig 7).
Fig 7
4 Insert all the LAN cables into the Switch rack.

5 Punch the LAN cables in patch panel ports by
Punching tools according to color code.(Fig 4 & 5)
325
Setup and configure wired and wireless LAN
• setup wired Ethernet network
• set wirelss network for LAN.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Setup wired Ethernet Network

1 Make sure that your Ethernet cable is plugged into 7 If assigned IP addresses to the computers, make sure
the Ethernet jack on your computer. that all computers have different IP addresses.
2 Make sure that the other end is plugged into a router, For home networks, IP addresses should be
hub, or switch. 192.168.N.N where N is a number you assign
3 Make sure that all computers are plugged into a between 0 and 254. The first N should be the
powered electrical outlet and turned on. same for all computers on your network and the
second N should be different for all computers
4 Make sure that the router, hub, or switch is plugged
on your network.
into a powered electrical outlet and turned on.
Most routers, hubs, and switches have lights that The computer does not recognize an add-in Ethernet
indicate they are working. card
1 Shut down and restart your computer.
5 Make sure that all computers on your network have
the same workgroup name. 2 Make sure that you have installed the required software.
6 Make sure that all computers are using the same 3 Reseat the card
Subnet Mask.
TASK 2: Complete the network connection checklist to troubleshoot various network issues
Step : 1 Check all of the network cables and wires 6 Check the firewall settings on all the computers on
the network. The firewall settings may be preventing
1 Check all of the network cables and wires. A loose or
network access.
disconnected cable or wire prevents a network
connection and Internet access. 7 After performing the items in the checklist, try to
connect to the network.
2 Check the following connections:
• Network cable from the modem to the network hub (or If you do not experience problems with the
router). network, you are done.
• Network cable from the network hub to the RJ-45 If you are still experiencing problems with the
network port on the computer. network, continue with the next step to use the
Network and Sharing Center.
3 Network cable between two computers.

4 Check the lights on the network hub. The lights can
often show the location of a connection problem.
5 If you are trying to connect to another computer on
the network, make sure that computer is turned on.
326
Step 2: Using the Network and Sharing Center in • A line with a red X indicates a broken or missing
Windows 7 connection as on Fig-3.
The Network and Sharing Center displays the Fig 3

status of the network and allows you to set up
network discovery and file sharing across the
network. Follow these steps to use the Network
and Sharing Center:
1 Click Start , Control Panel, and then click Network

and Internet as on Fig-1.
Fig 1
4 If the connection is broken or missing, click Connect

to a network to attempt a network connection as on
Fig-4.
The Network area displays the network access and
connection.
Fig 4
2 Click Network and Sharing Center as on Fig-2.

3 Check the status of the network at the top of the
window:
• A green line between the computer name and the
network name indicates a good connection to the
network.
Fig 2
5 Click Choose Homegroup and sharing options.
6 In the Homegroup settings window, click Change
advanced sharing settings as on Fig-5.
Fig 5

7 Turn on network discovery and file and printer sharing. • Turn off password protected sharing to allow everyone
on the network access to this computer.
In addition, now is a good time to review the • After configuring the settings in the Network and
other settings and turn them on or off as Sharing Center, try to connect to the network.
needed.
If you no longer experience problems with
Fig 6 the network, you are done. If you are still
experiencing problems with the network,
continue with the next step to use Windows 7
diagnostic and troubleshooting tools.
Step 3: Using Windows 7 diagnostic and trou-

bleshooting tools
Windows 7 includes a network diagnostic tool and a
network troubleshooter. Both tools help to identify
network problems and provide possible solutions.
Running Windows 7 Network Diagnostics
Windows 7 monitors the network and Internet
connections. If it detects a problem, Windows 7 displays
a no connection or limited connection message, and
These settings (Fig-6) must be enabled on all prompts you for permission to diagnose the problem.
computers in order to share across the network. " Click OK to allow Windows 7 to diagnose the problem
For example, if File sharing is turned off on one and restore the connection.
of the computers on the network, you cannot
access the files on that computer through the To run the diagnostic tool manually, use one of the
network. following options:
• No error message is displayed, but there is no Internet
• Network discovery: Turn on network discovery to allow connection:
the computer to find other network computers and
devices. • Right-click the Network Connection icon in the
• File and printer sharing: Turn on file sharing to share notification area,
files and folders with other computers on the network
and to allow network users access to the printers • Click Troubleshoot problems(fig-7). Windows
connected to this computer. Network users must know Network Diagnostics checks for problems.
the user name and password of a user account on Fig 7
this computer to access the printers.
• Public folder sharing: Turn on Public folder sharing
to allow other computers access to the Public folder
on the computer. You can choose to have users of
other computers on the network to be able to open
files, open and modify files, or to deny access to
network users.
• Media streaming: Turn on media streaming to allow • The Network Connection icon is missing in the
network users to access shared music, pictures, and notification area.
videos on this computer. • Click Start , and then type network and sharing in
• File sharing connections: Windows 7 uses 128- the Search box.
bit encryption to protect sharing connections. Some • Click Network and Sharing Center in the results as on
devices cannot support 128-bit encryption. If you are fig-8.
using one of these devices on the network, change
the setting to enable 40- or 50-bit encryption.
• Password protected sharing: Turn on password
protected sharing to require network users to enter a
user name and password of a user account on this
computer to access files, folders, and printers over
the network.

Fig 8 3 Click Troubleshoot problems (Fig 11).
Fig 11
• In the Network and Sharing Center, click the yellow

exclamation symbol or the red X in the
Network status area to run Windows Network The Network and Internet Troubleshooter
Diagnostics as on Fig 9. opens.
Fig 9 4. Click Internet Connections (Fig 12)to test the Internet
connection.
Fig 12
Windows 7 Network and Internet Troubleshooter
The Windows 7 Network and Internet

Troubleshooter tests the network for
problems and automatically repairs the
network connections if applicable. Use this tool
to test and repair the connection:
1 Click Start , and then type network and sharing in the

Search box.
2 Click Network and Sharing Center (Fig 10) in the
results.
Fig 10
5 Follow the instructions to check for problems.
If the problem continues, return to the Network

and Internet Troubleshooter and click Network
Adapter to test the adapter.
6 If the problem is resolved, you are done.

Step 4: Uninstalling and reinstalling the network
adapter software in Windows 7

If the network is still having problems, there 3 Right-click the name of the Network Adapter and select
may be an issue with the network adapter. You Uninstall.
can check the network adapter using the 4 On the Confirm Device Uninstall window, click 5.
Network and Internet Troubleshooter in the When the network adapter drivers have been
previous step. Alternatively, follow these steps uninstalled, restart the computer.
to uninstall and reinstall the network adapter
software in Device Manager: 5 When the network adapter drivers have been
uninstalled, restart the computer.
6 After the computer restarts and completes the
1. Click Start , and enter Device Manager into the
installation of the device driver software, try
Search field. Click Device Manager as on Fig 13. connecting to the Internet. If the problem still exists,
continue with the next step to update the network
Fig 13 drivers.
Step 5: Updating the network drivers
From a computer that has Internet access,

check the HP Web site for network drivers for
your product. If one is available, download and
install the latest update for your network
hardware. Use the following steps:
1. Go to the HP Software download page.

2. If you are presented with a page to enter your model
number, enter your model number. For example,
Pavilion p6230f or TouchSmart 600-1050uk.
3. Select the version of Windows the computer is using.
4. Click the Driver - Network link.
5. Select the network or modem driver update. For
2 Double-click the Network adapters (Fig 14) category. example, Realtek RTL8139 LAN Driver Update.
6. Follow the instructions on the download page to
Fig 14 download and install the update.
7. When done, restart the computer and connect to the
Internet again.

Setup a Proxy Server / DHCP Server with firewall

• setup a proxy server
• setup DHCP server in a PC.
TASK 1: Setup a proxy server

Fig 1
Setup Proxy Server in Windows 10
To set a proxy using an automatic configuration script,
follow these steps:
1 Open settings.
2 Click network & internet.
3 Click proxy.
4 In the automatic proxy setup section, set the use setup
script switch to ON.
5 Enter the script address as it was given to you; then
click save.
6 Close Settings.
7 Setting up an automatic proxy configuration script.
Set up a proxy manually (Fig 1)
The list of available proxy settings appears.
8 Open Settings.
11 In the Manual Proxy Setup section, set the Use a
9 Click Network & Internet. Proxy Server switch to On.
The list of network- and Internet-related settings appears. 12 In the Address field, type the IP address.
10 Click Proxy. 13 In the Port field, type the port.
14 Click Save; then close the Settings window.
TASK 2 : Setup DHCP server in a PC
If a DHCP server does not provide leased addresses to clients, it is frequently because the DHCP
service did not start. If this is the case, the server may not be authorized to operate on the network. If
you were previously able to start the DHCP service, but it has since stopped, use Event Viewer to check
the System log for any entries that may explain why you cannot start the DHCP service.
To restart the DHCP service:

5 Expand Services and Applications, and then click
1 Click Start, and then click Run.
Services.
2 Type cmd, and then press ENTER.
6 Locate and then double-click DHCP Server.
3 Type net start dhcpserver, and then press ENTER.
7 Verify that Startup is set to Automatic and that Service
or Status is set to Started. If not, click Start.
4 Click Start, point to Control Panel, point tod 5. Click OK, and then close the Computer Management
Administrative Tools, and then click Computer window.
Management.
331
Setting up video conferencing

• set Video Conferencing using Skype.
Requirements
• A working PC with internet connection - 1 No./batch.
• Web camera - 1 No.
• Microphone - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
NOTE: Instructor should connect Web Cam and Microphone before starting this Practical to the
Computer with good Graphic Adapter and high speed internet connection.
TASK 1 : set Video Conferencing using Skype.
1 Open Skype.com
Fig 2
2 Select Download Skype .
3 Select device e.g. Computer where you want to install
it.(refer Fig 1)
Fig 1
4 After download install it.

5 Now run it. (Fig 2)
6 Sign in to your account/ create your account.
10 Select an online contact from your contact list
7 If creating account fill up the form and submit.
11 Select "Video Call" to initiate a video call.
8 Now log in to skype.
12 Click the "+" sign then click "Add people" to add more
9 Add contacts by selecting "Add a Contact" from the Skype contacts to the video conference.
upper right of your contacts list and entering a Skype
username.
332
Setting up and configuring Firewall

• set up windows firewall
• configure windows 10 firewall to restrict ping traffic.
Requirements
Tools/ Equipments
• Scanner - 1 No.
• PC installed with Windows OS - 2 No.
• Interconnecting cable - as reqd.
• Printer - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Setup windows 10 Firewall

1. Windows Firewall in Windows 10 can be accessed
by three methods. Browse the settings to find its
location or ask Cortana, the personal assistant, for
the firewall’s location or Type “firewall” in the search
box in the task bar.
3. Check firewall status to determine whether the firewall

is turned on or off.
4. Click Turn Windows Firewall on or off from the left
side menu.
5. Configure the settings for your home/work (private) or
public network.
6. Click OK to save your changes.
2. Select Windows Firewall, the following window opens.
333
TASK 2 : Configuring windows 10 Firewall to restrict
ping traffic
1. Click Start and select Control Panel > Connect To;
then select System and Security.
2. The Windows Firewall, presents 2 options: Check
firewall status and Allow a program through
Windows Firewall. as shown in Fig.
the Enabled column is the Action column. This column

displays the action of Allow as to allow the connection
or Block as to deny the connection.
3. Select Check firewall status to display the status

window.
4. Select Allow an app through Windows Firewall to

display the Allowed Programs to communicate through
Windows Firewall window, as shown in Fig.
8. Double-click the rule File and Printer Sharing (Echo

Request – ICMPv4-in) in the middle pane, the
properties window is displayed, as shown in Fig. On
the General tab of this window, this rule is currently
set to Disabled and the action is set to Allow the
connection. Select the Enabled box and change the
5. Use the Advanced settings option to control both the action to Block the connection, the conditions of the
inbound and outbound traffic to the computer. The rule is chanded to be active and to block all incoming
Advanced settings firewall option can be found on the echo request or Ping request traffic.
left column of the firewall status window shown in Fig.
9. Select the Protocols and Ports tab to see the window
6. Open the Advanced security windows; click on the shown in Fig. The firewall program matches the Ping
Inbound Rules selected, the middle pane shows all Request by defining its protocol as an ICMPv4 protocol.
the firewall inbound rules. The Customize button will bring up the Customize
7. All roles are not enabled, The enabled rules are indicated ICMP Settings window, which shows the Echo Request
by the value Yes in the column Enabled. Right next to ICMP type is selected.

10. Select disable the connection to disable it, click on
apply. Check the applied rule.
11. To create a new inbound rule that allows traffic to
pass through the firewall, right-click Inbound Rules
and choose New Rule.
12. In the Rule Type dialog box, choose Port to create
a rule based on TCP or UDP ports.
13. Choose the protocol and specify the port that
you wish to allow through the firewall. For example,
choose TCP port 3389.
14. In the Action dialog box, specify whether to allow
or block this traffic. Allowing the traffic only if it is
secure can also be chosen. Choose “Allow the
connection” and then choose Next.
15. Check the applied rule by connecting to a domain,
on a private network, and a public network by
enabling the checkbox for each of those network
profiles. Choose Next.
16. Type a name for the rule and click on Finish.

COPA - Using Internet
Browse Internet for information

• browse a website through web browser
• download file from website.
Requirements
• A working PC with Internet
Connection - 1 No./batch.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Browse a website through Web browser
First way to open

Note : A home page Google appears on the
screen as on Fig 1
1 Choose Internet explorer and click it.
Fig 1
2 Type "www. dget.gov.in" Second way to open
Note : website of DGET appears on the screen 1 Type "www. dget.gov.in" on the Address bar and press
enter as on Fig 2.
Fig 2
336
Note :The DGET website appears on the
screen as on Fig 3.
Fig 3
TASK 2 : Download File from website
Down loading
1 Click Trade syllabus as in Fig 4 on the DGET home

page. Note: The window will appear on the
screenas in Fig 5.
Fig 4

Fig 5
2 Select and click CRAFTSMAN TRAINING Note: List of engineering and non-engineering
SCHEME (CTS) trades appears on the screen as on Fig 6
Fig 6

3 Scroll down the screen with the mouse and select 4 Click the selected trade COPA which is under lined
your trade syllabus in blue as on Fig 7.
Example: Trade name "COPA" Note: The syllabus of "COPA" appears on

the screen as on Fig 7.
Fig 7
5 Click "Save a copy" to save or download the syllabus.

Fig 8
Note : A screen appears on the screen to
save it as in Fig 8.

Save the file in c:/document/ COPA[1].(Fig 9) 6 Click the document from c:/ and print the downloaded
COPA syllabus
7 Check with the instructor.
Fig 9

Creating email ID, sending and receiving mails

• create an e-mail account
• create an export and import contacts
• compose and send e-mail with attach documents
• check the mails and sign out account.
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Create an Email Account
Note to the instructor: Make the trainees to create accounts as COPATRG as the primary name and
secondary in increasing order of number series, in Gmail.
Example: COPATRG2, COPATRG3 etc.
1 Create COPATRG2 in yahoo mail simultaneously at the end of Task 1
2 Add contact in "COPATRG2" of yahoo account
1 Choose " internet explorer" and Click to open it Note: An Account creation screen appears on
2 Click "Gmail" on the "Google" home page the screen Fig 1.
Fig 1
341
3 Click "CREATE AN ACCOUNT " Note : the following display appears on the
screen as on Fig 2.
Fig 2
Note: An account creation screen appears on Fig 4

the screen as shown in Fig 3.
Fig 3
Note : While typing the password the password

box has to denote strong as on Fig 4.
7 Choose Birthday January, 24, 1994, Male in Gender,

your mobile number in mobile number, and alternative
email id if you have.
8 Type the given quote "Prove your not an robot" box
9 Select the location as "India"
10 Click a the box "I agree to Google" and About person-

alization box" as shown in Fig 5.
4 Type "COPATRG" in First Name box, "1" in Last Name

box
5 Choose your username as "COPATRG1"
6 Password as "sachin@12" and retype the same in "con-

firm your password"

Fig 5
11 Click "Next Step" Note: A created account of

copatrg1@gmail.com is appeared on the
screen as on Fig 6.
Fig 6

12 Click " Continue to Gmail"
Note : A new Gmail account mail window
appears on the screen with three mails of
Google team appears as on Fig 7.
Fig 7
TASK 2 : Create an Export and Import Contacts
1 Login to "copatrg2" of Yahoo Mail first. Fig 8
2 Click on "contacts" options and select "Actions" and

choose "Export All" as on Fig 8.
Note : An Export window get opened as in

Fig 9.

Fig 9
3 Choose and click "Yahoo! CSV option. Note : The verification codes appears on the
screen as in Fig 10.
Fig 10
4 Type the given code and click export now button

Note : Fig 11 &12 appears on the top of the
export window and appear on the bottom of
the export window
Fig 11

Fig 12
3 Click "More" and choose "import" from it as on
Fig 14.
Fig 14
5 Click "yahoo_ab(1).csv" file from downloads of hard

disk drive to view the address book
Note : The downloaded file gets opened in

excel sheet were contacts can be checked.
6 Close the address book
7 Signout yahoo mail
Importing Contacts
1 Login to your Gmail account "copatrg1"
2 Click on "contacts" in Left hand panel of gmail as

shown in Fig 13.
Fig 13
Note: A "Import contacts" window appears on

the screen as on Fig 15.
4 Click "Choose file" option and select "yahoo_ab.csv"

the downloaded file of yahoo aaddress book
Note : Fig 16 shows how the selected file is

displayed before importing.
Note: A Contact window appears on the screen
Fig 15

Fig 16 Fig 17
5 Click "Import" button
Once the Import is complete you will see a con-

firmation message as on Fig 17.
TASK 3 : Composing and Sending mail with attachments
1 Choose and click "COMPOSE" button

Note : wait till the attachments gets completely
attached
Note : A compose window appears on the
screen
5 Click button and send the mail
2 Type "copatrg2@yahoo.com" in "TO" box
6 Signout "copatrg1" gmail account
3 Type "Copa syllabus" in "Subject" box
7 Check with your instructor
4 Attach "copa syllabus" from the downloads of hard
disk drive
TASK 4 : Checking mails and Sign Out
1 Sign in to "copatrg2" of yahoo mail.

Note : The unread messages are shown in the
2 Click "INBOX" inbox as in Fig 18.
Fig 18

IT & ITES Excercise 1.11.78
COPA - Internet concepts
Communicate on social networking

• Chat through text message
• Video chatting Enable video chatting
• Use social network sites.
Requirements
• A working PC wtih Internet
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Chat through text message
1 Open brower.
Fig 1
2 Enter address www.gmail.com
3 Enter your gmail Id and Password to login.
4 Contact list will be shown below compose.
5 Some Contacts would have green dots beside it
(See Fig 1) Indicationg online people.
6 Click on green dot to open chat window.
7 Type message to start chat.
TASK 2 :Enable Video chatting.
1 Check which contact lists has video chat options en- Fig 2
abled by checking green video sign.
2 Click video chat by clicking (Fig 2)
3 Start video chat.
348
TASK 3 Use social network sites.
1 Open brower. 4 In case no login Id , Fill the form and Sign Up.
2 Enter address www.facebook.com 5 Add friends.
3 Enter your gmail Id and Password to login. (Fig 3) 6 Send friend request.
7 Click ok.
Fig 3
8 Now post some message with a picture.
9 Open friends list.
10 Select some friend from the list by clicking.
11 Post something in friends facebook.
12 Click logout.

Use online utilities in Internet
• use online dictionary
• use translations
• use storage space
• share with mail links
• use download manager
• use youTube utilities
• use google map
• use google earth
• use update Windows.
Requirements
connection - 1 No. /trainee
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Online dictionary
1 Open browser 4 Scroll down to see the different meaning of the word
(Fig 3)
2 Enter online dictionary or www.dictionary.com (Fig 1)
Fig 3
Fig 1
3 Type the word whose meaning you need to know e.g.:

utility (Fig 2)
5 Repeat the steps to find the meaning of two more words
Fig 2
6 Close the browser
350
TASK 2: Use Translations
1 Open browser 6 Press Translate (Fig 5)
2 Enter the address www.translate.com (Fig 4)
Fig 5
Fig 4
7 Repeat the above steps for two more word translation

3 Click the language for the input word e.g.: ENGLISH
8 Close the browser
4 Type the word, e.g.: utility
5 Click the language the input word needs to be
translated into, e.g.: HINDI
TASK 3: Use Storage space
1 Open the browser Fig 7
2 Log in using your Google account

(Note: In case you don't have a Google account, create
a new account to continue)
3 Click on the Google Apps icon and select Drive (Fig 6)
Fig 6
Fig 8
4 Click on My Drive to view the files and folders in your

account (Fig 7)
5 Click on +New to create a new folder named COPA
(Fig 8)
6 Add the files related to COPA in the folder

7 Log off from the account
8 Close the browser

TASK 4 : Use Share with mail links
1 Open the browser 7 Press the Get sharable link to share with mail links
2 Log in using your Google account (Fig 10)
(Note: In case you don't have a Google account, create Fig 10

a new account to continue)
3 Click on the Google Apps icon and select Drive
(Fig 6)
4 Click on My Drive to view the files and folders in your
account (Fig 7)
5 Click on the file you need to share
6 Click the SHARE button on the right hand side of the
file (Fig 9)
Fig 9
8 Enter the email address to share the link and click

Done
9 Log off from your account
10 Close the Browser
TASK 5: Download Manager
1 Open the Browser 3 Click on the Free Download Manager link and press
Free Download (Fig 12)
2 Enter download manager (Fig 11)
Fig 11 Fig 12
4 Complete the installation of the Free Download

Manager
5 Download any files or video using Download Manager.

TASK 6: Use YouTube utilities
1 Open the browser 4 Search for the video 'how to assemble a PC' in YouTube
(Fig 14)
2 Log in using your Google account
5 Log off from the account
(Note: In case you don't have a Google account, create
a new account to continue) 6 Close the browser
3 Click on the Google Apps icon and select YouTube. Fig 14
(Fig 13)
Fig 13
TASK 7: Google map
1 Open browser Fig 16
2 Enter address http://maps.google.com (Fig 15)
Fig 15
Fig 17
3 Enter the place in Search Google Maps (Fig 16)

4 Click Directions and type the name of starting point
(Fig 17)
5 Note the time taken by taking different routes and
modes of transportation
6 Close the Browser

TASK 8: Use Google earth 4 Analyse the area in 2D and 3Dwith zoom in and zoom
out .Note down the details about the place (Fig 20)
1 Open the Browser
Fig 20
2 Enter the address earth.google.com (Fig 18)
Fig 18
5 Close the Browser.

3 Enter the destination name to find on earth in the
search tab (Fig 19) (Note: Google earth works best in Google
Fig 19
chrome and Firefox browsers)
6 Select Show bookmarks bar to see the web pages

bookmarked.
7 Repeat the above steps and bookmark any three web
pages
8 Close the Browser.
TASK 9: Use Update windows
1 Click start button or press short cut key window +x. 3 Click Update and Security window update window will
2 Choose settings. appear on the screen.
4 Click “check for updates”. Now the window
automatically change the available updates in your PC.
After checking the update, it is automatically install
and finish the update.

Configuring outlook, Mail service in mobile phone & using skype,
google+
• configure Microsoft outlook and view messages
• compare and send new messages
• reply to received message
• use stationery with outgoing messages
• use skype
• use Google+
Requirements
Hardware and Software
• Mobile phone wtih Internet connection - 1 No.

• Outlook Tools - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 Configure Microsoft outlook and view messages
1 Click on the Microsoft outlook express shortcut Note that, if you have set the Outlook express to
automatically connect to the ISP, the dial-up
found on your Windows desktop.
software automatically calls the ISP and gets
This invokes the Microsoft outook Express connected to the internet automatically. Then
program and the screen looks similar to that it receives all the messages in the accounts you
shown in Fig 1. have set and will even get disconnected once
all the messages are received and all pending
messages are sent.
Fig 1
355
2 To View messages received in the Inbox, Click on the Fig 4
message line (highlighted) as shown in Fig 2.
Fig 2
Fig 5
It also shows the sender name, date of dis-

patch, attachment if any, sender’s email ad-
dress and the time when sent.
3 Read and record the From, To and Subject of the

message.
Fig 2 is only a sample display. You should

record information of the message seen in your
outlook and not what is seen in Fig 2.
4 Repeat step-2 and 3 for two more messages, Get it

checked by the instructor.
Check new messages.
Once the connection is succussfully established,
Generally newly received message will ap- the autodialler disappears. If you have any
pear bold till it is read, once read, its typeface new messages, it will be shown highlighted as
becomes normal. The number of newly re- in Fig 6.
ceived messages is shown in bracket in Inbox
(See Fig 2. This has one new message). The Fig 6
contents of the newly received message can be
viewed as in steps 2 and 3 above. For viewing
lengthy messages use the scroll bars provided
in the view window.
5 Click on Send/Recv button . A pull down menu

appears as shown in Fig 3. From the list, choose
“Receive All”.
7 View the newly received message as done in steps
Fig 3 2 and 3 and get it checked by the instructor.
Your instructor will send another message to
all the trainees from his workstation.
8 Repeat steps above to receive the new message sent
by your instructor.
9 Disconnect from the internet connection as practiced in
In case you are not connected to the network previous exercises.
yet, it gives a message as shown in Fig 4.
This is to avoid the waste of internet connec-
6 Click on Yes to go online. The dial-up connection tion/Telephone time, when you are doing tasks
software or some sort of auto-dialler software comes up that does not require a online internet
as shown in Fig 5 and connectes your PC to the connection.
internet.

TASK 2 : Compose and send a new Message
1 To compose a new message, click on the New mail It is not mandatory to fill the Cc and Subject
informations. But it is always a good practice to
button found near the left hand top write the subject to be sure that the receiver
gets a idea about the message type before
corner of the screen. opening and reading it.
On clicking this button, the system, invokes a 3 Get it checked by your instructor.
new window as shown in Fig 7 or Fig 8 depend- 4 Take the cursor to the message area and type the
ing on the outlook version used and the settings message you want to send.
made.
Fig 10 shows a typical message.
Fig 7
Fig 10
5 Get the composed mail message checked by your

instructor.
6 Click on the send button to carryout spell check(not
Fig 8 mandatory) and send the message.
On clicking the send button the spelling check

program checks for errors in the spelling. It is
quite similar to spell check in other window
programs.
The message is then sent, which can be veri-

fied by clicking on the send/receive button
which pops-up a sending status as shown in Fig
11. On completing sending the message the
display at Fig 11 automatically disappears.
However, if there were any errors in sending,
the error message is displayed.
2 In the New message dialog box, type the ‘To’ address Fig 11
and the subject of the mail similar to that shown in
Fig 9.
Fig 9.

Sending attachments with email 11 Select the folder attach1.doc created at step-8. Click
on the “Attach” button to attach the file to the mail
7 Disconnect from the internet connection unless your message.
connection is through a proxy server.
On attaching the file with the mail message,
This is to avoid waste of telephone connected the New message dialog box looks similar to
time and the internet alloted time. that shown in Fig 13.
8 Create a small doc file using MS Word or even the Fig 13

notepad.
Save the file under C:\COPA\INT\xxxx\attach1.doc.
9 Get connected to internet as done in previous steps and

compose a new message as done earlier.
10 On the “New message” window, click on the attach 12 Get the attached file and the message checked by the
button. instructor.
13 Click on the Send button to send the mail message with

This opens a dialog box as shown in Fig12. attachment.
14 Repeat steps above to send at least two more mail

Fig 12
messages with file attachements.
TASK 3: Reply to received message
1 Open the inbox as practiced in earlier steps. Click on 3 After typing the reply text message, press the send
a message received to read the message. button to send reply message to the sender.
2 To reply the received message, click on the button to 4 Get the reply message checked by the instructor.
send a reply to the received mail.
On clicking the reply button, the mail compos-

ing window opens in insert mode where the
user can enter the reply text and need not
enter the “To” address, as it will be filled up
with the email id of the sender.

TASK 4: Use stationery with outgoing messages
RECALL: Stationery is a template that can Program Files/Common Files/Microsoft shared/

include a background image, unique text font Stationary
colors, and custom margins. With Outlook
3 To apply or change stationery after you start a mes-
Express stationery, you can create attractive
sage, from the menu choose Format > Apply Station-
messages for e-mail.
ery, and then select a stationery of your choice.
1 To apply stationery to all outgoing messages, from the
4 Prepare at least four new messages using four different
menu, choose, Tools > Options > Compose tab. In
stationary.
the Stationery card, select Mail checkbox, and then
click Select.
5 Get the skills practiced by you in this exercise verified
by the instructor.
2 To apply stationery to individual messages, from the
menu, choose Message > New Message Using. In
the pop-down menu select any of the listed stationary
or choose Select a stationery and select any of the
stationary files available under,
TASK 5: Use skype
Note : For conducting this practical, two 3 Now log In with user Id and password.
machine shouldbe fitting with microphone, 4 Add contacts by selecting "Add a Contact" from the
web cam,and speaker and high speed internet upper right of your contacts list and entering a Skype
connection username.
1 Open Skype. 5 Select an online contact from your contact list.
2 Create Log in ID & password by Sign Up process. 6 Select "Video Call" to initiate a video call.
TASK 6: Use Google+
Fig 14
1 Open Browser.
2 Open www.gmail.com site
3 Login with ID and password
4 Click UserId+ button.
5 Google+ screen will open. (Fig 14)
6 Share your views publicly.

Browser utilities
• browser history view and clear
• bookmark a web page for future view.
Requirements
• A working PC - 1 No. /batch
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Browser history view and clear 4 Click on Clear Browsing data to clear the browsing
history (Fig 2)
1 Open browser
2 Click on Customise and control icon on the Fig 2
top right hand of the screen
3 Click the on History in the drop down menu to view the
browser history (Fig 1)
Fig 1
5 Click on Clear data on complete the clearing of browser

history
6 Close the browser
TASK 2: Bookmark a web page for future view
1 Open the Browser 4 Enter the Name and Folder details and click Done
2 Enter the address of any web page, e.g.: .(Fig 3)
www.skilldevelopment.gov.in 5 To see other bookmarks, click on the Customise and
control icon on the top right hand of the
screen.(Fig)
3 Click on the Bookmark this pageicon on
the top right hand of the screen
Fig 5
360
COPA - Designing Static Webpages
Practice with Basic HTML elements, tags and attributes

• display a text messag using HTML program
• display NIMI address using HTML program
• display a paragraph using HTML program.
Requirements
• A working Pc with windows OS. - 1 No./batch.
TASK 1: Display text message using HTML program.
1 Type the following program in a Notepad file.

Fig 1
<html>
<head>
<title>First HTML program</title>
</head>
<body>
WELCOME TO COPA TRADE
</body>
</html>
5 Get the output verified by the instructor.
2 Save it as text . html
3 Open the browser ‘Internet Explorer’ and open the
file text. html
4 The output will be as follows. (Fig 1)
• If correct output is not displayed, do the following
• Press Ctrl G to open the console window to view the
errors in the HTML program.
• Note the errors
• Open program in Notepad to correct the errors and
save it.
• Go to browser and press F5 to refresh the page or
open the saved filed in browser.
361
TASK 2: Display NIMI address using HTML program.
1 Type the following program in a Notepad file. 2 After typing the text in the notepad file save it as
NIMI ADDRESS . html
<html>
3 Open the browser and open the file
<head>
NIMI ADDRESS . html
<title>NIMI address</title>
</head>
5 Get the output verified by the instructor
<body>
NATIONAL INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA
Fig 2
INSTIUTE<BR>POST BOX NO.3142<BR>
CTI CAMPUS<BR>GUINDY<BR>CHENNAI-600
032
</body>
</html>
TASK 3: Display a paragraph using HTML program.

2 After typing the text in the notepad file save it as
<!PARAGRAPH GENERATION IN HTML>
Paragraph . Html
<html>
3 Open the browser and open the file
<head>
<title>PARAGRAPH GENERATION</title> Paragraph . html
</head> 4 The output will be as follows. (Fig 3)
<body>
<p>HTML stands for Hyper Text Markup Language
HTML describes the structure of Web pages using
markup
HTML elements are the building blocks of HTML
pages
HTML elements are representaed by tags
HTML tags label pieces of content such as heading,
paragraph, table and so on
Browsers do not display the HTML tags, but use
them to render the content of the page
</p>
</body>
</html>
Fig 3

Design simple web page with text, paragraph and line break and using
HTML Tags
• display text of different sizes using heading tags
• create a paragraph using <p> tag
• preformat text using <pre> tag
• apply line break using <br> tag.
Requirements
TASK 1: Display text of different sizes using heading tags.
1. Type the following program in a Notepad file. 5 Get the output verified by the instructor.
<HTML> Fig 1
<HEAD>
<TITLE> HEADING TAGS </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<h1>This is heading 1</h1>
</BODY>
</HTML>
2 Save it as Heading. html

3 Open it in Internet Explorer
363
TASK 2: Create a paragraph using <p> tsg.
1 Type the following program in a Notepad file. 2 Save it as Paragraph. html

3 Open it in internet Explorer
<HTML>
<HEAD> 4 The output will be as follows. (Fig 2)
<TITLE> PARAGRAPH TAG </TITLE>
</HEAD> Fig 2
<BODY>
<P>
HTML is the standard markup language for
creating Web pages.
HTML stands for Hyper Text Markup Language.
markup.
pages.
HTML elements are represented by tags. 5 Get the output verified by the instructor
</P>
</BODY>
</HTML>
TASK 3: Preformat text using <pre> tag.

HTML>
<HEAD> 2 Save it as Preformat. html
<TITLE> PREFORMATTED TEXT </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY> Fig 3
<pre>
creating Web pages.
HTML stands for Hyper Text Markup Language.
markup.
pages.
HTML elements are represented by tags.
</pre>
5 Get the output verified by the instruction.
</BODY>
</HTML> Note : The HTML <pre> element defines
preformatted textThe text inside a <pre>
element is displayed in a fixed-width font
(usually Courier), and it preserves both spaces
and line breaks:

TASK 4: Apply line break using <br> tag.
1 Type the following program in a Notepad file. 4 The output will be as follows. (Fig 4)
Fig 4
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE> LINE BREAK </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<P>
creating Web pages.<br>HTML describes the
structure of Web pages using markup.<br>HTML
elements are the building blocks of HTML pages.<br>
HTML elements are represented by tags.
</P>
</BODY>
</HTML>
2 Save it as Line break .html


Design simple web page with text, background colour, picture using HTML
Tags
• format text using HTML tags
• set <Font> tag and its attributes
• add background colour
• insert picture
• add special characters.
Requirements
TASK 1: Format text using HTML tags.

HTML> 4 The output will be as follows. (Fig 1)
<HEAD>
<TITLE> FORMATTING TEXT </TITLE> Fig 1
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<PRE>
<CENTER> <U> <B> FORM CONTROLS </

B> </U> </CENTER>
<BIG> Check Box </BIG>
<SMALL> Text Box</SMALL>
<STRONG> Option button </STRONG>
<I> Command Button <I>
<EM> Toggle Button <EM>
LOG<SUB>2</SUB>10
(A+B)<SUP>2</SUP>
</PRE> Note :
</BODY> <center> - center text
<u> - underline text
</HTML> <b> - Bold text
<strong> - Important text
2 Save it as Format . html <i> - Italic text
<em> - Emphasized text
3 Open it in Internet Explorer <big> - <big text>
<small> - Small text
<sub> - Subscript text
<sup> - Superscript text
5 Get the output verified by the Instructor.
366
TASK 2: Set <FONT> tag and its attribute.
1 Type the following program in a Notepad file. 2 Save it as FONT . html

<HTML> 4 The output will be as follows. (Fig 2)
<HEAD> Fig 2
<TITLE> FONT TAG</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<FONT COLOR="BLUE" SIZE="20" FACE =
"ALGERIAN">
World Wide Web
</FONT> 5 Get the output verified by the instructor
</BODY>
</HTML>
TASK 3: Add back ground color.
1 Type the following program in a Notepad file. 2 Save it as Background. html

<HTML>
<HEAD>
Fig 3
<TITLE> BACKGROUND TAG </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR = "AQUA">
<BIG> Nice Background Color </BIG>
</BODY>
</HTML>
5 Get the output verified by the instructior.

TASK 4: Insert Picture.
<HTML> Fig 4
<HEAD>
<TITLE> INSERT IMAGE </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<IMG SRC="C:\Users\Public\Documents\iti-logo-
1.JPG" ALT = "ITI SYMBOL">
</BODY>
</HTML>
2 Save it as Picture .html

TASK 5: Add special character.
Fig 5
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE> ADD SYMBOLS </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<PRE>
(A &gt B) and (A &gt C)
(X &lt Y) and (X &lt Z)
(A+B) &AMP&AMP (C+D)
</PRE>
</BODY> 5 Get the output verified by the instructor.
</HTML>
2 Save it as Symbol .html

Design simple webpage with tables and lists

Objectives : At the end of this lesson, you shall be able to
• create an ordered list
• create an unordered list
• create a description list
• create a nested list
• create a table with heading, cell pading and cell spacing
• create a table with background and border colour.
Requirements
TASK 1: Create an ordered list.

2 Save it as orderlist. html
HTML>
<HEAD> 4 The output will be as follows. (Fig 1)
<TITLE> ORDERED LIST </TITLE> Fig 1
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<B><U> PROTOCOLS </U></B>
<OL TYPE = “1”>

<LI> FTP </LI>
<LI> HTTP </LI>
<LI> SMTP </LI>
<LI> TCP/IP </LI>
<LI> UDP </LI> Note: The type attribute of the <OL> tag, defines
</OL> the type of the list item marker:
type="A" - The list items will be numbered
with A,B,C,…
</BODY>
type="a" - The list items will be numbered
</HTML> with a,b,c,…
type="I" - The list items will be numbered with
I,II,III,IV,…
type="i" - The list items will be numbered with
i,ii,iii,iv,….
369
TASK 2: Create a Unordered List.
1 Type the following program in a Notepad file. 2 Save it as Unordered. html

3 Open it in internet Explorer
<HTML>
<HEAD>
Fig 2
<TITLE> UNORDERED LIST </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<B><U> CABLES USED FOR NETWORKING </U></
B>
<UL TYPE = "square">

<LI> Sheilded Twisted Pair Cable </LI>
<LI> Unsheilded Twisted Pair Cable </LI>
<LI> Fibre Optic Cable </LI> Note: The type attribute of the <UL> tag, de-
</UL> fines the type of the list item marker:
type="disc" - Sets the list item marker to a
</BODY> bullet (default)
</HTML>
type="circle " - Sets the list item marker to a
circle
5 Get the output verified by the instructor
TASK 3: Create a description list.

<dd>- Microsoft Access is a database management
system (DBMS) from Microsoft that combines the
<HTML>
relational Microsoft Jet Database Engine with a
graphical user interface and software-development
<HEAD> tools. It can also import or link directly to data stored
<TITLE> DESCRIPTION LIST </TITLE> in other applications and databases.</dd>
</HEAD> </dl>
<BODY> </BODY>
<B><U> MS OFFICE </U></B> </HTML>
<dl> 2 Save it as Description. html

<dt>MSWORD</dt>
<dd>- Microsoft Word or MS-WORD (often called
Word) is a graphical word processing program that 4 The output will be as follows. (Fig 3)
users can type with. It is made by the computer
company Microsoft. Its purpose is to allow users to Fig 3
type and save documents. Similar to other word
processors, it has helpful tools to make
documents.<dd>
<dt>MSEXCEL</dt>
<dd>- Microsoft Excel is a spreadsheet developed
by Microsoft for Windows, macOS, Android and iOS.
It features calculation, graphing tools, pivot tables,
and a macro programming language called Visual
Basic for Applications.</dd>
<dt>MSACCESS</dt>

TASK 4: Create a nested list.
1 Type the following program in a Notepad file. 2 Save it as Nestedlist .html

<HTML> 4 The output will be an follows. (Fig 4)
<HEAD> Fig 4
<TITLE> NESTED LIST </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<B><U> MS OFFICE </U></B>
<ul>
<li>INPUT DEVICES
<ul>
<li>KEYBOARD</li>
<li>MOUSE</li>
<li>SCANNER</li>
</ul>
5 Get the output checked by the instructor.
<li>OUTPUT DEVICES
<ul>
<li>PRINTER</li>
<li>PLOTTER</li>
<li>MONITOR</li>
</ul>
<li>MEMORY DEVICES</li>
</ul>
</BODY>
</HTML>

TASK 5: Create a table with heading, cellpadding and cellspacing

2 Save it as Table1 .html
<HTML> 3 Open it in Internet Explorer
4 The output will be an follows. (Fig 5)
<HEAD> Fig 5
<TITLE> TABLE 1 </TITLE>

</HEAD>
<BODY>
<B> PARTICULARS OF GOVERNMENT ITI
(WOMEN) </B> <BR> <BR>
<table BORDER=”5" CELLPADDING=”5"
CELLSPACING=”10">
<tr>
<th>SNO</th>
<th>NAME OF THE TRAINEE</th>
<th>TRADE</th> 5 Get the output checked by the instructor.
<th>SEMESTER</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1.</td>
<td>ANITHA.C</td>
<td>COPA</td>
<td>II</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2.</td>
<td>VENI.T</td>
<td>IT</td>
<td>II</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3.</td>
<td>PRIYA.S</td>
<td>ICTSM</td>
<td>II</td>
</tr>
</table>
</BODY>
</HTML>

TASK 6: Create a table with background and border colour.

2 Save it as Table 2 .html
<HEAD> Fig 6
<TITLE> TABLE 2 </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<H1> TRADE : COPA </H1>
<H2> PRACTICAL MARK LIST </H2>
<TABLE BORDER=”5"
BORDERCOLOR=”GREEN”
Note: Table’s border colour in set to Green and
BGCOLOR=”ORANGE” WIDTH=”50%”> background colour is set to orange.
<tr> <td>1</td> <td>AMBIKA.S</td> <td>98<
td> </tr>
<tr> <td>2</td> <td>VIJI.K</td> <td>98</td>
</tr>
<tr> <td>3</td> <td>ANU.D</td> <td>97</td>
</tr>
<tr> <td>4</td> <td>MAMTA.B</td> <td>96</
td> </tr>
<tr> <td>5</td> <td>JORONA.S</td> <td>95</
td> </tr>
</TABLE>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Use Marquees, hyperlinks and mail to link in designing Webpages

Objectives : At the end of this exercise, you shall be able to
• create a scrolling text using <Marquee> tag
• set the Behaviour, Direction and Scroll Amount attributes to <Marquee> tag
• set the BGcolor and width attributes to <Marquee> tag
• set the Loop and Height attributes to <Marquee> tag
• scroll the image using <Marquee> tag
• create a hyperlink to NIMI website
• open link in new browser window
• create a hyperlink for an image
• use ‘mail to’ and send mail.
TASK 1: Create a scrolling text using <Marquee> tag.

1 Type the following program in a Notepad file. 2 Save it as MARQUEE1.HTML
4 The output will be “NATIONAL INSTRUCTIONAL

<HEAD> MEDIA INSTITUTE, CHENNAI” which is scrolling
<TITLE>MARQUEE TAG</TITLE> towards left.
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<H1> <FONT TYPE=”broadway”>
<MARQUEE>
NATIONAL INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA INSTITUTE,
CHENNAI
</MARQUEE>
</H1> </FONT>
</BODY>
</HTML>
374
TASK 2: Set the BEHAVIOUR, DIRECTION and SCROLL AMOUNT attributes to <MARQUEE> tag.
4 The output will be “Directorate General of

<HEAD> Employment & Training (DGE&T)” which starts
<TITLE> MARQUEE WITH ATTRIBUTES-1 </ faster scrolling towards right.
TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<FONT SIZE=”25" COLOR=”Blue”>
<MARQUEE BEHAVIOR=”scroll” DIRECTION =

“right” SCROLLAMOUNT=”40">
Directorate General of Employment & Training
(DGE&T)
</MARQUEE>
</FONT>
</BODY>
</HTML>
TASK 3: Set the BGCOLOR and WIDTH attributes to <MARQUEE> tag.
2 Save it as MARQUEE3.HTML
<HTML>
<HEAD> 4 The output will be “National Council for
<TITLE> MARQUEE WITH ATTRIBUTES-2 </ Vocational Training (NCVT)” which starts
TITLE> scrolling towards left and bounces back and
</HEAD> forth in 70% screen width with yellow
background color.
<BODY>
<FONT SIZE=”25">
<MARQUEE BEHAVIOR=”alternate” BGCOLOR =

“yellow” WIDTH = “70%”>
National Council for Vocational Training (NCVT)
</MARQUEE>
</FONT>
</BODY>
</HTML>

TASK 4: Set the LOOP and HEIGHT attributes to <MARQUEE> tag.
4 The output will be “The Ministry of Labour and

<HEAD> Employment “which starts scrolling towards up
<TITLE> MARQUEE WITH ATTRIBUTES-3 </ 3 times (Loop).
TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<FONT SIZE=”40">
<MARQUEE DIRECTION = “UP”
HEIGHT=”100%” SCROLLAMOUNT = “40%”
LOOP=”-1">
The Ministry of Labour and Employment
</MARQUEE>
</FONT>
</BODY>
TASK 5: Scroll the image using <MARQUEE> tag.
<HTML> 3 Open it in Internet Explorer. (Fig 1)
4 The output will have scrolling train image and it

<HEAD> stops when it reaches left edge of the screen.
<TITLE> MARQUEE IMAGE </TITLE> Fig 1
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<MARQUEE BEHAVIOUR=”slide”
SCROLLAMOUNT=”20%”>
<IMG SRC=”TRAIN.PNG” alt=”TRAIN”>
</MARQUEE>
</FONT>
</BODY>

TASK 6: Create a hyper link to NIMI website.
1 Type the following program in a Notepad file. 2 Save it as LINK1.HTML

4 The output will be as shown below. (Fig 2)

<HEAD>
Fig 2
<TITLE> Hyperlink </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<!— link to Home page of NIMI website —>
<A Href=”http://nimi.gov.in/”> Visit to NIMI website
</a> When you click on Visit to NIMI website, it jumps
</BODY> to the home page of NIMI website.

</HTML>
TASK 7: Open a link in new browser window.

<HTML>
<HEAD> 4 The output will be as shown below. (Fig 3)
<TITLE> Hyperlink </TITLE> Fig 3
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<!— Opens the link in new window —>
<a href=”https://www.google.co.in/” TARGET =
When you click on Visit Google, it opens the
“_blank”>Visit Google</a>
Google in new browser window..
</BODY>
</HTML> 5 Get the output verified by the instructor.

TASK 8: Create a hyperlink to an imge.
<HEAD>
<TITLE> Hyperlink </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<p> An image as a link:</p>
<ahref=”https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
Brihadeeswarar_Temple#/media”>
<img src = “Brihadeswara_Temple_Landscape.jpg”
height=100" width=”100">
</a>
</BODY>
</HTML>
TASK 9: use ‘mail to’ and send mail
1 Type the following program in a Notepad file 2 Save it as LINKMAIL.HTML

<html>
<head> 4 The output will be shown below Fig 4.
<title> Mailto Link </title>
Fig 4
</head>
<body>
<p>
This is an email link:
<ahref=”mailto:gititn@mail.com” target=”_top”>Send
Mail</a>
</p>
</body>
</html>

5 Mailto link is a type of HTML link that activates the Fig 5
default mail client on the computer for sending an e-
mail. The web browser requires a default e-mail client
software installed on his computer in order to activate
the e-mail client. If you have Microsoft Outlook, as
your default mail client, pressing the Send Mail link
opens a new mail window. (Fig 5)
6 Create the mail and send.

Create frames, and add style

• create vertical frameset
• create horizontal frameset
• create mixed frameset
• use <style> attribute in HTML tags.
TASK 1 : Create Vertical Frameset
1 Type the following program in Notepad file and save 4 Type the following program in Notepad file and save it
as PRG2.HTML
it as PRG1.HTML
<HTML> <HTML>
<HEAD>
<HEAD>
<TITLE> PRG2 for VERTICAL FRAMES </TITLE>
<TITLE> PRG1 for VERTICAL FRAMES </TITLE> </HEAD>
</HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR = "AABBCC">
<H1>
<BODY BGCOLOR = “CCAABB”>
<OL TYPE = "A"> PRIMARY MEMORY
<H1> <BR><BR>
<OL> MEMORY DEVICES <LI>RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY</LI>
<BR><BR> <BR><BR>
<LI>READ ONLY MEMORY</LI>
<LI>PRIMARY MEMORY</LI>
</OL>
<BR><BR> </BODY>
<LI>SECONDARY MEMORY</LI> </HTML>
</OL>
</BODY>
</HTML> 6 The output will be as follows. (Fig 2)
Fig 2

Fig 1
380
7 Type the following program in Notepad file and save it 10 Type the following program to create VERTICAL
as PRG3.HTML FRAMESET in Notepad file and save it as
VERFRAME.HTML
<HTML>
<HEAD> <HTML>
<TITLE> PRG3 for VERTICAL FRAMES </TITLE>
</HEAD> <HEAD>
<TITLE> VERTICAL FRAMES </TITLE>
<BODY BGCOLOR = "CCBBAA"> </HEAD>
<H1>
<OL TYPE="a"> SECONDARY MEMORY <frameset cols="35%,30%,*">
<BR><BR> <frame src="PRG1.html">
<LI>HARD DISK</LI> <frame src="PRG2.html">
<BR><BR> <frame src="PRG3.html">
<LI>DVD</LI> </frameset>
</OL> </HTML>
</BODY>
</HTML> 11 Open it in Internet Explorer
Fig 4
9 The output will be as follows (Fig 3)
Fig 3
TASK 2 : Create Horizontal Frameset
1 Type the following program in a Notepad file and save 3 The output will be as follows. (Fig 5)
it as HORFRAME.HTML
Fig 5
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE> HORIZONTAL FRAMES </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<frameset ROWS="35%,30%,*">
<frame src="PRG1.html">
</frameset>
</HTML>
4. Get the output verified by the instructor.

TASK 3: Create Mixed Frameset
1 Type the following program in a Notepad file and 2 Open it in Internet Explorer
save it as MIXFRAME.HTML
<HTML> Fig 6
<HEAD>
<TITLE> MIXED FRAMES </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<frameset COLS="40%,*">
<frameset ROWS="50%,*">
frame src="PRG3.html">
</frameset> 4 Get the output verified by the instructor.
</HTML>
TASK 4 : use <style> attribute in HTML tags.
1. Type the following program in a Notepad file and 2 Open it in Internet Explorer
save it as STYLE.HTML
<HTML>
Fig 7
<HEAD>
<TITLE> STYLE </TITLE>
</HEAD>
<body style=”background-color:yellow;”>

<h1 style=”font-size:300%;text-
align:center;color:indigo;”>ROUTER</h1>
<p style=”color:blue;font-family:comic sans MS;”>

A ROUTER IS A DEVICE THAT FORWARDS
DATA PACKETS ALONG NETWORKS. A
ROUTER IS CONNECTED TO
ATLEAST TWO NETWORKS, COMMONLY TWO
LANS OR WANS OR A
LAN AND ITS ISP’S NETWORK. ROUTERS ARE
LOCATED AT
GATEWAYS, THE PLACES WHERE TWO OR
MORE NETWORKS CONNECT.
</p>
</body> </HTML>

Insert text box, check box and combo box in webpage

• insert textbox in webpage
• add checkbox in webpage
• create combo box in webpage
TASK 1 : Insert textbox in Web page.
1 Type the following program in Notepad file and save

it as TEXTBOX.HTML
2. Open it in Internet Explorer
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html> 3. The output will be as follows. (Fig 1)
<body>
4. Get the output verified by the instructor.
<form action="/action_page.php">
Trainee Name: <input type="text" name="Trainee
Name" value="Rhitika"><br><br>
Father Name : <input type="text" name="Father
Name" value="Velliangiri"><br><br>
Mother Name : <input type="text" name="Mother
Name" value="Rajeshwari"><br><br>
<input type="submit" value="Submit">
</form>
<p><b>Click the "Submit" button and the form-

data will be sent to a page on the server called "/
action_page.php".</b></p>
</body>
</html>
Fig 1
383
TASK 2 : Add checkbox in Web page.
1 Type the following program in Notepad file and save 2 Open it in Internet Explorer
it as CHECKBOX.HTML
<!DOCTYPE html>
Fig 2
<html>
<body>
<form action=”/action_page.php”>
<p> Known Softwares </p>
<input type=”checkbox” name=”software1"
value=”windows”>Windows OS
<br>
value=”msoffice”>Microsoft Office
<br>
value=”html”>Hyper Text Markup Language 4 Get the output verified by the instructor.
<br>
value=”css”>Cascaded Style Sheet
<br>
<br>
<input type=”submit”>
</form>
</body>
</html>

TASK 3 : create combo box in webpage
1 Type the following program in Notepad file and save

it as COMBO.HTML
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<body> Fig 3
<p>You can preselect an option with the selected

attribute.</p>
<select name=”semester”>
<option value=”s1">Semester 1</option>
<option value=”s3" selected>Semester 3</
option>
</select>
<br><br><br><br><br><br>
</form>
</body>
</html>

Design webpage using password field, submit button, reset button and radio
button
• insert password control in webpage
• insert submit and rest button in webpage
• insert radio button in webpage.
TASK 1 : Insert Password controls in Web page.
it as PASSWD.HTML
<!DOCTYPE html> 4 Get the output verified by the instructor.

<html>
<body>
<form action=””>
Type User name:<br>
<input type=”text” name=”userid”>
<br>
Type User password:<br>
<input type=”password” name=”psw”>
</form>
<p>The characters in a password field are

masked (shown as asterisks or circles).</p>
</body>
</html>
Fig 1
386
TASK 2 : Insert Submit and Reset buttons in Web page.
1 Type the following program in Notepad file and save it 2 Open it in Internet Explorer
as RESET.HTML

<html>
<body>
<form action=”/action_page.php” method=”get”>

User Name: <input type=”text”
name=”userid”><br><br>
Password : <input type=”password”
name=”psw”><br><br>
<button type=”submit” value=”Submit”>Submit</
button>
<button type=”reset” value=”Reset”>Reset</
button>
</form>
</body>
</html>
Fig 2

TASK 3 : Insert Radio button in Web page.
1 Type the following program in Notepad file and save it 2 Open it in Internet Explorer
as RADIOBTN.HTML
<html>
<body>
<input type=”radio” name=”gender” value=”male”
> Male<br>
<input type=”radio” name=”gender”
value=”female” checked> Female<br>
<input type=”radio” name=”gender”
value=”other”> Other<br><br>
</form>
</body>
</html>
Fig 3

Design a webpage adding flash file, audio and video files

• add flash file
• add audio file
• add video file.
TASK 1 : Add Flash file in Web page.
it as FLASH.HTML
<!DOCTYPE html> Fig 1
<html>
<body>
<object width=”300" height=”300"

data=”panda.swf”>
</object>
</body>
</html>
Note: As SWF file is an animation created with

Adobe Flash that can be played by Flash Player
or with a web browser that has the Flash plug in
installed. It may contain text, vector and raster
graphics and interactive content written in Ac-
tion Script.
389
TASK 2 : Add Audio file in Web page.
it as AUDIO.HTML
3. The output will be as follows (Fig 2)
<!DOCTYPE html> Fig 2
<html>
<body>
<audio controls>
<source src=”horse.ogg” type=”audio/ogg”>
<source src=”horse.mp3" type=”audio/mpeg”>
Your browser does not support the audio element.
</audio>
</body>
</html>
TASK 3 : Add Video file in Web page.
1 Type the following program in Notepad file and save 2 Open it in Internet Explorer (Fig 3)
it as VIDEO.HTML
Fig 3
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<body>
<video width=”320" height=”240" controls>

<source
src=”C:\Users\mdc5\Downloads\Beautiful
Nature.mp4" type=”video/mp4">
<source src=”movie.ogg” type=”video/ogg”>
Your browser does not support the video tag.
</video>
</body>
</html>

4 Get the output verified by the instructor. Note: Currently, there are 3 supported video
formats for the <video> element: MP4, WebM,
and Ogg:
• MP4 = MPEG 4 files with H264 video codec
and AAC audio codec
• WebM = WebM files with VP8 video codec
and Vorbis audio codec
• Ogg = Ogg files with Theora video codec
and Vorbis audio codec
Element Chrome IE Firefox Safari Opeara
<video> 4.0 9.0 10.5 4.0 10.5

Design webpage with forms and form controls using HTML Tags
• design form using form controls
TASK 1 : Design form using Form controls
1 Type the following program in Notepad file and save it

as FORM.HTML <b>TRADE :</b> &emsp;
<!DOCTYPE html> <select name=”trade”>
<html> <option value=”t1">COPA</option>
<body> <option value=”t2" selected>Information
Technology</option>
<form action=”/action_page.php”> <option value=”t3">Informtion Communication
<h1> STUDENT INFORMATION SYSTEM</H1> Technology & System Maintenance</option>
<br><br> <option value=”t4">Computer Hardware &
<b>Name:</b> &emsp; &emsp; &emsp; <input Network Maintenance</option>
type=”text” name=”name”><br><br> </select>
<b>Father’s name :</b> <input type=”text” <br><br><br><br><br><br>
name=”fname”><br><br>
<b>Mother’s name :</b> <input type=”text”
name=”mname”><br><br> <b>Languages you know:</b><BR><br>&emsp;
&emsp; &emsp;
<b>Date of Birth:</b> <SELECT NAME=”language” MULTIPLE>
<OPTION VALUE=”tamil”SELECTED>Tamil
<OPTION VALUE=”hindi”>Hindi
<input type=”date” name=”bday”><br><br> <OPTION VALUE=”english” SELECTED>English
<OPTION VALUE=”malayalam”>Malayalam
<OPTION VALUE=”kannada”>Kannada
<b>Gender:</b> <br> </SELECT>
&emsp; &emsp; <input type=”radio” <br><br>
name=”gender” value=”male” > Male <br>
&emsp; &emsp; <input type=”radio” <b>Computer Knowledge:</b><br><br>
name=”gender” value=”female” checked> &emsp; &emsp; &emsp; &emsp;
Female<br> <input type=”checkbox” name=”software1"
&emsp; &emsp; <input type=”radio” value=”windows”>Windows OS
name=”gender” value=”other”> Other<br><br> <br>
&emsp; &emsp; &emsp; &emsp;
<b>Communication Address:<br> <input type=”checkbox” name=”software2"
<textarea rows=”6" cols=”50"> value=”msoffice”>Microsoft Office
<br>
</textarea><br><br> &emsp; &emsp; &emsp; &emsp;
value=”html”>Hyper Text Markup Language
<br>
392
&emsp; &emsp; &emsp; &emsp; Note: - adds a single space
<input type=”checkbox” name=”software4" &ensp; - adds two spaces
value=”css”>Cascaded Style Sheet &emsp; - adds four spaces
<br>
<br>
<input type=”submit” value=”Submit”>
<input type=”reset”>
</form>
</body>
</html>
Fig 1

Create webpages using cascading style sheet

• create table using css.
• create forms using css.
• create gym & fitness website using css.
TASK 1 : Create table using CSS
1 Type the program in Notepad
<!DOCTYPE html> padding: 8px;

<html> }
<head>
<style> tr:nth-child(even){background-color: #a2a2f2}
table {
border-collapse: collapse; th {
width: 100%; background-color: red;
} color: white;
}
th, td { </style>
text-align: left; </head>
padding: 8px; <body>
}
<h2>TRADE : INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY</
tr:nth-child(even){background-color: #a2a2f2} h2>
<h3>SEMESTER : I</h3>
th {
background-color: red; <table>
color: white; <tr>
} <th>SNO.</th>
</style> <th>Name of the Trainee</th>
</head> <th>Practical (300)</th>
<body> <th>Paper I (220)</th>
<th>Paper II (180)</th>
<h2>TRADE : INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY</h2> </tr>
<h3>SEMESTER : I</h3> <tr>
<td>1.</td>
<td>Saranya</td>
table { <td>285</td>
border-collapse: collapse; <td>170</td>
width: 100%; <td>135</td>
} </tr>
<tr>
th, td { <td>2.</td>
text-align: left; <td>Devi</td>
394
<td>290</td> <tr>
<td>190</td> <td>4.</td>
<td>160</td> <td>Nancy</td>
</tr> <td>260</td>
<tr> <td>155</td>
<td>3.</td> <td>130</td>
<td>Deepa</td> </tr>
<td>280</td> </table>
<td>175</td>
<td>150</td> </body>
</tr> </html>
2 Save the file using .html extension
3 The Output will be as follows Fig 1
Fig 1
TASK 2 : Create Form using CSS

1 Type the following in Notepad
input[type=submit] {
<!DOCTYPE html>
background-color: blue;
<html>
color: white;
<head>
padding: 12px 20px;
<style>
border: none;
*{
border-radius: 4px;
box-sizing: border-box;}
cursor: pointer;
float: right;
input[type=text], select, textarea {
}
width: 100%;
padding: 10px;
input[type=submit]:hover {
border: 2px solid #ccc;
background-color: #60aabb;
border-radius: 5px;
}
resize: vertical;
}
.container {
border-radius: 5px;
label {
background-color: #f2f2f2;
padding: 10px 10px 10px 0;
padding: 20px;
display: inline-block;
}
}

.col-25 { </div>
float: left; <div class=”row”>
width: 25%; <div class=”col-25">
margin-top: 6px; <label for=”mid”>Mail ID</label>
} </div>
<div class=”col-75">
.col-75 { <input type=”text” id=”mid” name=”mailid”
float: left; placeholder=”Your Mail ID”>
width: 75%; </div>
margin-top: 6px; </div>
} <div class=”row”>
<div class=”col-25">
/* Clear floats after the columns */ <label for=”trade”>Trade</label>
.row:after { </div>
content: “”; <div class=”col-75">
display: table; <select id=”trade” name=”trade”>
clear: both; <option value=”copa”>COPA</option>
} <option value=”em”>Electronic Mech</
option>
@media screen and (max-width: 600px) { <option value=”im”>Instrument Mech</
.col-25, .col-75, input[type=submit] { option>
width: 100%; </select>
margin-top: 0; </div>
} </div>
} <div class=”row”>
</style> <div class=”col-25">
</head> <label for=”wexp”>Working Expereience</
<body> label>
</div>
<h2>Student Entry Form</h2> <div class=”col-75">
<textarea id=”wexp” name=”workexp”
<div class=”container”> placeholder=”Write your experience”
<form action=”/action_page.php”> style=”height:200px”></textarea>
<div class=”row”> </div>
<div class=”col-25"> </div>
<label for=”cname”>Candidate Name</ <div class=”row”>
label> <input type=”submit” value=”Submit”>
</div> </div>
<div class=”col-75"> </form>
<input type=”text” id=”cname” </div>
name=”candname” placeholder=”Your name”>
</div> </body>
</html>
2 Save the file with .html extension 3 The output will be as follows (Fig 2)

Fig 2
TASK 3: Create Gym & Fitness Website using CSS
a Type the following CSS program in Notepad and

save it as webstyle.css
/* Style the topnav links */
*{ .topnav a {
box-sizing: border-box; float: left;
} display: block;
color: #f2f2f2;
body { text-align: center;
font-family: Cambria; padding: 14px 16px;
padding: 10px; text-decoration: none;
background: White; }
}
/* Change color on hover */
/* Header/Blog Title */ .topnav a:hover {
.header { background-color: #ddd;
padding: 25px; color: black;
text-align: center; }
background: white;
} /* Create two unequal columns that floats next to
each other */
.header h1 { /* Left column */
font-size: 80px; .leftcolumn {
} float: left;
width: 75%;
/* Style the top navigation bar */ }
.topnav {
overflow: hidden; /* Right column */
background-color: grey; .rightcolumn {
} float: left;
width: 25%;

/* Responsive layout - when the screen is less
background-color: #f1f1f1;
than 800px wide,
padding-left: 20px;
make the two columns stack on top of each other
}
instead of next
to each other */
div.gallery {
@media screen and (max-width: 800px) {
border: 1px solid #ccc;
.leftcolumn, .rightcolumn {
}
width: 100%;
padding: 0;
div.gallery:hover {
}
border: 1px solid #777;
}
}
/* Responsive layout - when the screen is less

div.gallery img {
than 400px wide,
width: 24%;
make the navigation links stack on top of each
other instead
}
of next to each other */
@media screen and (max-width: 400px) {
.topnav a {
/* image */
float: none;
.img1 {
width: 100%;
background-color: #aaa;
}
width: 100%;
}
padding: 10px;
b. Type the following HTML program in Notepad
}
and save it as weblayout.html.
/* Add a card effect for articles */

Note : Use webstyle.css as an External style
.card {
sheet in weblayout.html using link attribute.
background-color: white;
Also this CSS file can be linked and used in any
padding: 20px;
HTML program.
margin-top: 20px;
}
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
/* Clear floats after the columns */
<head>
.row:after {
<link rel=”stylesheet” type=”text/css”
content: “”;
href=”webstyle.css”>
display: table;
</head>
clear: both;
<body>
}
<div class=”header”>
/* Footer */
<h2>GS GYM & FITNESS POINT</h2>
.footer {
padding: 20px;
</div>
text-align: center;
background: #ddd;
<div class=”topnav”>
margin-top: 20px;
<a href=”#”>Home</a>
}
<a href=”#”>Features</a>

<a href=”#”>Classes</a> the week. It specialises in products like
<a href=”#” style=”float:right”>Login</a> treadmills, elliptical cross trainers, exer-bikes,
</div> rowers, spin bikes, home gyms, multi-gyms,
benches, functional strength training equipment
<div class=”row”> and a variety of accessories. The equipment range
<div class=”leftcolumn”> is built on quality,stability and superior
<div class=”card”> performance. It also offers services that cover
<h2>WELCOME TO GS GYM & FITNESS selling health and fitness equipment, servicing of
POINT</h2> fitness equipment, setting up gyms/fitness
<h4>Don’t Wish for it, Work for it.....</h4> centres for homes and institutions,designing the
<div class=”img1"><img src=”gym1.jpg” fitness centre layouts, branding, flooring,
alt=”image of fitness point gym” width=100%></ providing supplemental services for running these
div> gyms.</h4>
</div>
<p>GS Gym & Fitness Point in
kavundampalayam, Coimbatore</p>
<div class=”gallery”>
<p align=”justify”> Rock Gym & Fitness Point <img src=”gym2.jpg” alt=”Gym & Fitness
in Coimbatore has worked towards making image1" height=”250">
available fitness instruments and solutions to the <img src=”gym3.jpg” alt=”Gym & Fitness
citizens. This venture has a mission of building a image2" height=”250">
healthier India. Over the course of time, this <img src=”gym4.jpg” alt=”Gym & Fitness
establishment has brought about a startling image3" height=”250">
change in the way people perceive about fitness <img src=”gym5.jpg” alt=”Gym & Fitness
and health and made its mark in the fitness image4" height=”250">
industry. It specialises in manufacturing and </div>
marketing top-of-the-line fitness equipments for
home and commercial uses.Many of their
initiatives have inspired the citizens of Coimbatore </div>
to exercise and take a step towards a healthier
lifestyle. This company is situated at No.120
2B,Mettupalayam Road, Coimbatore-30. In <div class=”rightcolumn”>
Kavundampalayam, their office is surrounded by <div class=”card”>
numerous commercial centres and residential
dwellings and is well-connected to the other parts <h4>Mail ID - gsgym@gmail.com</h4>
of the city. <h4>Phone no - 2233445566</h4>
The nearest landmark is the New Bus stand of </div>
Coimbatore. </p>
<div class=”card”>
</div> <h3>Most Popular</h3>
<h4>elliptical trainers</h4>
<div class=”card”> <h4>exercise equipment</h4>
<h2>Services Offered at GS Gym & Fitness <h4>home fitness equipment</h4>
Point</h2> <h4>sole treadmills</h4>
<h4>Visit GS Gym & Fitness Point in <h4>Weight training equipment</h4>
kavundampalyam anytime as per your
convenience between working hours on any day of </div>

</div>
<div class=”card”>
<h3>Follow Me</h3> <div class=”footer”>
<h5> copyright @ 2018 Sakthi Inc. All rights
<img src=”gmailicon.png” alt =”gmail icon” reserved Site Map</h5>
width =”50" height=”50"> </div>
<img src=”twitterimage.jpg” alt =”gmail icon”
width =”50" height=”50"> </body>
<img src=”instagram.png” alt =”gmail icon” </html>
width =”50" height=”50">
<img src=”youtube.png” alt =”gmail icon” Output in Fig 3.
width =”50" height=”50">
</div>
</div>
Fig 3

Use WYSIWYG (Kompozer) web design tools to design and edit Webpages
with various styles
• create, save and edit a web page using kompozer
• modify the body tag properties of the page source
• insert and format text using kompozer
• inserting a table in a web page.
• insert,resize and align images using kompozer
• modifying Table Cell Properties
• creating Hyperlinks in a web page.
• creating forms in a web page.
• applying a style to a web page
• setting up a web site.
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Create, save and edit a web page using kompozer
1 To create a new page, click the 'New' button on the 6 To open an existing page, click 'File' on the menubar.
Composition toolbar.(Ref Fig. 1)
7 Click 'Open File'.
2 To save the page, click 'Save' on the Composition
8 Browse to the file and click 'Open'.
toolbar.
9 To browse a page,click on the 'Browse' button on the
3 If you have to save a new document a dialog window
Composition tool bar.
will ask you to enter a title for the page. This will ap-
pear in the tab at the top of the page display area. 10 To edit pages use the buttons on the Composition tool
bar or the standard windows editing commands like
4 This is not the file name. Type in a name for the page
Ctrl c etc. or double click on an item to be edited.
and click 'OK'.
5 You will then be offered a normal save window which
allows you to browse to a suitable location and name
the file. The file extension offered will be HTML.
401
Fig 1
TASK 2: Modify the Body tag properties of the page source.
1 On the Status bar click the <body> marker. All the 5 Right-click and select 'Inline Styles' and 'Box
contents of the page will be highlighted. properties'.
2 Right-click and select 'Inline Styles' and 'Background 6 In the 'Width' box select the width desired for the page.
properties'.
7 In the 'Margins' area in both 'Left' and 'Right' boxes
3 Make the desired selections and click OK. type 'auto'
4 To center a page in the window, click the <body> marker 8 Click OK
on the Status bar. All the contents of the page will be
highlighted.
TASK 3: Insert and format text using kompozer
1 Type the necessary text in the page. 4 To create numbered and bullet list click on the lists
option on the formatting tool bar.
2 Select the text to be formatted.
3 Click on the Format menu and select the required
option from the Formatting tool bar like font, text color
etc.

TASK 4: Insert,resize and align images using kompozer
1 Save your page so that kompozer will not have difficulty 5 In the box labelled 'Alternate text' add a description of
in referencing where your image is located. the image.
2 Click the 'Image' button on the Composition toolbar.The 6 In the box labelled 'Tooltip' you may optionally insert a
Image properties window opens. 'Title' attribute for the image.
3 Click 'Choose File', browse and select a file. 7 Click OK.
4 Click 'Open'. Leave checked the box 'URL is relative to 8 To position and resize an image, click the image and
page location'. This will allow you to move the page use the sizing handles to resize it.
and image to another location, as you will have to when
9 To align an image, click on the image.
you upload them to a server. (If you de-select this and
move the page, it will try to find the image at the origi- 10 Click the Image button on the Composition toolbar:
nal location.) this will open the Image properties box.
11. Select the 'Appearance' tab.
If the box is 'greyed out' this may be because
the page has not been saved. 12 In the drop down box 'Align text to image' select the
required alignment.
13 Click OK.
TASK 5: Inserting a table in a web page.
Method 1 Method 2
1 To insert a table, click the table button on the Compo- 1 On the Composition Toolbar click the Table button. The
sition Toolbar. The 'Insert table' window appears. 'Insert table' window appears.
2 Select the required no.of cells to create a table. 2 Click the 'Precisely' tab.
3 Leave the 'Quickly' tab selected and drag out a matrix. 3 Specify the number of rows and columns required.
4 Click the bottom right cell to define the table arrange- 4 Specify the width of the table either in pixels or as a
ment. percentage of window size.
5 The cells appear on the screen with narrow outlines. 5 Alternatively clear the 'width' box. This will give 'fluid'
width which will automatically adjust to the contents.
6 If a border is required around the table enter the width
in pixels otherwise enter '0'.
TASK 6: Modifying Table Cell Properties
1 Right-click the table and select 'Table Cell 5 To insert / delete cells, rows, columns and even table
properties'.The Table properties window opens. in a table, select the insert option in the properties
menu.
2 Select 'Table' tab to control the properties of the table.
6 To change the cell size an alternate method click on
3 Select 'Cell' tab to control the properties of the cells.
the cell. This reveals a set of six manipulation sym-
4 In the properties box select the appropriate option to bols (triangles with circles inside)
change the alignment of cells, merging of cells, split-
7 To add cells, rows, columns in the table, click on the
ting of already joined cells, wrapping of text background
triangle symbols.
color, size of table and cells etc.
8 To delete cells, rows, columns in the table, click on
the circle symbol within the triangle symbols.

TASK 7 : Creating Hyperlinks in a web page.
1 To insert a hyperlink, select (highlight) a few words of 9 Alternatively Right-click and select 'Create Link'. The
textin the page. 'Link Properties' window opens.
2 On the Composition toolbar click on the 'Link' button, 10 When the Link Properties window opens, enter the email
alternatively Right-click and select 'Create Link'. The address and check the box 'The above is an email ad-
'Link Properties' window opens. dress'.
3 Click on 'Choose File' and browse to the file that you 11 To create image with a link, click on the image.
want to link to.
12 On the Composition toolbar click on the 'Link' button,
4 Click OPEN. alternatively Right-click and select 'Create Link'. The
'Image Properties' window opens.
5 Click OK.In Normal or Preview mode you will now find
your text underlined and in a different color (commonly 13 Click on 'Choose File' and browse to the file that you
blue). want to link to. (The box 'URL is relative to page loca-
tion' is checked.)
6 To change the link properties, double-click on the text.
The 'Link Properties' pop up again. 14 Click OPEN
7 Change the file to which the link refers. 15 Click OK.
8 To insert an e mail address, click on the 'Link' button
on the Composition toolbar.
TASK 8: Creating forms in a web page.
1 To set up a form, click the form button on the Compo- trols needed. (If blank placeholders are needed it is
sition tool bar. better to put some dummy text in now and delete it
later.)
2 In the Form properties window give the form a name of
your choice. 6 Where controls are needed click the corresponding
placeholder and using the drop down box beside the
3 Complete the Action box with the correct URL (or any
Form button select the required control.
local address if not using a server) and select the ap-
propriate method 7 Give each control a unique name.
4 Click OK. 8 Each control has specific information which needs to
be entered. Enter it into the box in the window which
5 On the form place any headings, paragraphs and im-
appears.
ages ensuring that there is a placeholder for any con-
TASK 9: Applying a style to a web page
1 To create a style rule for an element, click the actually lists the style declarations for that element,
CaScadeS button on the Composition toolbar. The CSS which is now blank.
Stylesheets window opens.
7 Select in turn as required the tabs for 'Text', 'Back-
2 To create a rule click 'Style applied to all elements of ground', 'Border' etc and specify exactly how you wish
type' that element to appear.
3 Beside the blank box click the drop down arrow. You 8 Return to the general tab to see the full declarations
will see listed a number of common elements. that you have set for the Selector
4 To create a style for one of these click it alternatively 9 If you click the 'General' tab you will see all the decla-
enter the tag for any other element. rations for the rule. You can edit these here but it is
better to leave the job to CaScadeS because if you
5 Click 'Create Style rule'
make any errors the declaration will be deleted. Click
6 You are now presented with a window headed 'Selec- OK.
tor' followed by the tag for the element. The window
10 To edit the created styles, reopen the CaScadeS, Click
and expand the stylesheet and click the rule involved.

TASK 10 :Setting up a web site
1 Create the necessary number of pages. 5 The box should read something like
'file:///C:/Documents … ' (Ignore the hint line which
2 Open Site Manager, click 'Edit Sites'. This opens
applies to remote sites only.)
the 'Publish Settings' window. Refer Fig 2.
6 Leave the other boxes (Web site information, User name
3 Choose a convenient name for the
etc.) blank.
site and enter it in the box 'Site Name'.
Back in Site Manager in the column headed 'Name'
4 In the 'Publishing server' area click 'Select directory'
the new site should be listed and can be expanded to
and browse to the folder where the site is located,
show its contents.
select the folder and OK.
Fig 2


COPA1 ST Sem TP

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

COPA1 ST Sem TP

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

COMPUTER OPERATOR AND

SECTOR: IT & ITES

DIRECTORATE GENERAL OF TRAINING

Copyright © 2018 National Instructional Media Institute, Chennai

All rights reserved.

New Delhi - 110 001

MEDIA DEVELOPMENT COMMITTEE MEMBERS

Shri. C.Jeyaprakash - Technical Head

Shri. S.Venkadesh Babu - Chief Executive Officer

Shri. M.Manjunath - Junior Training Officer

Shri. Imdadullah - JTO,

Smt. R. Jeyalakshmi - Training officer,

Shri. K. Kumaravel - ATO,

Smt. S. Jemmakalgani - ATO,

Shri. S. Chithrakumar - ATO,

Shri. J. Herman - Assitant Manager,

Shri. V. Gopalakrishnan - Assitant Manager,

Exercise No. Title of the Exercise Page No.

Module 1: Safe Working Practices

1.1.02 Safety symbols and hazard detection 2

1.1.03 Practice safe methods of fire fighting in case of electrical fire 5

1.1.04 Use of fire extinguishers 6

Module 2: Computer Components

1.2.05 Identify Computer peripherals and internal components 9

1.2.06 Assemble a desktop computer 13

Module 3 : Windows Operating System

1.3.07 Windows 10 interface and navigation 15

1.3.08 Manage files and folders in Removable Drives 22

1.3.09 Customize desktop settings and user accounts 25

1.3.10 System Properties and control panel 30

1.3.11 Keyboard shortcuts and commands 34

1.3.12 Print and Scan Documents 36

Module 4 : Computer Basics & Software Installation

1.4.13A BIOS settings, uses and modifications 39

1.4.13B Configure the CMOS setup 42

1.4.14 Installing windows 10 operating system 44

1.4.15 Hard disk formatting and partitioning 48

1.4.16 Identiy and rectify common hardware and software issues 50

1.4.17 Installing system application software 51

1.4.18 Configure Bluetooth / Wi-Fi settings 61

1.4.19 Install printer, scanner, Web camera & DVD drives 68

1.4.20 Burning a data in CD or DVD’s using Nero 75

Module 5 : DOS Command Line Interface and

1.5.21 Basic DOS Commands 76

1.5.22 Managing files and folders using DOS commands 80

1.5.23 Installing ubuntu linux operarting system 84

1.5.24 Install necessary application software in linux 88

1.5.25B Practice on manipulation and searching commands 94

1.5.27 Desktop saetting in linux 100

Module 6 : Word Processing Software

1.6.30 Create, open, save and rename word document 111

1.6.31A Format the document in MS word - 1 116

1.6.31B Format the document in MS word - 2 130

1.6.32A Insert and format the table 134

1.6.32B Insert and format the table and objects 141

1.6.33 Page layout setting and printing the document 155

1.6.34 Use templates 162

1.6.35 Mail merge using MS word 166

1.6.36 Word - Publishing options 174

1.6.37 Typing practice using open source typing tutor 185

Module 7 : Spreadsheet Application

1.7.39 MS Excel Screen components and Tools 192

1.7.40 Create, save and formatting excel sheet 193